Larkspur and Vickie Batzka once again assisted me by reading draft copies of this story and offering suggestions to improve it as well as catching my errors. I owe them my heartfelt thanks.

“The Marriage of True Minds”

Part 3

by Deborah Grant

October 2004

Chapter 1

Ben Cartwright felt his firstborn’s arms embrace him and his normally imperturbable son’s voice was choked with emotion as he said, “It’s so good to see you again, Pa.” Just then, the impatient voice of Ben’s ten-year-old grandson could be heard distinctly.

“But I wanna see Grandpa!”

“And Grandpa wants to see you,” Ben called, smiling at his son, who moved just slightly to one side, keeping a hand on Ben’s shoulder. A.C. ran into the great room, tall and skinny just as his father had been at the same age, with the same dimpled grin.

He stopped short of Ben and Adam and, suddenly self-conscious, said, “G’day, Grandpa,” in a subdued tone but Ben held out his arms for a hug and the child went to him without hesitation.

“You’ve grown so much since the last time I saw you. I think you’re taller than your father was when he was ten,” Ben said, resting a hand on his grandson’s shoulder, and was rewarded by another happy grin. You have your mama’s gregarious and demonstrative nature, Ben thought, giving his grandson’s shoulder an affectionate squeeze. He looked up and saw his granddaughter, Gwyneth, framed in the doorway, looking lovelier and more poised than the girl he remembered. She smiled shyly, showing that she had also inherited her father’s dimple—along with his reserve.

“G’day, Grandpa,” she said in her soft, melodious voice before hugging him gently. She moved to stand by her father, and Ben saw his oldest grandchild for the first time since her wedding five years earlier. Beth was as ravishingly beautiful as ever with her enormous hazel eyes under delicately arched brows, perfectly proportioned nose, full lips that begged to be kissed and dimpled chin. A young child with golden-brown hair and soft, doe-eyes held her right hand, while a younger child with thick raven hair and enormous chocolate-brown eyes clutched her left.

Beth hunkered down so she was eye level with her babies and said quietly, “This is your Great-grandpa. Can you go give him a kiss?” Shy Elen hung back but Huw toddled over on his chubby legs.

Adam was concerned about Pa bending over, so he scooped up his grandson saying, “Pa-pa will hold you so you can give Great-grandpa a kiss.” Huw placed a resounding smack on Ben’s weathered check, and then overcome with shyness, he buried his face in his grandpa’s neck. Ben held up one gnarled hand and gently stroked the little boy’s silky hair, remembering how soft Adam’s hair had been at that same age.

Watching her younger brother had given Elen courage and now she ran toward Ben. Smiling, Gwyneth said, “I’ll hold you up,” and she lifted her little niece and held her so she could kiss Ben’s cheek. Even further emboldened, Elen said, “G’day, geat-ganpa,” before dimpling.

Ben smiled at her saying, “Good day to you, Elen. I see you have your grandpa’s dimple.” He reached out and cupped her soft cheek in his palm before turning to hug Beth. “Motherhood certainly agrees with you, Beth dear. I think you are even lovelier, although that hardly seems possible.” He saw her flawless milky-white complexion flush with color.

“Grandpa, you’re going to make me vain,” she scolded with a smile, and hugged him again before moving to stand by her little brother. Ben saw his daughter-in-law then, her violet eyes as beguiling as ever, and held out his arms to her. He hugged her tightly before greeting her parents.

“How wonderful to see you again, Llywelyn and Siân,” he stated with a warm, welcoming smile. “What do you think of the Ponderosa?”

“As our grandson would say, ‘What a ripper!’” Dr. Davies replied, returning Ben’s smile and shaking his proffered hand. “Adam tells us we only saw a small portion of the station, uh, I mean ranch, as we drove here.”

“That’s true. My sons and I worked hard to make the Ponderosa the largest and most successful ranch in Nevada,” Ben replied with justifiable pride.

“You mean in the entire West,” Joe contradicted from the doorway. “I told them the most beautiful sight on the whole ranch is Lake Tahoe.”

“If tomorrow is as beautiful as today, I thought maybe we could have a picnic there,” Adam said hesitantly, for now he wasn’t sure if Pa would be up to a trip to the lake.

Ben saw his concern and said gently, “If you’ll drive the Davies and me in the buggy, I think a picnic would be a wonderful idea, son. In fact.” he added with a grin, “since none of you have been on horseback for a month, I suggest we all ride there in the surrey.” With a rueful smile, Adam concurred.

“I wanna see the cabin,” A.C. announced.

“Sure,” Joe replied. “We fixed it up so it’ll be ready for Miranda and William.”

“Can I stay there with ‘em?” A.C. asked, not understanding why all the adults were suddenly choked with laughter.

“No, I’m afraid not, Jackeroo,” Adam said, trying unsuccessfully to keep a straight face. He saw the scheming look on his son’s face and spoke more firmly, “Adam Stoddard Cartwright, Jr., you are to keep away from the cabin while Miranda and William are here. Do you understand?”

“I bet they wouldn’t care,” the boy replied sullenly.

“Oh yes they would,” his parents, grandparents, sisters and uncle said simultaneously, which made him blink in surprise.

“A.C. bach, when a man and women first marry, they want to have time alone together,” Bronwen explained.

“Why?” he asked and was surprised when his mama and mam-gu’s faces got red. Even Beth and Gwyneth turned very pink. “Oh, you mean they want to kiss and stuff,” he said suddenly.

“That’s right,” Adam said quickly to forestall any further discussions of stuff. “Now, I want your word that you won’t go to the cabin while Miranda and William are here.”

“Right. I mean, yes, sir. I promise that I won’t go when they’re here. But can I go tomorrow?”

“Everyone who wants may go tomorrow,” Adam agreed.

Just then two of the hands entered the house carrying Beth’s trunk. “’Scuse me, Boss, but which room does this trunk go in?” one asked. Adam tried not to look surprised as he realized that the man was addressing his younger brother, rather than their father, when he said “Boss”.

“That depends on whose trunk it is,” Joe said. “I recognized Adam and Bronwen’s, but that’s all.”

“It’s mine,’ Beth said so Joe added, “Take it to Hoss’s room, Jacob.”

Ben said to Beth, “We’re putting you and the little ones in his old room,” and she smiled and squeezed his hand. “We brought the crib down from the attic although from what Adam once wrote, I imagine Huw may prefer to sleep in the bed with you and Elen.” He smiled, adding, “As you remember, it’s a pretty big bed.” Beth nodded, wishing she could recall something of the large, gentle uncle who had inhabited that room and whom her daddy had always spoken of with deep affection. He’d often told her how much Uncle Hoss had loved her and Miranda and called them his Sweet Peas.

“Wanna see where we sleep,” Elen demanded so Beth said, “I think I should go up and get them settled. They really need to take a ‘n-a-p’.”

“Would you like some help?” Mrs. Davies asked and Beth nodded gratefully.

“A.C., you wanna help unload the buckboard?” Joe asked.

“He can’t lift the trunks,” Bronwen said worriedly as A.C. rolled his eyes in embarrassment.

“No, but he knows which trunk is your parents and which is Gwyneth’s and he can carry the valise,” Joe replied, reaching over and tousling his nephew’s mop of black hair. Adam realized his son needed to pay a visit to the barber. In fact, what was left of his own curly hair was badly in need of a trim. Saturday they would make a trip into Carson City so their hair would be nice and neat for church.

“Oh, the valise has Huw’s nappies and I’ll need it,” Beth said from the stairs.

While Joe and A.C. went to help with the luggage, Ben eased into his favorite leather chair by the immense fireplace, his aching joints forgotten as he drank in the sight of his family. “Tomorrow evening my old friend Paul Martin is coming to dine with us,” Ben stated. “He’s also a doctor. He removed more bullets and sewed up more wounds on my three boys than I care to remember.”

“Fortunately, I never had to deal with any bullet wounds in my practice,” Dr. Davies said, “but I’ve sewn my fair share of stitches. Adam has spoken very highly of Dr. Martin and Bronwen said he did an excellent job setting her collarbone when she had her riding accident. I look forward to meeting him.”

Ben smiled and then said wistfully, “I envy you and Siân since you’ll be able to see our granddaughter graduate. Third in her class,” he added proudly.

“But you got to see her graduate from the Girls Latin School as salutatorian and I couldn’t leave my practice to attend that,” Dr. Davies replied calmly. “And we’ll all get to see her marry. Since you’re the only one of us to have met her betrothed, why don’t you tell us about him.”

“William is a fine young man,” Ben assured them. “He’s very intelligent and he is also very self-assured; he doesn’t have any need to impress others by flaunting his education. He’s also open-minded. Lots of Easterners come out here and look down their noses at our way of life. Not William. I remember the second day he was here he went to town and bought himself a pair of waist overalls and a plain cotton shirt so he would fit in.” He grinned before adding with a chuckle, “I do think he was surprised and a bit chagrinned to realize Miranda is a better rider than he is. However, he survived that blow to his manly pride.”

“Wait until he sees Gwyneth on horseback,” Adam said and she blushed slightly.

“I haven’t been riding in such a long time,” she said regretfully.

“It’ll come back to you,” her grandpa said with a smile.

Joe and one of the hands entered then with the Davies’ trunk and overhearing the last part of the conversation, Joe said, “Duchess is in the corral if you’d like to take her for a short ride.” Seeing his older brother’s expression Joe added quickly, “As soon as we get the trunks upstairs, I could ride with her.”

A.C. was right behind Joe, carrying Beth’s valise, and said quickly, ““I wanna ride. I have my own horse now, Uncle Joe.”

“So I heard,” Joe replied grinning at his nephew as he headed toward the stairs. “Got some horses in the corral for you to choose from.” The boy gave a whoop of delight, ran past his uncle and up the stairs, causing Bronwen to sigh. Joe looked at his brother and sister-in-law. “That Appaloosa you rode last time is in the corral,” he said to Adam. Then he turned to Bronwen and said regretfully, “I’m sorry, Bronwen, but Rosebud died. I’ve got some nice gentle mares in the corral for you to choose from.”

“Poor Rosebud, but I suppose she was over twenty,” Bronwen said sadly. “I’ll come take a look at the horses you’ve selected, but I think I’ll wait until tomorrow morning to go for a ride. How about you, cariad?” she asked Adam.

“I’ll come with you tomorrow,” he replied. “Right now, let’s go pick your mount.” Just then A.C. bounded noisily down the stairs so he added, “and A.C.’s.”

“Would you care for a game of chess?” Ben asked Dr. Davies, who eagerly nodded his acceptance, so they moved to the game table, which stood near Ben’s desk.

When Adam and Bronwen returned, they shared a smile at the sight of their fathers engrossed in their game. “How about a little nap?” he inquired with that certain gleam in his eye.

“I think a nap would be delightful,” she replied with a saucy grin.

The next morning after breakfast everyone except Ben and the Davies went for a short ride. Beth took Huw with her on her dappled gray Quarter Horse and Elen rode with her grandpa on his Appaloosa. Gwyneth rode Duchess, her Morgan mare, and A.C. was mounted on a buckskin gelding that was part Morgan and part Quarter Horse. Bronwen had chosen a brown mustang mare as sweet-tempered as her Olwen.

“I think they should have left the babies with us,” Mrs. Davies said anxiously.

“Beth told Ben and me that they go riding with their tada and mam all the time,” her husband reassured her.

“They’ll be going at a walk,” Ben added. “And they won’t be gone long. They haven’t been on horseback for over a month and they’ll be stiff and sore. Don’t worry, Siân. Let’s sit on the porch and you can tell me more about your voyage,” he suggested.

“And about our great-grandchildren,” she added.

“I never thought I’d get to see my great-grandchildren,” he said with a tender smile.

“I know,” Dr. Davies said. “It was the same for us. Three of our son Bryn’s children have married and have children of their own, but the trip between Sydney and Broken Hill is just too much for us now, and they can’t leave their stations for that long. The journey to Cloncurry is as difficult as the one to Broken Hill and of course Dafydd can’t leave his flock. We are so grateful he was willing for Beth and the children to travel here for Miranda’s wedding.”

“It was sweet of him to give the three of us this opportunity to spend time with Beth’s little ones,” Mrs. Davies added, giving Ben’s hand a gentle squeeze.

“Adam wrote that Huw is pretty easy-going, but Elen has inherited the Cartwright stubbornness,” Ben said with a fond smile.

“Whether she gets it from the Cartwrights or the Davies I’m not sure, but she very definitely has a stubborn streak,” Mrs. Davies agreed. “If she didn’t like the food being served on the ship, she let everyone know it.”

“She only had one or two tantrums,” her husband corrected mildly. “She soon learned that a tantrum resulted in—what is Adam’s expression?—oh, yes, a ‘necessary’ talk.”

“Beth told us Dafydd is the disciplinarian,” Mrs. Davies stated, “and I think Elen just wanted to see what she could get away with since her tada wasn’t there. She soon discovered her tad-cu was just as strict. Now, Huw has his tada’s temperament; the only problem Beth has with him is that he doesn’t like to be put to bed at night. She said he’s always been that way.”

“I think he just doesn’t want to miss out on anything,” her husband said. “He is a very bright, curious little boy.”

“That sounds like Adam when he was a little lad,” Ben said reminiscently. “After he passed through the stage where the only word he seemed to use was ‘no’, his new favorite word was ‘why’.”

“It was the same with our three, but especially Rhys,” Mrs. Davies said.

They were still conversing when the others returned, stiff and sore. “I’d forgotten how long it takes to get used to riding when I haven’t done any for a while,” Beth stated as she handed Huw to Dr. Davies before dismounting, and with none of her usual grace.

“It’ll be better in a few days,” her father remarked as he gave Elen to her and then dismounted rather stiffly before turning to assist his wife.

“Nice horsy,” Elen said and Beth held her so she could pat the Appaloosa’s neck.

“Grandpa, do I have time to take a hot bath before we leave on the picnic?” Gwyneth asked, resisting the strong urge to rub her posterior.

“Don’t take too long, dear,” Ben replied with a slight grin as she ambled by him.

A.C., energized by the outing, asked, “You wanna play catch, Elen?” and was answered by a squeal of delight from his niece.

“Me, too!” Huw shrieked and the two older children frowned. The fourteen-month-old was just too young to play catch very well and they didn’t like rolling the ball so he could play too.

“I packed Elen’s cloth ball,” Beth said. “It’s still in our trunk.”

“I’ll get it,” her brother offered and ran inside the house. Bronwen started to remind him that he shouldn’t run inside but realized the futility and closed her mouth. Beth, knowing that A.C. and Elen would rather play alone, moved to join her parents and grandparents on the porch and gently eased herself on a chair. ‘Huw, maybe Pa-pa would play with you.”

Huw walked over to Adam and asked, “Horsy, Pa-pa?” with a beguiling smile.

Adam ruffled his thick black hair saying, “You just went for a ride, mate.”

“Horsy,” Huw repeated and, rolling his eyes, Adam picked him up and began bouncing him on his knee.

“Me, too, Pa-pa! Me, too!” Elen shrieked as she moved to climb up on his lap as well.

Luckily for Adam’s legs, A.C. burst onto the porch then with the cloth ball, distracting Elen. Huw was having so much fun that he didn’t notice his sister and uncle. When her father showed signs of tiring, Beth offered to take Huw to see the chickens and the pigs.

“May I come with you?” Ben asked and Beth smilingly nodded her agreement. Ben slowly rose from his chair and held out his hand to Huw. When the child trustingly put his tiny hand in his large, calloused one, Ben blinked back tears of joy. He’s Adam’s grandson, but his mannerisms and disposition remind me so much of Hoss.

Ben and Beth were still showing Huw the animals and Adam had joined the game of catch when Buckshot came out carrying a large hamper.

“Yer food’s ready,” he announced.

“Thank you, Buckshot,” Bronwen said as the three ball players came running over and Gwyneth went in search of the missing family members. It took a few minutes to decide who would sit with whom on the drive to the lake. A.C. wanted to sit in the front with his dad, hoping that he could convince him to let him drive part of the way. Wanting to forestall that outcome, Bronwen decided she would sit directly behind Adam and Gwyneth chose to sit by her. Ben wanted to spend some time with Elen and she insisted on sitting with her mother, so the three of them shared a seat and Huw rode in the back seat with his great-grandparents. Joe followed behind with the buggy, carrying the picnic basket.

On the drive to the lake, Dr. and Mrs. Davies were enchanted by the scenery and the children were entranced with the wildlife. After the picnic, Beth and Gwyneth took the children wading along the shore of the lake, Joe and A.C. decided to have a stone-skipping contest while Ben and the Davies chose to rest. Adam and Bronwen elected to go for a walk, promising to be back in an hour to drive everyone to the cabin.

“Do you have a specific destination?” Bronwen asked quietly as she and Adam walked along at steady pace.

He smiled at her. “I suppose after twenty-four years of marriage I shouldn’t be surprised that you can read me like a book.” His expression quickly sobered as he added, “I want to visit Hoss and Marie, and the graves aren’t far from here.”

She squeezed his hand saying, “I’d like to visit Hoss.”

“You built this yourself, Ben?” Dr. Davies asked as the group approached the cabin.

“Had a little help from Adam,” Ben said, smiling at his eldest.

“Considering I wasn’t quite seven yet, I think you can imagine how much help I was,” Adam replied sardonically.

“You’re underestimating your contribution, son,” Ben said quietly as they pulled up in front of the cabin. “He carried the biggest stones he could manage to help in building the foundation and the fireplace and he was a big help filling in the cracks between the logs.”

A.C. jumped out of the surrey, then ran over and poked at the filling between the cabin’s logs. “What’s it made of, Grandpa?”

“Oh, twigs and wood chips, mixed in with sand and dirt and water,” Ben replied as he climbed out of the surrey.

“I remember how much fun it was packing it in,” Adam remarked with a little grin. “Even your Uncle Hoss wanted to help.”

“Your uncle was younger than Huw so he mostly just smeared the cement all over himself, but your dad was a big help. The only time he wasn’t a help was when it came time to raise the walls. I used a hoist but your dad kept insisting he could help and we finally had to have a ‘necessary’ talk. Then he moped around until I was almost ready to give him another.”

A.C.’s eyes widened at the picture of his dad as a sullen little boy being spanked by Grandpa while his oldest sister chuckled. “Just like Gwyneth when she was a little girl and couldn’t have her way.” She sobered quickly as both her father and sister glared at her while her mother hid her grin behind her hand. Dr. and Mrs. Davies, Ben and Joe merely exchanged amused glances.

“When did you build the cabin?” Mrs. Davies asked.

“The spring of 1843,” Ben replied.

“Stone the crows!” A.C. exclaimed. “That’s fifty-five years ago!”

“Very good, son,” Adam said with a smile. “I see you’re getting better at doing arithmetic in your head.”

“I am amazed at the condition it’s in after all this time,” Bronwen stated. “Surely you must have made some repairs?”

“A few,” Joe answered. “We replaced the glass in the windows, put in a new floor since some of the boards had rotted, and did some repairs to the roof.”

Ben added, “The furniture that Adam and I made was still in good shape, we just cleaned it and applied beeswax, but the bed ropes and mattress weren’t salvageable so we bought new ones.”

“Can I—I mean, may I—go inside?” A.C. pleaded.

“Of course,” Ben replied.

Joe inserted quickly, “but don’t climb the ladder to the loft. We didn’t figure William and Miranda would need it, so we didn’t do any repairs up there.”

“Isn’t that where you slept, Dad?” A.C. asked, disappointment written all over his face.

“Yes, but there’s nothing to see. All we had in the loft was a bed and a clothespress,” Adam replied.

“And a rocking chair,” Ben added. “I remember all the time Marie and I spent in that chair watching over the three of you when you came down with mumps, chicken pox and sore throats.

"Stone the crows! It's small!" A.C. exclaimed as they entered the cabin; the others’ faces showed their agreement.

"It seemed like a palace to me," Adam replied. "I was too young when we left Boston to remember your Great-grandfather Stoddard's house, and we didn't live in your Grandma Inger's house for more than a few months, so this was my first real home." He pointed by the fireplace. "Your Uncle Hoss and I used to sleep right over there when we first lived here, and Grandpa slept over there. Later Grandpa built on a bedroom for himself and another for Hop Sing, and then he built the loft for me and Uncle Hoss." Then he pointed to the plain wooden table and chairs on the other side of the fireplace and said, "This is where we ate and I worked on my lessons."

"Your dad helped me make the furniture," Ben said with a smile. "He was too little to use a saw or hammer, but I gave him a piece of pumice and let him rub the wood until it was smooth. Come here and feel what a good job he did."

A.C. and the younger children rubbed their hands on the furniture and then A.C. led his nephew and niece into one of the tiny bedroom. Mrs. Davies turned to Ben then and asked, "So you lived here all alone with Adam and his younger brother?"

"For a few years,” Ben replied. “It was just one room at first but then when Hop Sing came to help me look after the boys and do the cooking, I decided we all needed some privacy so I built a lean-to at each end of the cabin to make bedrooms for myself and Hop Sing. Then I built the loft for the boys. About a year later, I traveled to New Orleans, where I met Joe's mother and married her. Life here was quite different from the life she’d known in New Orleans but she was able to adjust and learned to love it here." He grinned as he added, “It was a good thing I’d already built the bedrooms,” and they all shared a laugh. Just then the children came running back in.

“Are you sure we can’t go up in the loft, Grandpa?” A.C. asked with his most engaging grin.

“A.C., you were already told you could not go up there. Don’t bring it up again,” Adam said firmly and with a hint of irritation.

“I think the cabin will be perfect for a honeymoon,” Mrs. Davies said, wanting to lighten the mood because she noted the way her daughter was frowning at her son-in-law.

“Especially since Miranda doesn’t have to cook,” Beth added and Adam said, “Amen to that!” while Gwyneth giggled.

That week was one Ben knew he would relive in his memories. To be reunited with his firstborn and his family was a precious gift, doubly precious because he was able to hold his great-granddaughter and great-grandson on his lap, to hug them and kiss them. His heart ached for Joe but he rejoiced at the love Adam and Bronwen still shared after all these years. Seeing them with their children and grandchildren was a joy. He dreaded the days he would be alone while all of them were in Boston for Miranda’s graduation but he joyfully anticipated Miranda’s wedding. She was so like her grandmother that seeing her that day would bring back so many poignant memories.

The evening before they were to leave for Boston, they were all gathered in the dining room except for Elen and Huw, who’d had their supper earlier and were now in bed. Conversation centered on Miranda’s wedding. “I think I’ll need to find another dress for the wedding because my clothes are all getting too tight,” Beth said calmly. “I hope we can find something suitable at Bloomingdale’s.”

“The wedding’s not for four weeks. We’ll put you on a diet,” Bronwen said firmly.

“I’m afraid a diet won’t help, Mama,” Beth replied with a grin.

“You’re with child?” Mrs. Davies asked excitedly.

Beth nodded adding, “The baby should be born in December, an early Christmas present.”

“Beauty!” A.C. exclaimed. “I hope it’s a boy!”

“I just hope the baby is healthy,” Beth replied and then added wistfully, “I’ve written Dafydd. I wish I could have told him in person but if I wait, he’ll take one look at me and know.”

“We’ll take good care of you for him,” Adam said, reaching over and patting her hand comfortingly..

“Do Huw and Elen know they’re gonna have a baby brother?” A.C. asked excitedly.

“Or sister,” Gwyneth said pointedly.

“Not yet. I don’t know if Huw will really understand; Elen will as she sees me growing bigger. I was going to wait and tell them when I really start to show,” Beth replied.

“I think that’s a good idea,” Mrs. Davies stated and Bronwen said, “I agree.” She turned to A.C. and said firmly, “We don’t want to be talking about Beth having a baby in public, A.C., just when we’re alone, and you’re not to mention it to Elen and Huw until Beth gives you permission.”

“I wanna tell ‘em now,” A.C. whined.

“We don’t always get what we want,” Adam said sternly. “If you disobey your mother, you and I will have a necessary talk, young man.”

“I never get anything I want,” A.C. sulked, but the adults all ignored him, except for his dad, who sent him a warning glare so he subsided.

The next morning while Adam and Joe saw to the luggage everyone else said goodbye to Ben.

“We’ll see you again in a couple of weeks,” Dr. Davies said, "and I'll tell you all about our granddaughter's graduation." (Except for Adam and Bronwen, everyone was returning to the Ponderosa after Miranda’s graduation. Adam and Bronwen would be traveling to Wilmington with Miranda and William to visit his parents. Then the four of them would travel together to the Ponderosa a few days before the wedding.)

Mrs. Davies added with a smile, “When we return, I’ll teach Buckshot how to make bara brith so you can have it as often as you like.” (She’d convinced Buckshot to let her use the kitchen so she could do some baking, and Ben had especially enjoyed the speckled bread.)

"Goodbye, Grandpa," Beth said, hugging him gently. She lifted Huw, who planted a kiss on Ben's cheek and said, "Bye-bye, Geatganpa."

"You're getting too big for your mama to lift," Adam said to Elen as he held her up so she could kiss 'Geatganpa' goodbye.

"Take care of yourself, Beth," Ben said, hugging her one last time, and Beth replied with a smile, "I'll be fine, Grandpa. Don't worry."

"Goodbye, Grandpa," Gwyneth said and they hugged. "I'll be thinking of you while we're in Boston," she added quietly.

"Bye, Grandpa," A.C. said, hugging Ben tightly. "I hope you don't get lonely while we're all gone."

"I'll manage," Ben replied with a little smile as he hugged his grandson one more time, touched by the child's thoughtfulness.

"We’ll miss you, Pa," Bronwen said softly as she hugged him and kissed his cheek.

"I've packed my camera and I'll take a photograph of Miranda in her cap and gown," Adam said. "That will be almost as good as being there. Don't let my young rapscallion here wear you out while Bronwen and I are visiting the Gordons."

"Dad!" A.C. said, rolling his eyes, and for a moment, Ben felt he'd gone back in time fifty odd years to when Adam had been ten, and he grinned.

"I'm sure A.C. will be good as gold, especially since he knows both his grandfathers and his uncle will have a necessary talk with him if he isn't." Ben embraced his son and Adam said quietly, "We'll see you soon."

Joe approached his father then and hugged him hard before saying, "I'll see you soon and I’ll be bringing Benj and Sarah with me."

"Godspeed, son," Ben said, hugging Joe one more time. He stood on the front porch and watched as they all climbed in the surrey and Joe slapped the reins. The three children turned around and waved to Ben until he disappeared from their sight.

{ { { {

With his advantage in height, Adam was the first to spot Miranda and a slim, bearded man as the train pulled into the station. “I see her,” he said and looking in the same direction Joe grinned and said, “Yeah, there they are,” as he noticed the slim, bearded man at his niece’s side The brothers waved their arms and the couple spotted them and hurried their way.

“Mama, Daddy,” Miranda called, running heedlessly through the disembarking passengers toward her parents. “Oh, I’m so happy to see you,” she got out in a choked voice as she embraced first her mother and then her father. Then she saw her baby brother and even though everyone had written her about how tall he was, it was still a shock to realize they were eye to eye. “A.C.! Don’t I get a hug?” The boy’s cheeks reddened but he hugged her and then stepped back so she could greet the others.

William stood to one side, feeling awkward as he watched his intended embracing her parents, siblings and grandparents. He and his father had never done more than shake hands; his mother allowed him to kiss her cheek, but would never have tolerated a hug. This family loved each other and they weren’t afraid to show it, although he did note that Miranda’s father and the tall young woman that must be Gwyneth gave briefer hugs. The two small children were shy but Miranda had said she expected that. I am certainly marrying into a good-looking family, he thought. Gwyneth is very striking and the sister with the two small children—Beth—is absolutely exquisite.

His musings were interrupted then when Joe walked over and extended his hand saying, “How are you, William?”

“I’m fine, Mr. Cartwright,” he replied as he shook the older man’s hand.

“Call me Uncle Joe; after all, I’ll be your uncle in a few weeks.”

William nodded with a smile and then added, “Guess I’m just feeling a bit overwhelmed by Miranda’s family. They’re so much more demonstrative than mine is.”

Joe grinned lazily as he said, “If it’s any comfort, I think it took my brother a while to get used to it, too.”

Miranda finished greeting her family and turned to William. She put her arm through his and said, “I’d like you all to meet my fiancé. Mam-gu, this is William. William, this is my mam-gu, Mrs. Davies.” William smiled and then bowed to the frail, stooped little woman. Next, Miranda said, “Allow me to present my mother.” He smiled at the delicate, bespectacled woman, whose pure white hair contrasted dramatically with her face, which had few lines, and her slim, youthful figure. She returned his smile as he bowed. “I am so pleased to finally meet you, William,” she said in her dulcet soprano.

Miranda then said proudly, “Daddy, this is William. Dearest, allow me to introduce my father.” William looked up at the white-bearded man with piercing, golden-brown eyes under heavy black brows, beginning to be flecked with white. Somehow he had expected Miranda’s father would be about the same height as her Uncle Joe, so he was taken aback by his future father-in-law’s commanding stature. He extended his hand and Adam shook it with a firm grip. ‘I’m honored to meet you, sir,” William said and Adam replied, “I am happy to meet you at last.” William turned then to the older man in the party, who Miranda introduced as her tad-cu, Dr. Davies.

“Now let me introduce my sisters and brother. This is my older sister, Beth, or I suppose to be really proper, Mrs. Jones.”

“I’m very pleased to meet you, Beth. I hope I may call you Beth?” he said with a smile.

“Of course,” she replied, returning his smile. Elen hung behind her mother’s skirt but Huw was always braver and he spoke up and said, “I Huw.” Then his courage failed him and he hid behind Beth.

“I’m happy to meet you, Huw,” William said, smiling at the little lad, who peeked from behind his mother’s skirts. “And I think this must be Elen.” On hearing her name, she poked her head out but when he smiled at her, she hid behind Beth again.

“This is my younger sister, Gwyneth,” Miranda said and William was a little disconcerted to realize this future sister-in-law was taller than he was.

A.C. stepped forward and held out his hand. “I’m Adam, Jr., but everyone calls me A.C.”

“You may call me William, A.C.,” he replied as he shook the boy’s hand. If Miranda hadn’t told him her brother was ten, he would have guessed eleven or twelve. He didn’t resemble his father that closely, but he’d definitely inherited his height and build.

“I’m off to Annabelle’s, but I’ll join you for breakfast tomorrow,” Joe said, and waving goodbye, he went in search of a hansom cab.

“May I help you take care of the luggage, sir?” William offered.

“Thanks, I think I can manage, but if you could find hackney cabs to take us to the hotel, I’d appreciate that very much,” Adam replied.

“I’ll be happy to take care of that,” William said. “You’re staying at the Parker House?” and Adam nodded.

“Can—I mean, may—I help you, Dad?” A.C. asked and Adam agreed so the two of them went to take care of the luggage while William went to summon the cabs.

“What do you think?” Miranda asked anxiously.

“About what?” Bronwen replied, assuming an innocent expression.

“About William! Don’t tease me, Mama.”

“He seems very nice,” Bronwen said quietly. “But we just met. We’ll have a chance to get to know each other better tonight at dinner. We're going to order room service and eat in our suite.”

"We're going to eat in your suite?" Miranda repeated in a worried tone, for she'd thought they'd dine in one of Boston's finer restaurants. She wasn't sure how William would feel about this arrangement.

"We learned that Elen and Huw are just too young to dine in public," Bronwen replied. She eyed her second born closely. "I hope you and William don't mind but it seemed the best way for all of us to get to know each other."

"No, it will be fine, Mama," Miranda said quickly. William walked up behind her, having secured the transportation to the hotel.

"Dr. and Mrs. Davies, your cab is ready. And Beth, if you and Gwyneth and the children would like to go to the hotel now, your cab is also ready. If you'll follow me," and offering Beth his arm, he led them to the waiting cabs. In a few minutes Adam and A.C. returned.

"The others are on their way to the hotel?" Adam asked, seeing only Bronwen and Miranda. Bronwen nodded so they headed after the others. William was just helping Gwyneth into the cab when they spotted them.

‘Our cab is right here, sir,” William said to Adam, “and Dr. and Mrs. Davies are on their way to the hotel.”

“Come wiv us, Unca A.C.,” Elen said excitedly but A.C. shook his head.

“No, I wanna ride with Miranda,” A.C. replied. “Can I sit by you?” he asked his sister.

“Right,” she replied with a smile. Then she shook her head saying, “I just can’t get over the fact you’re taller than I am.”

A.C. said with a smirk, “Grandpa says I’ll be taller than Dad. Maybe almost as tall as Uncle Hoss was.”

“Let’s continue this conversation in the cab,” Adam suggested, closing the door of Beth and Gwyneth’s, where Elen was sulking because her uncle didn’t want to ride with her.

It was crowded in the hackney cab with the five of them and Adam and William ended up sharing a seat while A.C. squeezed between his mother and sister in the seat facing theirs. As soon as they started moving, he turned to his sister and said, “I got to ride a horse on the Ponderosa instead of a pony.”

“You wrote that you got a cob for your birthday; I was surprised since even Gwyneth had to wait until she was eleven and Beth and I were twelve. Penny didn’t even get a horse on her twelfth birthday.” Miranda stopped then and looked nervously at her father.

“A.C. is the only one of you to reach five feet on his tenth birthday, and Penny was about a half foot short of five feet when she was twelve,” Adam said quietly. “She was always the smallest of you just as A.C. is the tallest. We were going to get her a horse for her thirteenth birthday even if she was still short of five feet.”

“We all said goodbye to Penny before we left home,” A.C. said, “even Elen and Huw. We show them Penny’s photograph so they know who she is.”

“And when Miranda and I have children, we’ll do the same,” William said softly and he read the gratitude in Adam's and Bronwen’s eyes. “I’ve looked forward to meeting all of you for a long time. Of course, Miranda has told me so much about you that I feel as though I already know you.”

“She hasn’t been as forthcoming with us,” Adam replied dryly as his daughter blushed and avoided his pointed stare.

“Now that you’ve taught for a year, how do you like it?” Bronwen interjected softly.

“Very much. Oh, some students aren’t much interested in history and are only there because it’s a required course, but I like a challenge. I can’t claim to inspire every student, but I know I’ve reached some. Since visiting your father, Mr. Cartwright, I’ve found my interest in the West has increased. I’ve talked with Dr. Martin and Mr. and Mrs. McKaren and as many of the original settlers as I could about the early days. I was hoping I could speak with you about them, specifically your memories of the journey west by wagon train. Perhaps on the trip to the Ponderosa or to my parents’ house?”

“Perhaps,” Adam replied, his tone noncommittal. William swallowed nervously, hoping he hadn’t overstepped his bounds so early in his relationship with his future father-in-law.

“Before we travel to Wilmington, we wanted you and Mama to come with us to Hanover so you can see our house,” Miranda inserted, seeing William’s discomfiture. “We’ll visit Mr. and Mrs. Gordon the remainder of the week.”

“I wanna see where you’re gonna live,” A.C. said excitedly.

“I imagine we’ll all want to see it,” Bronwen said quietly.

“I'll contact the hotel and book the rooms,” William said. “It’s not a new house; but I liked it and I knew Miranda would. It’s Greek Revival and it was built in 1860, but it’s in excellent condition,” he added seeing Adam’s slight frown. “By buying an older house, we could afford a larger one.” (He’d used the last of his great-aunt’s legacy and Miranda had made a sizeable withdrawal from her trust fund to make a substantial down payment on the house and pay for repairs and furnishings. Initially, William had been against using Miranda’s money, but she’d persuaded him that since it would be her home as well as his, she should help pay for it.)

“It’s beautiful, Daddy,” Miranda said and his frown became more pronounced.

“You never wrote us that you visited William in Hanover,” he said in that ominously quiet tone his children dreaded.

It was now William’s turn to come to his fiancée’s rescue. “One of my colleagues, Dr. Bronson, and his wife invited Miranda to be their guest one weekend in April. It gave Miranda an opportunity to see the house before I agreed to buy it, and she also had a chance to meet some of the other faculty wives.”

“I was well-chaperoned, Daddy,” Miranda added, answering his nonverbal, but oh so obvious, question. She was relieved to see his features relax.

“Do you have any brothers and sisters?” A.C. asked William, oblivious to the potential disaster that had just been averted.

“No, I wasn’t as lucky as you; I’m an only child. I always wished I had brothers and sisters, and in a few weeks, my wish will come true,” he replied with a grin.

‘How come you teach school? Wouldn’t you rather do something else? Be a jackeroo? Or an engineer?”

“Jackeroo?” William repeated quizzically.

“It’s Australian for cowboy, dear,” Miranda said.

William smiled at his young brother-in-law. “No. I enjoyed talking with your Uncle Joe, Bronc and Jacob about being a cowboy, but I don’t think I’d care to be one myself. I don’t think I’d make much of an engineer since I was never very good in math. I love studying history and I enjoy teaching.”

A.C. crinkled his nose at the idea of anyone enjoying history or teaching, which made the adults smile. “Do you like sports?” A.C. asked then, hoping to find some common ground with his future brother-in-law. “I like to play cricket.”

“I'm afraid we don’t play cricket here; we play baseball instead," William replied with a diffident smile. "I play baseball, but I prefer tennis and sculling. When I was at Cambridge University, I also did some punting.”

“What’s sculling and punting?” the boy asked.

“Sculling is like rowing except you use two oars, or sculls, instead of one and the boat is very narrow. A punt is a flat-bottomed boat and you move it with a long pole; punting is what you call using the pole to move the boat. I prefer sculling and I was a member of the Harvard crew my junior and senior years.”

“So was I,” Adam said and the two men exchanged smiles. Miranda glanced at her mother and received an almost imperceptible wink, which caused the butterflies in her stomach to disappear.

“What’s that mean, a member of the Harvard crew?” A.C. asked.

“That means we were on the college team and we competed in races against other teams. Our big rival was Yale,” Adam replied.

“Still is,” William added with a grin.

“Could you teach me to scull when we get home?” A.C. asked his dad hopefully.

“I suppose I could build a scull for the two of us,” Adam said thoughtfully. “I haven’t sculled in years, but I’m sure it would come back to me.”

“Can I help build the scull?”

“Too right. It’ll be our project when we get back home,” and the two shared a smile.

“Maybe you could take me for a ride once the scull is finished,” Bronwen suggested. “It sounds like fun.”

“That’d be beaut,” A.C. exclaimed

“William has taken Sarah and me rowing on the Charles several times and it was great fun,” Miranda added.

“We’re going to order room service and dine in our suite, and we’re hoping you and Miranda can join us, William,” Bronwen said quickly since they were approaching the Parker House.

“Of course,” William replied.

“May I go to the Common, Dad?” A.C. asked hopefully.

“Maybe later,” Adam replied.

“Miranda and I would be happy to go with A.C. to the Common,” William said quickly. “I imagine he’s tired of being cooped up on the train.”

“Beauty, William,” Bronwen said with a warm smile. “I feel stuffed but I know A.C. would really enjoy spending time with you and Miranda.”

As soon as the cab pulled up in front of the hotel, A.C. jumped out and ran toward his sisters, niece and nephew, who were just getting out of their cab. “Miranda and William and me are going to the Common! You wanna come too?”

Beth and Gwyneth exchanged glances and Beth said with a smile, “Too right. But I have to change Huw first.”

William and Miranda walked up just in time to overhear and Miranda said, “We’ll wait in the lobby for you.”

As soon as Adam and Bronwen reached their suite, he took off his necktie and undid the top two buttons on his shirt before removing his frock coat and hanging it in the wardrobe. She removed the jacket to her tailor-made suit and hung it by the frock coat before removing her shoes and stockings.

“Those shoes may look smart, but they make my feet hurt,” she complained.

“Come sit by me on the sofa and I’ll massage them for you,” he suggested. As he gently but thoroughly massaged her small, slender feet he asked, “So what do you think of our prospective son-in-law?”

‘I like him,” she answered decisively, “don’t you?”

“So far,” he temporized. “I’ll need to spend more time with him than a cab ride to make up my mind.”

“I could tell you weren’t happy about the trip to Hanover, but I think it was nice of his friends to invite Miranda to stay with them.’

“I guess I did overreact,” he admitted reluctantly. “I’m looking forward to seeing the house. I admit I’m surprised they didn’t choose a more modern one.”

“Given William’s obvious interest in the past, I don't think it's surprising.” She sighed and wriggled her toes. “Oh, they feel so much better. I owe you, cariad.”

“Since our son is going to be occupied for at least an hour, I know just how you can repay your debt,” he replied with a wink and a smirk.

Meanwhile, the rest of the Cartwright family strolled through the Boston Common. A.C. and Huw went ahead, Huw holding his uncle’s hand and trotting along to keep up with his uncle’s much longer stride. Elen clung to her mama’s hand and stared at the two strangers. “Elen, I’d like you to go with your brother and Uncle A.C.” Elen pouted and shook her head so Beth said more firmly, “Elen.” With a pout, Elen stomped after the others, causing her mama to shake her head while the others hid their smiles.

“I have some news to share,” Beth said as they walked together. “I just learned before we left the Ponderosa that I am with child.”

“Oh, Beth, that’s wonderful!” Miranda exclaimed, stopping and throwing her arms around her sister.

‘Yes, congratulations,” William said. Then he paused, suddenly realizing that he would be the baby’s uncle. “I’ll be an uncle!”

Miranda laughed at his exuberance and replied, ‘You’ll be Elen and Huw’s Uncle William as soon as we’re married, dearest.” He smiled sheepishly as he realized his mistake.

“It is wonderful,” Beth said, smiling at the happy couple, “but tomorrow before your graduation, I’m going to have to go to Bloomingdale’s to find a gown for your wedding. I won’t be able to fit into the one I made.”

“You aren’t showing much,” Miranda said.

“But your wedding is almost a month away,” Beth replied with a smile. “I started showing much sooner with Huw than I did with Elen and I can tell I’m going to show even sooner with this baby. Mama said it was the same way with her.” She saw William looked uncomfortable and said, “I’m sorry if we embarrassed you, William. I’m afraid we’re a very candid family.”

“I’ve known Miranda for six years, so I should be accustomed,” he replied with a self-deprecating grin.

"May I come shopping with you?" Miranda asked.

"Fair dinkum?" Beth replied in surprise since Miranda had never shared her enthusiasm for shopping.

“I even thought I’d come,” Gwyneth added, and then remarked, “Mama is coming, too, so she can find some evening gowns.’

"If you ladies want to talk fashion, I think I'll join A.C. and Huw," William said with a rueful grin.

"No, we'll change subjects," Beth said with a smile. She saw her daughter was running back to her. “Elen, I asked you to go play with Huw and Uncle A.C.” Elen shook her head and grabbed her mama’s hand. Beth sighed. "Dafydd and I keep hoping she'll outgrow this shyness. I thought she was doing better, but she's encountered so many strangers since we left Cloncurry that she's been overwhelmed."

"After you spend some time with her, she won't be so shy," Gwyneth added. "She'd forgotten me but we've become friends again, haven't we, Elen." She'd hoped to encourage Elen to speak, but the little girl only nodded.

"We told you that you were going to meet Auntie Miranda and Uncle William, didn't we?" Beth asked and again Elen nodded. "Could you say g'day to Auntie Miranda and Uncle William?" Beth asked encouragingly.

Elen looked at Miranda and William with big eyes for a moment and then she dimpled and said, "G'day Auntie Manda and Unca Willum."

"G'day to you, Elen," Miranda said with a dimpled smile of her own and William said, "Hello, Elen.'

"Do Radcliffe graduates wear caps and gowns when they graduate?" Gwyneth asked, changing the subject.

"The first Radcliffe graduates only wore dresses, but now we wear caps and gowns just like male graduates. I think the graduation is a very impressive ceremony," Miranda replied.

"We're all proud of you; I hope you know that," Beth said. "Even if I still don't understand why you wanted to spend all these years studying, I am proud of the fact you achieved your goal."

"Thank you, Beth," Miranda said and hugged her sister. Then she turned to their younger sister. "Are you going back to Brisbane and your job at the bookstore?"

"No," Gwyneth said slowly. "I've sublet my flat and I'll come back home until Mark graduates in December. When I go home, I'll have to tell Douglas that I realize it's Mark that I love. I am dreading it, but I suppose it's crueler to keep his hopes up."

"It really is," William said quietly and Gwyneth nodded. "I take it Douglas hasn't shown any romantic interest in the schoolteacher?" he added.

Gwyneth and Beth looked at him in surprise and Miranda said sheepishly, "I told William what Beth wrote about Miss Andrews being interested in Douglas and Douglas being hopelessly in love with Gwyneth."

"No, I’m afraid Douglas only thinks of Melanie as Gwyneth’s friend," Beth replied. "I didn't really think there was much chance of him turning to her. He's too in love with Gwyneth to notice to Melanie or any other woman." She looked sideways at her youngest sister and, seeing her discomfort, quickly changed the subject back to the young couple. "You've already bought your house?"

"Yes," Miranda replied. "In fact, we're taking Mama and Daddy to Hanover to see it before we go to Wilmington. You and Gwyneth are welcome to come, too."

"Would you like to see where Auntie Miranda and Uncle William are going to live?" Beth asked Elen, who nodded and said, "Yes," emphatically.

"I'd like to see it," Gwyneth said, "and I imagine that tad-cu and mam-gu will want to come as well. We can have Uncle Joe tell Grandpa that we'll be back at the Ponderosa a few days later than we expected."

"I have a thought," William said then. "I'll bet Elen, Huw and A.C. would like a ride on the swan boats."

"That's a wonderful idea, dear," Miranda said, smiling up at William.

"What's swan boat?" Elen asked, surprising them all.

"It's a boat shaped like a swan. It's lots of fun to ride," Miranda answered. "The swan boats are in the Public Garden; it's connected to the Common. It won't take us too long to walk there."

"A.C.! Huw!" Beth called, "come here!" The two boys came running back and she said, "William and Miranda suggested we take a ride on the swan boats in the Public Garden."

"Where's the Public Garden?" A.C. asked. "I've never been there."

"It's very close and the swan boats are fun to ride," Miranda replied.

"But I wanted to show Huw the frog pond," A.C. protested.

"We're going to be in Boston for another two days. You can bring Huw to the frog pond the day after tomorrow," Beth suggested.

"Okay," A.C. said. He didn't mind too much because he was intrigued by the idea of riding in the swan boat.

Huw's legs got tired before they reached the Public Garden, but he let William carry him the rest of the way. Elen and Huw were entranced by the swan boats and the women had a delightful time. Halfway through the boat ride, William felt a tug on his sleeve and turned to face his young brother-in-law-to-be.

"Sculling is better than this, isn't it?" the boy whispered.

William winked. "Yes, but I knew Elen and Huw would enjoy the swan boat," he whispered back. "I have a friend here in Boston who sculls. Maybe before we leave Boston, I can ask to borrow his scull and your dad and I can take you sculling."

"Beauty, William!" A.C. exclaimed. "I hope it's all right with your friend."

"We'll have to check with your dad first," William cautioned.

When they got back to Adam and Bronwen’s suite, where they were visiting with Bronwen’s parents, A.C. immediately exclaimed, “Dad! William said he would borrow a boat from one of his friends and we could go sculling!”

“Uh, A.C.,” William said nervously, aware of his prospective father-in-law’s raised eyebrow, “what I said was that we would ask your father and, if he agreed, the three of us might go sculling.”

“Don’t worry, William,” Adam said with a slight smile. ‘I’m well aware of my son’s tendency to report the facts as he wishes them to be.” He shook his head a little and said to A.C., “Maybe when you grow up, Douglas’s father will give you a job writing for the Advocate.”

During this exchange Elen climbed onto Bronwen’s lap and said excitedly, “We rode swan, Me-ma!” while Huw held up his arms to Adam, who lifted him onto his lap.

“We didn’t ride a swan, Elen. We rode the swan boats,” A.C. said condescendingly while Elen pouted.

“We took them to the Public Garden,” Miranda explained.

“Did you have fun riding the swan boat, mate?” Adam asked and Huw nodded and grinned.

“May I take Huw to the frog pond the day after tomorrow?” A.C. asked hopefully.

“I think that would be very nice,” Bronwen said with a smile.

“I was thinking that while the ladies are shopping tomorrow morning, we might explore the Harvard Yard,” Adam suggested. “Show Huw where his grandpa and Uncle William went to school.”

“It sounds like a wonderful idea,” William said and Dr. Davies agreed. “You and I will have to compare our experiences at Cambridge,” Dr. Davies said to William with a smile, referring to the university in England he’d attended and where William had earned his Master’s degree.

Dinner that evening was a revelation to William, who’d never spent any time with very small children, but he found the informal atmosphere much more appealing than the stuffy, formal meals at his parents’ house. Beth tied napkins around her children’s necks to protect their clothing. At fifteen months, Huw was still a messy eater. Beth mashed his peas and carrots into his potatoes and William saw in fascination that at least half the food ended up on his face. Elen was a more fastidious eater and didn’t want any of her food to touch but she fed herself with only a few minor mishaps. They had no interest in the adult conversation, but William noted his young brother-in-law-to-be had clearly not been raised under the axiom: ‘Children should be seen but not heard.’

At first, much of the conversation centered on Miranda’s friends and neighbors in Cloncurry. Mr. Michaelson, who managed the post office, had let slip to Beth that Miranda’s friend Emma and Llywelyn had been corresponding for the past year.

“Emma’s never written a word to me about Llywelyn and he’s never written about her,” Miranda said in surprise.

“He wrote me,” Gwyneth said quietly. “He’s spent time with several girls in Sydney, but he didn’t fall in love with any of them. He wasn’t sure if Emma would want him to write, but she did. He hasn’t said so, but I think he’s falling in love with her.”

“I noticed he hadn’t been seeing any young ladies for some time. He and Mark both have been devoting themselves to their studies, except for cricket games and visits to Bondi Beach,” Mrs. Davies said, with a special smile for Gwyneth, who colored slightly at the mention of Mark.

“I don’t know why you all want to get married,” A.C. said in disgust.

“Just wait five or six years, A.C. bach,” Dr. Davies said. “I think it will become crystal clear to you,” and the others all smiled while A.C. sulked and Bronwen looked alarmed.

“I’m looking forward to seeing your home,” Mrs. Davies said to Miranda and William. “How large a town is Hanover?”

“It’s not large,” Willem replied. “Much of the town’s economy is based on Dartmouth College, but there are also several cotton mills. Because of the college, Hanover is a modern town. For example, the Mary Hitchcock Hospital has a diagnostic x-ray machine. The first hospital in the nation to have one.”

“I’d love to be able to see that,” Dr. Davies said, his face alight with enthusiasm.

“What’s an x-ray?” Gwyneth asked.

“I’ll give you an analogy,” Dr. Davies replied. “Your tada’s camera takes pictures of what you look like on the outside. An x-ray shows the doctor what you look like on the inside. For example, a diagnostic x-ray is used to learn if a bone is broken or fractured.” Dr. Davies then asked William, “Does your college have a medical school?”

“Yes, it does. In fact, it was the fourth to be established in the United States,” William said proudly. Then he turned to Adam and said, “We have the Thayer School of Engineering.”

“I’ve read about it,” Adam said thoughtfully. “It’s one of the best in the country.”

The next afternoon the Cartwrights, Joneses, Davies and William arrived early at the auditorium of Fay House to ensure they would get seats toward the front. A.C. kept looking at the door so he was the first to spot Joe when he arrived.

“Here we are, Uncle Joe,” he called, jumping up and waving his arm.

“Sit down, son,” Adam said sternly as he turned toward the door. Along with Joe he saw a pretty little girl with curly golden brown hair and a thin boy with flaxen hair he that knew must be Sarah and Benj.

“Annabelle is with Joe,” Bronwen said in surprise. Her sister-in-law, elegant and poised as ever, was on Joe’s arm and Joe looked happier than she had seen him since they arrived in the States.

Sarah was as exuberant as her cousin and ran toward them calling, “Hello, Aunt Bronwen! Hello, Uncle Adam!” She hugged them both and then said, “Hello, Beth. Are these your babies?”

“Not baby!” Huw said indignantly and Elen, forgetting her shyness, retorted, “I’m a big girl!” in an equally offended tone.

“These are my children,” Beth said with a laugh before hugging her little cousin.

“Hello, Gwyneth,” Sarah said and hugged her. Then she turned to A.C. “My goodness, you’re tall. Almost as tall as Benj.” Indeed, when Joe, Annabelle and Benj approached, it was obvious that thirteen-year-old Benj was only a couple of inches taller than his ten-year-old cousin.

“Sarah, that was very unladylike behavior,” Annabelle scolded.

Adam and Bronwen saw their sister-in-law had aged remarkably well although Bronwen suspected her blonde hair now owed more to artifice than to nature. Annabelle greeted her in-laws and the Davies with her usual sang-froid while Joe stood by her positively beaming. Adam and Bronwen exchanged a quick glance sharing their hope that a reconciliation had occurred.

Joe and his family sat in the row behind them. Beth had brought the picture books Bronwen had purchased at the Corner Bookstore during their shopping expedition to occupy her little ones. Bronwen had also purchased Otto of the Silver Hand for A.C. and gave it to him to read if he became bored. Conversations ceased as the notes of Aida’s Grand March began to fill the auditorium. The graduates were impressive as they entered the auditorium in their caps and gowns, and Adam and Bronwen felt their hearts swell with pride as they watched their second born—her expression so grave, so intense—as she marched in with the other young women. When the name Miranda Cartwright was called, she walked to the platform and received her degree, summa cum laude, from a dignified President Agassiz, her face radiant. Bronwen had to dab at her eyes with her hankie while Adam blinked to hold back his tears.

When the ceremony ended, Miranda hurried to her family. “I am so proud of you, Miranda fach,” Bronwen said tearfully as she hugged her daughter.

“Thank you, Mama,” Miranda said before turning to her daddy. He held her tight for a moment before saying in a voice that wasn’t quite steady, “I’m proud of you, too, Angel. I know how hard you worked to achieve your dream.”

“Thank you, Daddy, for giving me the opportunity,” Miranda said softly. “I know it wasn’t easy for you and Mama to let me come here, but I am so grateful.”

“You did it, dearest,” William whispered before he kissed her, while A.C., Elen and Huw stared at them in fascination.

Once everyone had had a chance to congratulate Miranda, Adam asked to see her degree. He saw it was signed by Radcliffe’s President Agassiz and countersigned by Harvard’s President Eliot.

“Someday women will be able to attend Harvard and we won’t need a separate women’s college,” Miranda stated as she gazed at her degree.

“This degree will be framed and hung by mine in our library,” William said proudly, putting his arm around Miranda’s shoulders and drawing her close. Adam’s eyes narrowed for a moment and then he smiled at the young couple so obviously in love. He knew with certainty that William would cherish his daughter as she deserved.

Chapter 2

Two days after Miranda’s graduation Joe, Annabelle and their children left Boston for the Ponderosa while everyone else prepared for the visit to Hanover. Adam and Bronwen went to see Joe and his family off, leaving A.C. in his grandparents’ charge. Adam’s and Bronwen’s faces showed their pleasure at Joe and Annabelle’s apparently happy reconciliation and they could see the joy reflected in their niece’s and nephew’s countenances. After waving a final goodbye, they returned to the hotel to complete their packing for the relatively “short” trip to Hanover. They were excited at the opportunity to see where Miranda and William would live. The previous day Adam, William and A.C. had all gotten sunburned when they went sculling since William and A.C. hadn’t worn hats and they had all rolled up their shirtsleeves. Adam didn’t mind the sunburn so much, but even though Bronwen had given him a backrub and he’d soaked in a hot bath, he was still stiff and sore. Obviously I’m not in as a good a physical shape as I believed, he thought, wincing as he moved to find a more comfortable position. I’m glad A.C. enjoyed sculling because I clearly need more exercise. Once we return home, I’ll order some lumber and begin working on our scull.

His focus on his own thoughts was broken by his mother-in-law’s lilting Welsh accent. “The countryside is lovely,” she commented as they traveled northwest across Massachusetts and New Hampshire.

“So lush and green,” Bronwen added, “nothing like Cloncurry.”

“In addition to your house and the college, what else should we see in Hanover?” Adam asked William, as he joined in the conversation. “Oh, I forgot, Tad would like to visit the hospital,” and Dr. Davies smiled.

“I think we should visit Dartmouth’s museum, sir. Although,” William added, glancing at the two young children playing with the small toys their mother had packed, “I don’t suppose it would be of any interest to Elen and Huw.”

“I’m not very interested in museums,” Beth said with a smile, “so I’ll be happy to stay with Elen and Huw. Is there any place like the Common where they can play?”

“Oh yes,” William said. “There’s the Dartmouth Green and it’s near the Wheelock Hotel where we’ll be staying. Oh, and you must visit the Dartmouth Bookstore. I think it has as big a variety of books and magazines as any in the country, the Corner Bookstore in Boston included.”

“We shopped there when I visited and I fell in love with it,” Miranda added.

“We won’t arrive for another hour,” William then said quietly, “and I was hoping Mr. Cartwright would be willing to describe his trip west by wagon train.” The young man knew he was taking a chance in bringing up the subject again, as it had not been met with much enthusiasm the first time. However, he couldn’t resist the opportunity to hear what this country had been like from someone who had actually traveled across it and lived to tell the story.

“Oh yes, Daddy,” Beth said. “You’ve never told us much about that and I’d love to know what it was like.”

“Me, too,” A.C. said.

“If you don’t mind, Adam, I think we’d all enjoy hearing about your journey,” Bronwen said softly. William smiled at his “soon to be” family and saw that they were all as interested as he was in the subject that obviously had not been broached before this.

Adam was quiet, a thousand scenes flooding his mind of the loving woman he would always think of when he remembered that time. He slowly nodded and then began to speak. “It was a long time ago and I was only six. Pa and my stepmother, Inger, whom I always think of as my mama, had married a few months earlier. We were planning on heading west, but we had to wait for spring, and in the meantime, we lived in the Borgstroms’ little clapboard house.”

His expression became wistful as he continued in a gentle tone. “Mama was so wonderful. Every day when I came home from school, she’d be waiting for me with a treat—gingersnaps or current buns or sugar cookies—and a big glass of milk, and she’d ask me what had happened in school that day. After we talked, I’d fill the wood box for her and set the table and we’d talk more or play Twenty Questions until Pa came home. After Uncle Gunnar had sold the family store, Pa managed to find a job working at the livery stable and he was saving money to help pay for our trip to Oregon.”

Adam stopped then and smiled at the disappointed look on his son’s face. “I know it isn’t exciting, Jackeroo, but I’d never had a mama before, never lived in a house where I had my own room and my own bed. Living in that little clapboard house with my pa and my mama was the happiest I’d ever been. And it was the happiest I’d ever seen my pa. All the time we’d been traveling west, I knew my pa was sad because he missed my mother. Now we had Mama, and Pa seemed to be smiling all the time.”

“As soon as the roads were passable, we packed our supplies and a few belongings in our farm wagon and headed for St. Louis, Missouri. There were plenty of other immigrants when we reached St. Louis, and we all loaded our wagons onto steamships and headed west on the Missouri River. That was the easiest part of the trip but after about two hundred miles, the river turns north, so we all had to leave the steamships. There were a couple of jumping off places, such as, St. Joseph and Westport, but we chose the first one, Independence.

“In the spring, Independence was full of emigrants and shops that sold what they’d need for the long trek west. It was the first boomtown I’d ever seen—full of people, oxen and mules. No matter where you went, you could hear the loud clanging of blacksmiths shoeing mules and oxen and repairing wagons. I stuck close by Pa and Mama when we went into town because all the people and the noise scared me. After the first trip, Pa went into town alone and left me and Mama at our camp, but it was even more crowded there. There were so many wagons that they covered nearly three square miles. And we were all waiting.”

“Waiting for what?” A.C. asked, frowning a little.

“Waiting for the grass to grow. You see, you needed the grass to be long enough for the oxen or mules to graze along the way. If you left too early and the grass wasn’t long enough, that could be a fatal mistake. We had to buy plenty of supplies for ourselves that the animals would have to haul and I can still remember them: two hundred pounds of flour, one hundred fifty pounds of bacon, twenty pounds of sugar and ten pounds of salt. We also had around fifty pounds of navy beans. Mama had dried apples back home and we had packed those. She packed the china that her mother had brought over from Sweden but we ate off tin plates and drank out of tin cups. Pa let me bring the few books my grandfather had sent me, my Noah’s Ark, and my cloth ball, and he brought my mother’s music box and their copy of Paradise Lost, but we couldn’t bring anything else. The mules could only haul so much and food was more important. Some emigrants didn’t realize that and the trail was littered with furniture, barrels of flour and other things they had to abandon along the way.”

“While we waited outside Independence for the grass to grow, Pa talked with some other families and we decided to form a wagon train. One of the families, the Paynes, was camped next to us. They had a boy my age named Johnny, and we’d become friends. We’d play catch with my cloth ball or play Kick the Can. There were some other children camped near us and sometimes we’d all play Needle’s Eye or tag. The older boys would play Shinny, but Mama and Mrs. Payne wouldn’t allow me and Johnny to play it because they thought it was too rough.” Adam stopped and grinned. “Actually, we did play it once. One of my front teeth was loose, and it got knocked out in the game and Johnny got a black eye. That’s when our mamas told us we were forbidden to play again.” Bronwen and Mrs. Davies shook their heads then while A.C. grinned.

“The first week in May, everyone agreed the grass was long enough and they all tried to leave at the same time. It was worse than a log jam. We’d traded our old draft horse, Molly, for a team of mules, and Pa was finding driving a team was trickier than driving one horse; however, he was a better driver than some. Some greenhorns managed to bump their wagons into trees or even tip them over. A few couldn’t even get their animals to move in the right direction.” Adam grinned at the memory of the chaotic scene.

“I have to tell you that much of the trip was monotonous. Every morning we’d eat a breakfast of bacon and johnnycake. Pa and Mama would drink coffee and we had a milk cow so I’d get milk to drink. I used to help Pa groom Molly and hitch her up, but he didn’t think the mules were as sweet-tempered so I wasn’t allowed to help with them. Instead I’d help by drying the dishes Mama washed and folding up our bedrolls. Then Johnny and I would walk alongside our wagons. We wanted to explore, but we were told not to wonder off. We disobeyed once but Mrs. Payne spotted us right away. Mr. Payne and Pa punished us. I think that was the most painful ‘necessary talk’ Pa and I ever had”

A.C. looked at his dad with big eyes. “I didn’t think Grandpa was that mean.”

“He wasn’t mean,” Adam replied quietly. “I thought so then but now I understand exactly why he and Mr. Payne punished us so severely. If we’d wandered off out of sight, which would have been easy to do on the prairie that stretches out like a sea of tall grass in every direction, we might have gotten lost and died of hunger, thirst or exposure. They had to make sure we never disobeyed the rule about wandering off again.” A.C. looked thoughtful but he slowly shook his head to show he understood.

“We’d walk for miles every day. We’d stop for a midday meal of johnnycake and beans and to give the stock a chance to rest and graze. In the evening, we’d gather the wagons in a circle and if Pa had shot a rabbit or a prairie hen, we’d have stew for dinner. Most times it was more beans and maybe some wild greens. Halfway across Kansas Johnny got a blister on his foot. It became infected and he died of blood poisoning. We had to bury him on the trail.” Adam stopped then, his first encounter with death still as painful as it was over a half century before, and they weren’t sure if he was going to continue.

When he spoke again, his voice was quieter and almost flat. “We were about two days from Fort Kearny in Nebraska when my brother Hoss was born. We hadn’t made good time because the wagon master was a drunk. A few weeks before Hoss was born, he’d been shot by a man to whom he owed money. That man, Mr. Rockwell, knew the country so the men on the wagon train offered him the job of leading us to Ash Hollow, where we would join up with a larger wagon train.”

The painful look returned to the older man’s face and William wished he had just kept his curiosity to himself, rather than cause his future father-in-law any more grief. Before he could voice his concern, however, Adam continued.

“We got to Ash Hollow about the time Hoss turned a month old, but because of our delays on the trail, the other wagon train had left without us. Unbeknownst to us, some Indians had been following us all along, and once we reached the station, they attacked.” Swallowing hard, he managed to finish that part of the story. “Mama was killed in the attack after she handed Hoss to me and grabbed a rifle to help the men fight off the Indians. I saw her fall with an arrow in her back.” He closed his eyes then and was silent, but they could feel his pain.

Bronwen took Adam’s hand and held it between hers while everyone else was silent. A.C.’s eyes filled with tears as he imagined how he would feel watching his mama die right in front of him without any way to help her. Beth wiped a tear from her eye as she thought of her own small ones and how valiantly Inger had fought to protect her children. William took Miranda’s hand and squeezed it. As she looked up at him, he mouthed the words, “I’m sorry.” She shook her head and touched his cheek to let him know that this story had been a long time in coming and that her fiancé had nothing to be sorry about. She, too, was deeply touched and proud that her middle name had been given in honor of this brave and gentle soul.

After a few minutes, Adam drew a deep breath, opened his tear-filled eyes, and resumed his narrative. “One of the other women on the wagon train had a baby she was starting to wean, and she agreed to wet-nurse Hoss. Johnny’s mother fixed meals for me and Pa.”

“When we’d left Independence, Pa had told Mama and me about Courthouse Rock, a huge boulder immigrants would climb and then carve or scratch their names onto. I had been looking forward to climbing it and adding my name, but now I didn't care about it or anything else. When some of the other children went, I stayed with Pa, even though he barely noticed I was there.”

Bronwen, Beth and Gwyneth exchanged glances then, remembering that when Penny died, Adam hadn’t been able to deal with his grief and had ignored the rest of the family. They surmised it must have been the same with Ben. Adam took a deep, calming breath and continued, although with a tenuous hold on his emotions. The next words he spoke were in a man’s voice, but obviously reflected the feelings of the lonely little boy he had been so long ago. “I tried so hard to be a good boy the way Mama would have wanted me to be and not cause any problems for Pa. During the day, I managed but then I started having nightmares. At first they weren't so bad. I'd wake up and I'd be crying, but I never said anything to Pa. But they got worse and worse. I remember one night waking up screaming and then Hoss started to cry. Pa got him calmed down but I thought I was going to be in trouble for sure.”

A.C.’s eyes grew round as he stared at his father. “What did Grandpa do then, Dad?”

Adam’s face softened as he recalled his father’s tenderness in dealing with his distraught child. “Pa held me in his arms and stroked my hair. He hadn't held me in a long time and I remember how good it felt. When I was calm, he told me very gently that Mama was in heaven with my mother and they would both be looking after me and Hoss. Pa promised me that even if our mamas were in heaven, Pa and Hoss and I were still a family. I missed my mama, but knowing Pa loved me and that I had two mamas in heaven looking after me made it easier to go on.”

A.C. verbalized his own thoughts then. “I can’t imagine growing up without Mama,” and Bronwen reached over and squeezed his hand.

“Your grandpa did the best he could to be a father and a mother to me and Uncle Hoss,” Adam said quietly, “but I missed my mama’s gentleness and sweetness.” He gazed lovingly into Bronwen’s eyes as he said, “I am so thankful that your mama has always been with me, helping me to raise you and your sisters.”

Suddenly realizing that he had bared his soul in front of not only his family, but also William, Adam struggled to regain his composure and finish his story.

“But I was telling you about our journey. The Oregon and California trails separate in southern Idaho. The majority of the men had decided that since it was so late in the year they would head south toward California. It was on one of the trails across the Sierra Nevada that we saw Lake Tahoe. I thought it was the most beautiful place I had ever seen. I wanted to stop there but of course we didn’t have the supplies to survive a winter, especially with a baby in tow, so we pressed on to the valley of the Sacramento River. I never forgot that beautiful lake, and I guess Pa didn’t either since the next spring we headed back over the mountains and built our cabin.”

Sensing that this was the end of the story for now, though he wanted to hear more about the settling of the Nevada territory, William spoke up. “Thank you for sharing that, sir.” Adam nodded, his hazel eyes boring into William’s blue ones as the younger man absorbed the immensity of what he had just heard. The respect and admiration he felt for Miranda’s father had now deepened and grown immeasurably. He realized what a treasure he was being given by this man who had lost so many loved ones in his life, and he would do everything in his power to love and protect Miranda as her father always had.

Meanwhile Elen had grown tired of rolling her ball back and forth with her little brother and she walked over to her mama and said petulantly, “I’m hungry, Mama.”

“We’ll eat in a little while,” Beth replied with a smile. “Would you like to look at one of your books?”

“No, I wanna eat,” Elen stated pugnaciously.

“I’m sorry, sweetie, but I don’t have any food to give you. Would you like to play with your dolly?”

“I wanna eat!” Elen repeated even more loudly, and Adam, now once again in command of his emotions, said in a firm voice, “Elen Penelope Jones, you will not talk to your mother in that tone of voice.”

“I wanna eat!” Elen shouted and stamped her foot.

Adam stood up then. Beth began, “Daddy—” but Adam overrode her. “Princess, I know Elen is your child, but she can’t be allowed to talk back to you,” he said evenly.

Beth sighed. She hated punishing her children, but she didn’t want Elen to grow up to be spoiled and willful. “You’re right, but I will handle it.” Adam nodded and sat back down.

“Elen, little girls mustn’t talk back to grownups,” Beth said as sternly as she could. “If they do, then they must be punished.” She pulled her daughter over her knees, spanked her once and then sat her down. Elen ran to her grandma sobbing. Bronwen picked her up and sat her on her lap, rubbing her back to calm her.

Huw, who had been watching with big eyes, now said, “Elen bad.”

“I’m n-not b-bad,” Elen sobbed.

“No, you’re not bad,” Adam said, reaching over to stroke her hair, “but you did do a bad thing and so your mama had to punish you.”

“Would you tell your mama that you’re sorry you talked back to her?” Bronwen asked gently and the little girl nodded.

“I’m s-sorry, M-mama,” Elen got out and held out her arms to Beth, who took her, blinking back tears of her own.

Fortunately, it wasn’t too much longer before they arrived at the large, red-brick hotel. William saw to the luggage while Adam checked them in and Dr. Davies escorted the ladies and children into the hotel’s restaurant. Beth hoped her little ones would be on their best behavior because she didn’t think she could bear giving any more spankings that day. Her wish was granted and except for Huw’s normal messiness they behaved like angels. After the meal, the children needed a nap as did their great-grandparents. Everyone else decided to visit the Dartmouth Bookstore. Gwyneth was envious because the store had a larger inventory than the Overtons’ and each of the Cartwrights chose a book to take back to Cloncurry. When they returned to the hotel, the others were waiting for them so they could go see Miranda and William’s house.

“Our house is on Greensboro Road,” William said as they left the hotel and headed down the sidewalk.

“Hanover would seem to be the quintessential New England town,” Adam remarked as they strolled along, noting the tree-lined streets, neat lawns and saltbox houses.

“These trees must be beautiful in the autumn,” Mrs. Davies commented and William said with a smile. “Oh, they are magnificent. I wish you all could see them—blazing with color.” He stopped in front of a large two-story brick house and said proudly, “Here it is.”

“What a ripper!” A.C. exclaimed animatedly while Gwyneth said, “It’s beautiful.”

“One of the best examples of Greek Revival I’ve seen,” Adam said, admiring the clean lines and fine workmanship of the dwelling. “Usually they’re clapboard, but I’ve seen others in brick. See the gable roof,” he said gesturing, “and the elongated windows and the massive Doric columns; they are all found in Greek Revival homes. I’ve never seen anyone enclose the ends of the porch this way, but I like it.” William’s chest swelled just a bit, and Miranda bit her lip to keep from grinning at his obvious pleasure in gaining her father’s approval.

“How many rooms does it have?” Mrs. Davies asked.

“It has four bedrooms on the second floor and two more attic bedrooms. The master bedroom is huge,” Miranda said, “and the other three are large. Then there is a drawing room, library, dining room and kitchen. We also have a water closet and a bathroom at the back of the house.”

“I have the key so we can go inside and look around,” William added.

“We had new wallpaper put in all the bedrooms, and the walls and the molding in the drawing room and dining room have been repainted,” Miranda announced proudly. She added, “We’ve only bought furniture for the drawing and dining rooms, the library and our bedroom. We decided we could furnish the other bedrooms as we needed them.”

“I had this new linoleum put on the floor of the kitchen. It’s supposed to be much easier to clean,” William remarked.

Poor Beth was struggling not to be envious as she looked about the beautiful house and compared it to the small rectory with its fading wallpaper and old furnishings. I have a wonderful husband who loves me and our children, and that is more important than the size of our home or the elegance of our furniture, she told herself, feeling very ashamed of her envy. Still, as she gazed at the brown leather Chesterfield and the partner’s desk made of walnut in the library and the lovely oval dining room table of tiger maple, there was a part of her that wished she and Dafydd could have a home as fine as Miranda and William’s.

Adam was concerned that William and Miranda were beginning their life together under a burden of debt. However, his advice had not been asked and the purchases had been made. Miranda knew her father well and seeing his almost imperceptible frown, she moved quickly to set his mind at rest. Drawing him aside, she said softly, “We paid for the furniture and the repairs, Daddy, using William’s legacy and money from my trust fund. There is a mortgage on the house but we plan to pay it off in ten years. It is important for William’s career that he has an attractive house with nice furnishings so we look on all this as an investment.”

Adam smiled slightly at her before replying in an equally quiet tone, “I’m glad to know you haven’t gone into debt. I hope you didn’t touch the principal of your trust fund.”

“No, Daddy, just the interest. We intend to use it for our children’s education just like Beth and Dafydd,” and she smiled warmly at him.

Adam examined the house carefully for any problems and was relieved that he only found a few minor items that he brought to William’s attention. William listened thoughtfully and then asked Adam for advice since he had experience in construction and architecture.

Bronwen and Mrs. Davies questioned Miranda about drapes, curtains and rugs, and then offered suggestions. Overcoming her envy, Beth joined in and Miranda and Gwyneth both listened attentively to the older women’s advice. A.C., bored to tears by this time, offered to take Elen and Huw outside to play while the adults finished their dreary dissertation on colors, columns and curtains.

As they went through the bedrooms on the second floor, Beth asked, “Which room will be the nursery?”

Blushing just a little, Miranda said, “I thought this corner room. It’s right next to ours so I’ll be able to hear the baby when he or she cries, and there are two large windows so there will be plenty of light.”

Beth smiled and said, “There may be times you wish you’d chosen the bedroom at the other end of the hall,” to which Adam added, “Amen!” All three of his daughters laughed at this, as their mother blushed at her husband’s obvious allusion to their lack of privacy during each of their five children’s infancy.

Everyone approved of the master bedroom, which was papered in a floral design on a beige background, and the lovely low post bed made of tiger maple with a sheaf of wheat motif. After looking at the bedrooms, they all went down the backstairs to look at the kitchen, the water closet and bathroom.

“I like this bathtub,” Bronwen commented, looking at the gleaming white tub on a pedestal base.

“It’s the newest thing,” William replied proudly. “It’s solid porcelain.”

“Solid porcelain?” Adam said skeptically.

“Yes, it’s made of earthenware coated with a white glaze. It weighs almost 900 pounds; we had to tear down the wall to get it installed. And we have a new Howell toilet installed in the water closet.”

The water closet was too small for more than two people to enter at a time; Adam went in with William first. “I pull the chain and then it flushes the rim and siphons away the waste. Plus porcelain is easier to clean than wood so this is the most sanitary toilet available.”

“Pretty impressive,” Adam commented while A.C. and Elen, who had recently come back into the house, both chanted, “I wanna see! I wanna see!”

“Me see!” Huw chimed in, hopping up and down excitedly.

“All right, I think you three can all squeeze in,” William said with a grin.

“I wish we had one of these rather than an outhouse,” Bronwen said with a sigh and Adam said, “Maybe someday, sweetheart. It’s just not practical now.” He secretly doubted that he would ever live in a home with such a device, as Cloncurry was not likely to install a sewer system anytime in the foreseeable future.”

“It’s one definite advantage life in the city has over life in the country,” Dr. Davies said with a little smile, knowing his daughter still missed this convenience in her rural home.

After they finished inspecting the house, they all walked back to the Wheelock Hotel. It was then time for supper and while they ate in the parlor of Bronwen and Adam’s suite, they made plans for their final day in Hanover. Miranda and Gwyneth both decided they would stay with Beth and the children while everyone else visited the museum since they wanted to enjoy their niece and nephew, as well as the counsel of their married sister. They would all tour the college and then the men would visit the Mary Hitchcock Hospital while the women explored the town.

The next day as they strolled toward the museum, enjoying the beautiful day, William purposely dropped back to have a private word with Adam. Bronwen, sensing the young man’s desire to speak privately with her husband, guided A.C. into step with his grandparents. William said quietly to Adam, “I was hoping for a chance to speak with you, sir, when Miranda wasn’t here.” Adam raised one eyebrow but said nothing so William continued. “You see, I need your advice for the wedding gift I want to give Miranda. I know Miranda loves to ride and I was thinking of buying her a horse. I can stable it at the same livery that the college riding team uses. I would just use one of the college’s horses when we go riding, but I thought Miranda would really like a horse of her own. I know you are an expert, and I’m not, so I was hoping that perhaps while Dr. Davies is visiting the hospital, you and I might actually go and look at a stud farm here in the area and you could help me choose a mare.”

A.C., suspecting that William and his father were up to something, had deliberately hung back to catch what he could of their conversation. “I wanna come, too!” he said excitedly, but his father frowned.

“A.C., it is not polite to eavesdrop on private conversations,” he said sternly. William looked a bit uncomfortable at the inadvertent disclosure of his gift, but Adam, hoping to gain his son’s promise of discretion, added, “if you promise not to tell any of your sisters, you may come with us.” He turned to Dr. Davies. “If we’re not along, Tad, you can talk shop with the other doctors without any hindrance.” Dr. Davies smilingly nodded his assent.

Bronwen said firmly, “Remember, A.C. bach, this is a secret. Not a word to your sisters.”

“Okay,” A.C. agreed, pleased to be taken into the adults’ confidence. He also liked the idea of knowing something his sisters didn’t.

“This is a lovely town,” Mrs. Davies said that afternoon as the women and the younger children, after reconnecting at the hotel, left the business district and strolled along the banks of the Connecticut River. “So many beautiful trees.”

“I wonder what the fishing is like?” Gwyneth remarked, and the other women exchanged smiles.

“Don’t get too close to the water, Huw!” Beth called, as her youngest had moved just out of her reach and was headed straight for the river. “Huw!”

“I’ll get him,” Gwyneth said, knowing her long legs could get her there faster. She barely made it in time to catch him before he tumbled into the water.

“You certainly have an affinity for water, mate,” Gwyneth said, lifting her nephew high over her head while he chortled merrily. His laughter turned to tears as his mother delivered two quick swats to his bottom and scolded him for ignoring her call. Taking her sobbing baby boy into her arms, Beth laid his head against her shoulder and said to the others, “Poor A.C. I can’t believe he didn’t want to come with us. He’s probably bored with the hospital tour.”

“I think it’s nice he wanted to spend time with William but they’ll probably end up here at the river,” Miranda said. “William has a scull and he might take A.C. sculling.”

“Well, I hope your father doesn’t go with them,” Bronwen said tartly. “He’s still sore from the last time. He just doesn’t realize that he’s not as young as he used to be.” She knew William, Adam and A.C. wouldn’t get back from the stud farm in time to go sculling, and she was relieved that she didn’t have to worry about her husband overexerting himself.

“Let’s play rosie, Mama,” Elen said, tugging on Beth’s skirt.

“Ask me politely first,” Beth said and Elen stuck out her lip in a pout. “Let’s play rosie ¼” and Beth paused, waiting patiently.

Elen continued to scowl and then, just as suddenly, her expression brightened. “Please!” she shouted, and Beth bent down to give her a kiss and a hug, and then did the same to the now calm Huw. She looked at her mother and Bronwen said, “I’d love to play.”

Elen smiled at Mrs. Davies and said, “Play rosie, hennain?

Mrs. Davies smiled and reached down to cup Elen’s chubby cheek in her palm. “Na, Elen fach. If hennain falls down, she won’t be able to get back up. I’ll just watch the rest of you play.” Her heart warmed at the sight of the three generations playing the ancient game. Elen and Huw shrieked with laughter as everyone fell down.

After a couple of repetitions Bronwen said, “Why don’t we play London Bridge? Hennain and I can be the bridge.” The children were rolling on the ground giggling when the “bridge” fell down on their tall aunt.

As they walked back to the Wheelock, Beth said quietly to her sister, “This will be a wonderful place to raise children. I know you and William are going to be very happy here. I just wish Dafydd could have met William.”

“Maybe someday we’ll visit Cloncurry,” Miranda said. “I’d like my children to see where I grew up and to know their Cartwright relatives.” She said softly, “I understand now how hard it must have been for Daddy living so far from Grandpa, Uncle Hoss and Uncle Joe.” The sisters, separated for so long by a vast ocean but never far from each other’s thoughts, put their arms about each other’s waists and walked quietly down the brick sidewalk, each savoring the closeness that was once an everyday occurrence.

While the women were shopping and playing with the children, Adam, William and A.C. were visiting a stud farm for Saddlebreds. The trio had accompanied Dr. Davies to the hospital, where he was greeted by the chief resident, for a tour of the facility, which William had arranged.

“I rode a Saddlebred when I spent the summer at my roommate’s farm in western Massachusetts,” Adam told William as they traveled in a rented buggy. “They have the smoothest gait of any horse I’ve ever ridden. Miranda is an experienced rider, but she’s not the equal of Beth or Gwyneth so we want to look for a horse that’s eager to please, not one that’s a handful.”

“I was thinking that we wouldn’t want one more than fourteen or fifteen hands,” William remarked and Adam nodded his agreement.

Adam was impressed by the stud farm, and the owner was impressed by Adam’s knowledge of horses. When he and William stated what they were looking for, the owner showed them three mares he thought met their criteria.

“These are fine animals,” Adam said after examining them. “I lean toward the mahogany bay.” He turned to his prospective son-in-law. “What about you, William? You’re the one who’s actually buying the horse.”

“But you’re the expert,” William replied. “I trust your judgment.” He and the owner finalized the transaction and then the three of them returned to Hanover.

The next morning the family again separated into two groups, though this time, they would not see each other again until they were reunited at the Ponderosa. William, Miranda, Adam and Bronwen were going to spend a few days visiting William’s parents in Wilmington while everyone else was headed west later in the day. (William had taken care of the new travel arrangements for everyone traveling to the Ponderosa while they were still in Boston.) Gwyneth and A.C. rode with their parents in a hackney cab to the station to say goodbye.

“I expect to hear a good report from Tad-cu and Mam-gu on your behavior, young man,” Adam said to A.C. before he and Bronwen boarded the train.

“Aw, Dad,” A.C. said, “I’m not a baby.”

Adam grinned. “No, you’re not but I hope you’re not too old to give your dad a hug?” and he held out his arms.

A.C. hugged him hard, saying, “Bye, Dad.”

“Goodbye, Jackeroo. I’ll see you in a few days.” He stepped back so Bronwen could say her goodbye.

“I’m going to miss you, A.C. bach, but I know you’ll be on your best behavior for your grandparents,” she said gently. She hugged him tightly and kissed his cheek and he hugged her back, reluctant to say goodbye. Realizing that he would be separated from both parents for the first time in his life, he suddenly didn’t feel so grown-up.

Gwyneth came and stood behind him, giving his neck an affectionate squeeze, and he smiled up at her gratefully. “A.C. will be fine,” she said to her parents with a smile before hugging them both. “I can hardly wait to hear what you think of Mrs. Gordon,” she whispered in her mother’s ear as she ended the embrace. Bronwen, giving her daughter a purposeful glance, then kissed her baby one last time and let William help her and Miranda board the train. Adam ruffled his youngest’s hair and caressed his daughter’s cheek with the back of his hand before moving up the stairs with William close behind. A.C. and his sister stood on the platform and waved until the train was out of sight.

“Miranda told me there is an ice cream parlor here in Hanover,” Gwyneth said cheerfully, seeing her baby brother was on the verge of tears. “Would you like some? My treat.”

“Right,” he replied, trying to grin bravely. “That’d be beaut.”

When they got back to the Wheelock, they found Dr. Davies waiting for them in the lobby along with the luggage, which he had arranged to have sent ahead to the train depot. As A.C. hurried upstairs to see Elen and Huw, Dr. Davies said quietly to Gwyneth, “I was beginning to worry.”

“I’m sorry, Tad-cu,” she replied in an equally quiet tone. “I bought A.C. some ice cream. He was missing Mama and Daddy and I thought it would cheer him up.”

“That was very sweet,” he said, putting his arm about her waist and giving her an affectionate squeeze.

{ { { {

“Mrs. Gordon asks that you join her in the drawing room when it’s convenient. She’s put you in the same room as last time, Miss Cartwright,” the parlor maid said when the three Cartwrights and William arrived at the Gordon’s townhouse.

“Right. We’ll meet you in a few minutes,” Miranda said to her parents before running up the stairs with William.

"If you'll follow me, Mr. and Mrs. Cartwright" the parlor maid said, "I'll show you to your rooms." Adam's eyebrow shot up at her use of the plural. He caught Bronwen's eye, and she shrugged slightly.

The maid led them up the stairs to the second floor and then down a hallway. "This is your room, ma'am," she said, opening the next to the last door in the hall and revealing a large bedroom papered with a floral design. It had a tall, narrow, many-paned window that overlooked the street, and a lovely high post bed, highboy and vanity made of mahogany.

“And this is your room, sir,” the maid said then, opening the door to the last room in the hall, which also had a window overlooking the street, but the walls were painted a pale green with ivory molding. It had a low post bed with a pineapple and ring design. The bed and highboy were made of tiger maple. “The chauffeur will bring up your luggage as soon as it arrives,” the maid said. She curtseyed and then hurried back down the hall.

“Which room do you want to use?” Bronwen asked with a giggle.

"I think I prefer yours, with you still in it,” he replied with a grin and she agreed.

"I would've liked to change before meeting Mrs. Gordon,” Bronwen commented as she stood in front of the room’s full-length mirror and looked at her reflection critically, "but since our trunk hasn't arrived, I suppose I'll have to go as I am.” She removed her hat, straightened the jacket of her tailor-made suit, and tried to smooth out the creases in the skirt. Adam wanted to loosen his high collar and remove his necktie, but with a sigh, he merely straightened it and then offered Bronwen his arm.

They met William and Miranda on the stairs and the four of them entered the drawing room together. Adam and Bronwen saw that Mrs. Gordon was an attractive woman around Bronwen’s age, elegantly dressed and coifed, her face a polite mask.

"Mr. and Mrs. Cartwright, how nice to meet you,” she said, but there was no warmth in her voice or expression. "I trust your journey was without incident?"

"Yes, thank you," Adam replied as he and Bronwen seated themselves on a settee by Mrs. Gordon. William and Miranda sat on a matching settee across from her parents.

"This is a lovely room," Adam said admiringly. It was well-proportioned with a high ceiling and tall, narrow windows. It was painted robin's egg blue while all the Robert Adam style molding was painted white.

"Thank you," Mrs. Gordon replied complacently. Then in a brisk tone she added, “It will just be the six of us dining tonight. Tomorrow night I have invited my in-laws to dine since they are not able to attend the wedding.”

“We look forward to meeting them,” Bronwen said. “I am sorry we have such a short time to spend with you and Mr. Gordon before the wedding but I’m sure you can understand that when William and Miranda invited us to visit Hanover so we could see where they were going to live, we simply could not pass up that opportunity.”

“My husband and I have not been invited to visit,” Mrs. Gordon said in a frosty tone.

“The house isn’t totally furnished yet, Mother. We will certainly invite you to visit once we have settled in. However, it might be years before Mr. and Mrs. Cartwright visit the U.S. again, so we wanted to take advantage of the opportunity,” William said, already uncomfortable with his mother’s obvious resentment at being second in anything that involved him.

“My wife and I are both grateful for the chance to see their home and the community where they will live,” Adam said calmly. “As were Miranda’s sisters and her grandparents.”

“Don’t forget A.C.,” Bronwen added with a grin.

“A.C.?” Mrs. Gordon repeated.

“Our son, Adam, Jr. I didn’t want him called Junior,” Adam replied, “so his sisters decided to call him A.C. for Adam Cartwright.”

“Oh, I see,” Mrs. Gordon replied in a condescending tone. “I’ve always thought nicknames vulgar. I never allowed William to be called Willy or Billy.”

“I think nicknames are less stuffy and formal,” Bronwen replied with a smile, though her meaning was clear. “We named our oldest Elizabeth, but we’ve always called her Beth.”

“My youngest sister was Penelope, but she was always so dainty that Penelope just didn’t seem to fit so we called her Penny,” Miranda added, supporting her mother’s point of view.

“To each his own,” Mrs. Gordon replied with a sniff, indicating her contempt, and Bronwen could now appreciate why Miranda felt the way she did about her future mother-in-law,

William said quickly, “I was so glad to have the chance to meet Miranda’s sisters and brother. And my new niece and nephew are charming. Elen was just beginning to lose her shyness around me.”

“Well, William, they aren’t your niece and nephew yet, and charming is not usually a word associated with small children.” Turning to Adam and Bronwen, she then asked as an afterthought. “How old are your grandchildren?”

“Elen will be four this November and Huw was a year old in March,” Bronwen replied, trying hard not to let her dislike show in her expression or tone.

Before his future in-laws could respond to the slight against their grandchildren, William reasserted himself. “Elen is sweet, but she’s very shy. Huw, on the other hand, is as friendly as a puppy. And charming is the correct word for these particular children, Mother. They are well-behaved and quite a joy to be around.”

Mrs. Gordon felt she’d heard as much about the Cartwrights’ grandchildren as politeness dictated so she decided to change the subject. “I’m not familiar with the customs of the ¼um ¼ frontier. After the wedding ceremony, will there be some sort of celebration?”

“While only our immediate family and close friends will be at the wedding ceremony, all the hands and the Ponderosa’s neighbors are invited to the reception afterward,” Miranda said coolly.

“So it will be a formal occasion?” Mrs. Gordon inquired.

“Formal in Nevada is different from formal here in New England,” Adam replied, having had the benefit of living in both venues. “I imagine we’ll barbecue a steer and have some side dishes, and there will be some dancing outside in the yard. Then after William and Miranda leave, there’ll be a shivaree.”

“Shivaree?” Miranda asked.

“Oh, it’s a mock serenade we have for newlyweds. Uncle Joe and I will keep it from getting out of hand,” Adam assured her while Mrs. Gordon’s face expressed her scorn at such backwards attempts at honoring the couple.

Bronwen decided she’d had all she could take of the haughty Mrs. Gordon and spoke up. “I’m afraid I developed a headache on our journey. Would you excuse me, Mrs. Gordon?”

“Of course,” Mrs. Gordon replied. “Dinner is in two hours and I hope you’ll be feeling better then.”

“I’m sure I will. I’m just tired,” Bronwen replied, and to herself finished the sentence of you.

Not wanting to be left alone with this unbearable woman, Adam quickly inserted “I think I’d like to rest as well.” Mrs. Gordon nodded, so they left, leaving William and Miranda to their fate.

Adam ran his fingers around his neck and scowled at the high collar the salesman at Bloomingdale’s had insisted was de rigueur for formal attire. Then with a sigh, he attempted to tie the strip of black cambric into an acceptable bow. “Sweetheart,” he called from the bedroom the Gordons had assigned to him, which he had decided to use as a dressing room, “Could you come tie this confounded tie for me? I seem to be all thumbs.”

“I’ll be there in just a minute,” she called from their bedroom. Adam’s eyes traveled over her appreciatively as she entered the room, wearing one of her new evening gowns. It had the simple style that she knew he liked her to wear: a plain skirt of crimped lilac taffeta edged with two narrow frills at the hem, while the bodice had a square décolletage trimmed with velvet. The outfit was completed by a velvet sash that emphasized her slender waist. He knew she was wearing a corset because she looked as slender as the day they married. Her hair, now silvery white, had been combed over pads to create a fashionably bouffant look and was arranged carefully atop her head in a knot. As a finishing touch, she was wearing the amethyst and diamond earrings he’d given her for their first Christmas.

“Sweetheart, you take my breath away,” he said in a low husky voice.

“You’re making my heart race,” she whispered as she thought how handsome he was dressed in the black dinner jacket that set off his broad shoulders and slim waist. He was still the handsomest man she’d ever seen.

“I don’t suppose we could send our excuses to the Gordons?” he asked softly as he lightly caressed her slender neck with his fingertips.

“I’m tempted, but no,” she replied with a tiny smile. “Miranda would be mortified. Now, let me fix your tie.”

“I suppose anticipation will simply add to our enjoyment later tonight,” he added with a knowing wink. “We’re going to have to send A.C. to stay with Rhys and Matilda some night and I want you to wear that dress just for me.” He smiled when he saw her milky-white skin flush with color. She finished with his tie so he offered her his arm.

“Wait,” she said, and he chuckled when she went into their room, removed her spectacles, and set them on the vanity.

“I take it you don’t want to see Miranda’s future in-laws?” he asked wryly.

“Not particularly,” she replied with a little grin, “and I want to look my best when I meet that odious woman again.”

“I prefer that I’m the only one who sees how beautiful your eyes are,” he said in the low tone that always made her shiver with delight. “However, I suppose it’s in a good cause,” he added with a wink.

He saw with satisfaction the appreciation in Mr. Gordon’s eyes and the envy in Mrs. Gordon’s when they met them in the drawing room. Mrs. Gordon was attractive enough, although the frown lines in her forehead were deeply etched, but compared to Bronwen, her figure was gross and fleshy and she looked much older than her contemporary. Adam was proud of the fact no one looking at Bronwen would ever think she’d borne him five children. He also thought her pure white hair was lovelier than the clearly artificial gold of Mrs. Gordon’s. Bronwen’s greatest assets were always her charm and vivacity, two qualities that Mrs. Gordon was sadly lacking.

“Mrs. Cartwright, may I express my admiration,” Mr. Gordon said, taking her hand and kissing it, with more warmth than Adam thought was necessary. “It will be my pleasure to escort you to dinner.”

“And mine to escort you, Mrs. Gordon,” Adam said, trying to sound gallant, even though his attention was directed at the way Mr. Gordon was looking at Bronwen and he inadvertently avoided eye contact with his dinner partner, which only made Mrs. Gordon even more incensed. Miranda and William, who had remained silent during this conversation, now exchanged uneasy, though slightly bemused, glances.

“You know, Mrs. Cartwright, you have extraordinary eyes; I have never seen any that color before,” Mr. Gordon said as he seated Bronwen on his right. “They remind me of violets in the spring.”

“Did you misplace your spectacles?” Mrs. Gordon inquired spitefully.

“Oh, I don’t wear them that often,” Bronwen replied airily, which caused Miranda’s eyebrows to shoot up and Adam to clear his throat noisily. Seeing both their expressions caused William to stifle his laugh in his hand.

Mr. Gordon glared at his wife for her rudeness and then said with a smile directed toward Bronwen, “So what do you think of our part of the country, Mrs. Cartwright? How does it compare with Queensland?”

“Queensland is nothing like Delaware,” Bronwen said with a smile. “For one thing, it’s much cooler here. The weather today felt like our winter.”

“Surely you exaggerate,” Mrs. Gordon said.

“No, my wife is quite correct,” Adam stated. “We’ve lived in Queensland for twenty-four years and I can only remember one or two times the temperature fell below fifty degrees.”

“I remember the hottest day,” Miranda interjected. “It was two years before I came to Boston.”

“That’s right,” Adam said. “It was January 16, 1889. The temperature reached 127 degrees.”

“Good God!” Mr. Gordon said with feeling. “Beg pardon, ladies,” he added quickly.

“We spent most of that day at the river, swimming,” Bronwen said.

“Swimming?” Mrs. Gordon repeated, her tone indicating only the vulgar masses would indulge in the activity.

“I’m sure you must be very fetching in a bathing costume,” Mr. Gordon said to Bronwen, and William, seeing Adam’s fierce glower, said quickly, “Have I told you what a splendid equestrienne Miranda is? She told me that you taught her to ride, Mr. Cartwright.”

“Yes, Daddy taught all of us to ride,” Miranda chimed in. “We each got our first pony on our fourth birthday.”

“I would have preferred to wait until they turned five, but my husband convinced me that four was old enough. Our granddaughter turns four this November, and he will be giving her riding lessons then,” Bronwen said, smiling at William for his obvious redirection of the conversation.

“It’s hard to believe you have grandchildren,” Mr. Gordon said to Bronwen, smiling warmly.

She returned his smile, saying, “You flatter me. Actually, we just learned that our third grandchild is due in December.”

“My wife,” Adam stated, stressing the possessive pronoun, “is a doting grandmother.”

“Yes, but my husband is the one who spoils our grandchildren,” Bronwen said, smiling at Adam, while Miranda blinked in surprise.

“I’m looking forward to being a grandfather myself,” Mr. Gordon stated. “Seeing the next generation of Gordons. Perhaps your son will want to join the family firm,” he added, directing a frown at William.

“Perhaps, but he might chose to be an historian, engineer or architect,” William replied evenly, his tone imparting his opinion on the subject of the “family firm”.

“Or even a cowboy,” Miranda added, earning a disapproving stare from her in-laws to be.

“The point is, it will be his choice,” William said firmly.

“A father likes to see his son follow in his footsteps. Don’t you agree, Mr. Cartwright?”

“Well, yes,” Adam said slowly. “I think young Adam will study engineering at the Sydney Technical College and then join our mining company.”

“But if he did choose another career, you’d accept it?” William asked.

“I wouldn’t have much choice, would I?” Adam replied, surprised at William’s intensity. “But he’s always talked of becoming an engineer.”

“How old is your son?” Mr. Gordon asked.

“He’s ten,” Bronwen said.

“When William was ten, he still talked of joining the family law firm,” Mr. Gordon stated.

Bronwen saw the concern in her husband’s eyes and she realized it had never occurred to him that A.C. might not want to be an engineer, and he clearly didn’t like that idea. Don’t borrow trouble, she told herself firmly. A.C. is always talking about when he and Llywelyn run the mining company instead of Adam and Rhys.

“We’ll have a chance to meet the lad ourselves,” Mr. Gordon continued, “when we’re all in Nevada for the wedding.”

“Yes, you’ll be able to meet all our children and grandchildren,” Bronwen said with a proud smile.

“I thought you told us that your oldest sister wouldn’t be able to attend?” Mrs. Gordon queried, suddenly realizing that if Miranda’s older sister was in attendance, surely her two small children would also be involved in the wedding celebration as well.

“I didn’t think she would, but her husband wanted her to be here so she and the children traveled with Mama and Daddy,” Miranda answered. “Beth will be my Matron of Honor.”

“That’s nice,” Mr. Gordon said, as his wife gave a thin lipped smile that showed her disappointment at Miranda’s pronouncement. In her opinion, children should be banned from such events until they were old enough to sit quietly and speak only when spoken to. Given her future daughter-in-law’s outspokenness, she could already envision how her grandchildren would be raised. I must make a note to inquire as to a proper nursemaid as soon as we return from that God-forsaken wilderness, she thought anxiously. I must have as much influence on my grandchildren’s upbringing as possible to counteract their mother’s highly opinioned nature, which is so unbecoming in a woman!

Oblivious as always to his wife’s plans, Mr. Gordon turned to more important matters. “I read in the paper that Germany and Great Britain have sent fleets to Manila Bay and the Germans are ignoring Dewey’s blockade,” and the conversation moved to a discussion of America’s war with Spain.

Unfortunately, since it became clear almost immediately that Mr. Gordon and Adam held diametrically opposed views, that wasn’t a safe topic either. However, Adam saw the pleading look his wife was giving him, and when Mr. Gordon finally stopped pontificating, he only said mildly, “Of course the newspapers in Queensland report the British point of view.” Mrs. Gordon took control of the conversation then and she did steer them toward neutral topics. Mr. Gordon continued to flirt with Bronwen throughout the evening and although she did not encourage him, a part of her enjoyed having another man pay her compliments.

When Adam and Bronwen were alone in their room, he was very quiet as he took off his dinner jacket and carefully hung it in the wardrobe and then removed the gold cufflinks she’d given him their first Christmas together and placed them on the vanity. He turned slowly to gaze at her with smoldering eyes and said, “You enjoyed flirting with Gordon tonight.”

“Maybe just a little,” she admitted with an impish grin as she finished removing her earrings and placed them by his cufflinks. “But what do I care about Mr. Gordon when I have you? You’re still the most beautiful man I’ve ever seen.” She stood on her tiptoes and pulled his mouth to hers.

When the kiss ended, he let his fingertips lightly caress her neck and shoulders as he asked, “Would you like some help undressing?”

“If you wish,” she replied, lowering her eyes.

He began by peeling off her elbow-length gloves, slowly and sensuously, dropping kisses down her sensitive inner arm and wrist, leaving her breathless. Then, as he kissed her neck and bare shoulders, his hands reached around to unfasten her bodice and untie the sash at her waist. He pulled her bodice off, revealing her black sateen corset, embroidered with crimson roses.

“Now it’s my turn,” she whispered. She unfastened the black bow tie and then unbuttoned the starched white shirt, running her fingertips through the thick mat of hair she exposed. She pulled down his suspenders and then tugged off the shirt, her hands caressing his hard, muscular arms and back. He bent down and kissed her deeply as he unfastened and then removed her corset. Her skirt went next, pooling at her feet, and she stood in the pretty frou-frou petticoat he’d given her. Before moving to the bed, he unpinned her hair and watched the silvery white tresses cascade past her hips.

Afterward she lay astride him, their bodies still joined, both reluctant to separate. He felt rather than heard her soft giggles.

“What’s so funny?” he whispered, gently caressing her cheek.

“I was just thinking how surprised the maid will be when she discovers one of our rooms wasn’t used tonight.”

The previous evening, Mrs. Gordon had announced that they were expecting several callers who were anxious to meet the Cartwrights so Bronwen was very glad she’d taken Miranda’s advice and bought a tea-gown at Bloomingdale’s. The pale green cashmere gown had a close-fitting bodice and bell-shaped skirt. “What do you think?” she asked Adam as she did a slow pirouette.

“I think I’m glad Mr. Gordon has to go to the office today,” he said with a slow smile.

“Well, all the ladies who call are going to be jealous of me,” she replied, reaching up to straighten his necktie. “Your morning coat is very flattering.”

“I’m glad you like it because I hate wearing this necktie,” he complained. “At least I can fold this collar over but I still feel like I’m being choked.”

“In a few more days we’ll be back at the Ponderosa and you won’t have to dress up except for the wedding. Besides, I know your collar and necktie cannot possibly be more uncomfortable than this corset.”

He grinned at that saying, “You’re probably correct.” Just then there was a knock at the door and Miranda called, “Mama, are you ready to go down to breakfast?”

Adam opened the door and saw the startled look on William’s face, while Miranda merely grinned at her father as she gave him a peck on the cheek. “Good morning, you two. I think your mother is just applying the finishing touches to her hair,” he said to Miranda. “Come in, won’t you?”

“I’m glad to see you’re wearing your spectacles today,” Miranda said to her mother, who was just putting the last comb in her hair. “Why ever did you tell that fib about not wearing them often?”

Bronwen sighed deeply. “I’m sorry, William, but I just didn’t want to look dowdy next to your mother.”

“You certainly weren’t dowdy,” William said with a grin. “I didn’t know my father even knew how to flirt, but he was certainly taken with you.”

“That was obvious,” Adam said sarcastically.

“I predict that this morning all the ladies are going to be flirting with you,” Bronwen said, putting her hand on his arm, and they exchanged a warm, loving smile.

William and Miranda followed the older couple and he said very quietly, “Your parents really love each other.”

“Yes, they do. And I know I’ll love you just as much when I’m Mama’s age as I do now. We’re going to have a marriage just as wonderful as theirs,” she said earnestly.

“I hope so,” he replied, bringing her hand to his lips. He’d never realized a husband and wife might choose to share a bedroom even after there was no more hope of children—certainly his parents didn’t, nor any of his friends’ parents. The way Mr. and Mrs. Cartwright looked at each other and the way they touched he was sure that they were still lovers. That was the kind of marriage that he wanted to have with Miranda—a marriage of true minds where love did not alter with the passing years. How did Shakespeare put it? he thought. Oh yes. ‘Love alters not with his brief hours and weeks/But bears it out even to the edge of doom.’

The first callers that morning were Mr. Gordon’s sisters, Mrs. Logan and Mrs. McKean. As they entered the room and Adam stood, they exchanged quick glances. They hadn’t expected that their nephew’s future father-in-law would be such an imposing man, or such an attractive one. They’d actually expected a crude lout—not this elegant and courtly gentleman. Mrs. Cartwright, too, was different than they had imagined. They’d had a mental picture of a large woman with coarse features dressed in clothing that would have been fashionable a decade earlier. Instead, they saw a delicate little woman who appeared somewhat spinsterish behind her spectacles but whose clothing was à la page.

After the initial introductions had been made, Mr. Gordon’s older sister, Mrs. Logan, said coquettishly, “It’s easy to see where your daughter gets her looks, Mr. Cartwright.”

“Thank you,” he replied, allowing his lips to quirk up in a slight smile, as he glanced over at his wife to gauge her response to the older woman’s barely concealed flirtation. Bronwen, able to assess the situation for what it was, gave him a bright smile in return.

Mrs. Logan then added in a condescending tone, “Is this your first visit to the United States, Mrs. Cartwright?”

Bronwen smiled slightly and replied, “This is my first visit to Delaware, but I’ve visited Boston four times now and Nevada ¼” She paused and Adam inserted smoothly, “Six times.”

“Thank you, cariad,” she replied with a smile. “My husband and Miranda are the mathematicians in the family. But I digress. I’ve been fortunate enough to see several of your states on the trip from Nevada to New England. Your country has such a variety of landscapes and climates that it is always a fascinating journey. I confess I grow a bit weary of the weeks onboard ship when there is nothing to see but water in every direction.”

Since neither Mrs. Logan nor Mrs. McKean had ever left Wilmington, they had nothing to add. Mrs. Gordon said, “I’ve been lucky enough to visit London and Paris. Travel can be so broadening.”

“Paris and London are both beautiful cities,” Adam agreed. “I think I preferred Rome because of the ruins. Of course the Acropolis and the pyramids are magnificent. I marvel that ancient man was able to create and build such amazing and awe-inspiring monuments.”

“I didn’t realize you were a world traveler, Mr. Cartwright,” Mrs. Gordon said, sounding miffed that she had been upstaged by these highly unorthodox people.

“I traveled in Europe, Egypt and the Holy Land. I was planning on visiting the Orient after my visit to the continent of Australia. However, I met my wife and decided to settle in Queensland.”

“For which I am profoundly grateful,” William said, smiling adoringly at Miranda. “Just as I’m grateful you allowed Miranda to attend the Girls’ Latin School and Radcliffe. I can’t imagine my life without her.”

“I wish you weren’t having the wedding in Nevada. That is simply too far for me and my husband to travel,” Mrs. McKean said with a sniff.

“Having the wedding at the Ponderosa was the only way my father could attend,” Adam said quietly, “so I’m grateful to Miranda and William.”

“Oh, I d-didn’t realize,” Mrs. McKean stuttered, surprised that anyone with grandchildren would have a parent still living.

“It’s too bad that you can’t come, Aunt Sophie,” William said. “The ranch house is magnificent.” He turned to Adam and said with obvious sincerity, “I’m surprised you didn’t pursue a career in architecture, sir. Especially since Miranda tells me the house you designed for your family in Queensland is as lovely as the house on the Ponderosa.”

“Thank you,” Adam replied with a little smile. “I enjoy both architecture and engineering, but it was easier then to pursue a career as an engineer. And I’ve been lucky enough to have some opportunities to use my skills as an architect.”

Mrs. Logan turned to William and Miranda. “Since the wedding is only two weeks away, are you two getting nervous?”

“A bit,” Miranda confessed.

“I don’t think I am,” William said. “We still have to buy a few pieces of furniture, but basically our home is all ready for us and I’m eager to come home every night to find my beautiful wife waiting for me.” He brought Miranda’s hand to his lips and dropped a kiss on the palm. Both of his aunts and his mother were shocked at the young man’s display of affection for his intended, though a bit of envy was evident as they noted the adoration in William’s eyes.

“I suppose I’m a bit nervous because married life will be so different from being a student,” Miranda commented.

“It certainly will be,” Mrs. Gordon said with a sneer. “I cannot see the point in young women attending college. College won’t teach them how to be good wives.”

“We don’t attend college so we’ll learn how to be good wives any more than young men attend to learn how to be good husbands, and why should we?” Miranda said, her eyes alight with righteous indignation. “A woman’s life shouldn’t revolve around her husband and children. She is a person in her own right with her own dreams, her own needs.”

William’s aunts and mother look scandalized while Bronwen, highly disturbed at her daughter’s less than respectful tone, said firmly, “When your children are very young, your life must revolve around them because they need you so much. When they grow older and can do things for themselves, then you can attend to your own needs.” Miranda nodded slowly, her head bowed as she felt her mother’s flashing violet eyes upon her. Seeing that her words had the invoked the intended response in her daughter, Bronwen continued in a tone of mild rebuke. “When you truly love someone, I think you put his needs first.”

Mrs. Gordon said sanctimoniously, “It is a wife’s duty to obey her husband.” The effect was spoiled by William’s hastily suppressed snort of laughter, and his aunts had to hide their smiles at the thought of their haughty sister-in-law as an obedient wife.

“You’re right, of course, Mama; I will put William’s needs first,” Miranda said quietly, a faint blush on her cheeks.

“Just as I will put yours first,” William said earnestly, earning an approving smile from his future father-in-law. “After all, St. Paul also says husbands are to love their wives as their own bodies,” and he reached for Miranda’s hand and gave it a squeeze.

Just then the maid announced the arrival of the wife of Mr. Gordon’s younger brother, and her married daughter, who was two years older than Miranda. Mrs. Florence Gordon’s eyes traveled appreciatively over Adam and she smiled flirtatiously when she offered her hand, causing Bronwen to wink mischievously at her husband.

“So will any other members of your family be attending the wedding?” Mrs. Stedman inquired politely after she and her mother had seated themselves.

“Yes, both my sisters and my brother are traveling to the Ponderosa right now along with my niece and nephew,” Miranda replied.

“And my parents,” Bronwen added.

“My goodness, your side of the family will certainly be well represented,” Mrs. Florence Gordon said.

“My husband and I will be attending the wedding,” Mrs. Logan interjected with a smile. “He is eager to renew his acquaintance with your father, Mr. Cartwright.”

“I’m sure my father will be most happy to see him again,” Adam said, returning her smile.

“You mentioned your niece and nephew,” Mrs. Stedman said. “How old are they?”

“Elen is three and a half and Huw just turned a year old,” Miranda replied. “Your Alice comes right between them, doesn’t she?”

For the next few minutes the conversation centered on babies and Adam allowed his concentration to wander and was caught off guard when he felt Bronwen’s hand on his sleeve.

“I’m sorry,” he said quickly.

“That’s all right,” Mrs. McKean said with a coquettish smile. “I’m sure all this talk of babies can’t be very interesting to you and William. I was just asking if it were true that you were a cowboy at one time.”

“Yes, it’s true,” he replied.

“That must have been an exciting life,” she said enthusiastically.

“Sometimes,” he answered with his little half smile. “There’s nothing exciting about rounding up strays or branding calves, but a cattle drive can have its exciting moments. The cattle might stampede, and I’ve known cases where drovers were trampled to death. Or rustlers may follow along just looking for an opportunity to steal some of your cattle, and that may involve gunplay.”

“Did you carry a gun?” Mrs. Stedman asked excitedly.

“Yes,” he replied. “I have had to draw on men,” he added, seeing the speculation on her face, “but only as a last resort.” He did not elaborate on the number of times he had had to kill or be killed. “Mostly I’ve shot rattlesnakes. We have even more venomous snakes in the outback, so I wear a gun every day when I ride to our mine and back home.”

“We have two dogs that are excellent at killing snakes and other vermin,” Bronwen added.

“Two?” Miranda said. “Oh yes, I forgot about Lady’s pup.”

“I can’t imagine a dog killing a snake,” Mrs. Logan said with a shudder.

“These terriers are bred with a thick rough coat and an even thicker ruff around their neck to protect them, and they are very quick,” Adam stated. “They’re not invulnerable though; our first dog died as a result of snakebite, but she killed the snake.”

“Poor Belle,” Miranda said softly and William gave her hand a comforting squeeze.

“Did you ever have to fight any Indians?” Mrs. Stedman asked curiously.

“Yes,” Adam replied. “I was nearly killed in an Indian attack, but it never would have happened if it hadn’t been for the cruelty and barbarity of some soldiers. You see, under the guise of signing a peace treaty with the Indians, they poisoned Apache men, women and children. Naturally the relatives of those slain wanted revenge and they pursued the soldiers from Arizona to Nevada. One of the soldiers managed to escape them and entered our camp. My father and brothers and I were returning from a cattle drive and we just happened to be setting up camp where the Apaches had been chasing the soldiers. I made what in retrospect I realize was a stupid decision and tried to leave our camp to fill our canteens and was shot by the Apaches. My youngest brother risked his own life to save me. Eventually everything was sorted out: the soldier was turned over to the army to be court-martialed, Cochise led his warriors back home, and the army surgeon was able to remove the bullet and save my life.”

“I find it hard to believe a soldier in the United States Army would poison women and children,” Mrs. Gordon said stiffly.

“The man admitted it freely. My brothers said he seemed proud of his action and felt he should be commended,” Adam replied in a soft but authoritative tone. “I was in shock and not really aware of what was happening but I know my brothers wouldn’t lie and I know the soldier was court-martialed.”

There was silence for a few moments and then Mrs. Logan said quietly, “My sister-in-law said that you were going to visit Hanover before traveling here.”

“Yes,” Bronwen said with a smile. “We were all happy to have a chance to see where Miranda and William will be living.”

“Your grandson and granddaughter are your oldest daughter’s children, correct?” Mrs. Florence Gordon asked, and Bronwen nodded. “Is your third daughter married? Or your son?”

“I suspect we will be planning Gwyneth’s marriage in the near future,” Bronwen replied, “but our son is only ten, so he won’t be getting married for a few years yet,” she added with a smile.

“You’ve been living in this country for a number of years,” Mrs. Stedman remarked to Miranda, “so your brother must have been quite young when you left.”

“Yes, he was only three when I left to attend the Girls Latin School but I saw him three years later when I traveled home for my older sister’s wedding. Then I saw him four years ago when I graduated, and I wrote to him regularly. When he was old enough, then he wrote to me.” She sighed. “But it wasn’t the same thing as being there when he was growing up. He is so tall now that he’s actually a quarter inch taller than Mama and I are.”

“At age ten?” Mrs. Gordon said disbelievingly.

“He is a very tall ten-year-old,” William agreed. “He looks more like twelve.”

“He takes after his father,” Bronwen said proudly and William added, “So does Gwyneth; she’s about a half-inch taller than I am. A very striking young woman.”

“Beth is the real beauty of the family,” Miranda added. She added teasingly to William, “She is lovelier than I am, admit it.”

“In my eyes, you are the most beautiful creature in the universe,” William said gallantly while Miranda rolled her eyes.

“All our daughters are lovely,” Adam inserted, “and talented, just like their mother.” Bronwen blushed prettily at this comment, and Mrs. Gordon again felt a pang of envy at the obvious adoration that was in evidence each time Miranda’s parents looked at or spoke to one another. It had been a very long time since her own husband had voiced such compliments about her. She sighed and looked down at her hands as the visitors continued to chat about the upcoming nuptials.

More of William’s aunts and cousins continued to visit throughout the morning, and were all expected back that evening to enjoy a family gathering in the engaged couple’s honor. The three Cartwrights, William and his mother all had lunch together but then William took his future in-laws sightseeing, while his mother begged off with needing to pack for the trip west. They saw the Holy Trinity Church, which had been built in 1689 by a group of Swedish Lutherans, and then went to Market Street where Bronwen and Miranda shopped at the Five Cent Store. Adam was interested in the Equitable Building, which had been constructed eight years earlier and was an excellent example of the Richardsonian Romanesque style he’d read about.

Dinner that evening was an interesting experience as Bronwen later commented to Adam while they snuggled in the large high post bed. She’d worn her other new evening gown of deep emerald satin with a v-shaped décolletage, and once again left her spectacles behind. Mr. Gordon was less obvious in his attentions to her, but they still drew raised eyebrows among his family. However, Mrs. Gordon’s air of superiority and condescension had not made her popular among her in-laws and the older women enjoyed her discomfiture. William’s cousins, on the other hand, were frankly shocked at the behavior of their normally staid elders.

Adam, Bronwen, Miranda and William all left for the Ponderosa the next morning; the Gordons and the Logans were traveling together two days later, planning to arrive the afternoon before the wedding and leave the day after. Adam and Bronwen were pleased with the opportunity to get to know William better, and the more they saw the two young people together, the more confident they were that he would be a good husband to Miranda.

{ { { {

Bronc drove the surrey and Jacob drove the buckboard to meet the Cartwrights and the Davies when their train arrived in Carson City. “I’m shore lookin’ forward to seein’ Miss Sarah,” Bronc commented to Jacob. “And of course, Benj,” he added.

“She and A.C. will keep everyone on their toes and no mistake,” Jacob agreed in his rich baritone. “Not to mention little Miss Elen and Huw.” He smiled at the older man then saying, “I ain’t never seen Mr. Ben so happy. Just think, all his grandchildren and great-grandchildren will be here together at the ranch.”

“No one deserves it more neither,” Bronc said. He shook his head a bit and added, “You never got a chance to see Mr. Ben and his three sons but I tell you, Jacob, I never saw a family as close as they were. The boys were so different, but they loved each other the ways brothers should. It was hard on the whole family when they learned Adam had made up his mind first to go travelin’ to foreign parts and then to settle in a foreign land; first time he brought his family for a visit when Miss Beth and Miss Miranda were just babies, they all hoped he’d decide to stay. Broke Mr. Ben’s heart when he made it clear he was returnin’ to Queensland and takin’ those darlin’ little girls with him.”

“Why’d he go? He had to have known he was hurtin’ his family,” Jacob said.

“In some ways Adam’s the most like his pa and he wanted to build his own dream,” Bronc answered slowly. “Mr. Ben understood that and I don’t think he ever let Adam know just how much it hurt to let him go off on his own.”

“I guess now that Miss Miranda is going to be living here in the States, Mr. Adam’s beginning to find out what it’s like,” Jacob said and Bronc nodded.

“I expect you’re right. But like I said, he takes after his pa, and he’ll never let her know how much it hurts him neither.”

Both men’s jaws dropped when they saw Joe help Annabelle alight from the train, and then they exchanged puzzled looks. Sarah spotted them immediately and ran toward them calling, “Hello, Bronc! Hello, Jacob!”

“Hello, Miss Sarah,” both men said. They looked for the rest of the party, but saw only Benj and his mother with Joe. “Where are your cousins?” Bronc asked, trying not to sound worried.

“Oh, they’ll be here in a couple of days,” Sarah answered and the others approached then.

“Hello, Bronc, Jacob,” Annabelle said coolly.

“Ma’am,” they both replied, tipping their Stetsons.

“I expect you’re wondering where everyone else is,” Joe said with a grin. “They all went to Hanover to see where Miranda and William will live; they should be here in a couple of days. Adam and Bronwen and the bride and groom will arrive as scheduled.”

“We’ll take care of your luggage,” Bronc said. “The surrey’s right over there.”

“Thanks,” Joe said with a bigger grin. “See you back at the ranch.” He offered Annabelle his arm and the four of them walked toward the surrey.

“If that don’t beat all,” Bronc said.

“I hope she’s home for good,” Jacob said softly. “I think it’ll kill Joe if she leaves him again.”

Ben was able to hide his surprise much better than Bronc and Jacob had and made his daughter-in-law welcome. Like Jacob, however, he hoped she was back to stay. He could see that was what Joseph was hoping for as well.

Joe was happier than he’d been in years. That first night in Boston after he’d brought the children back to the row house, Annabelle had been warm and friendly and the old passion had reignited. He hadn’t let Adam or the others know that he’d spent the night in Annabelle’s bed and he’d slipped away before the children woke up. They’d been together every night in Boston and it had been easier than he’d imagined to persuade her to come back home with him. He smiled as he remembered how worried Sarah had been about her Billy Boy until Kathleen had promised that she’d look after him. Somehow he didn’t think the little bird would survive the journey from Boston, but they’d find him a new owner and Sarah would have her beloved pony, Applesauce, to take her mind off the little parakeet. Benj really liked his preparatory school, but he’d been happy before attending school in Carson City and had friends there, so Joe was sure he’d readjust. It would just be so wonderful to have them all together as a family, and it would mean so much to Pa as well.

The others arrived a few days later and everything was wonderful. Benj remained aloof but Joe told himself it was just that he was older than Sarah and A.C. but much younger than his older cousins. He offered to take the boys fishing and they both eagerly accepted. Gwyneth asked if she could come as well.

“Do you bait your own hook nowadays?” Joe asked teasingly and grinned as she shook her head.

“Douglas always does it for her,” A.C. said, surprised when his sister turned red. “I’ll do it for you, sis,” he offered magnanimously.

As they sat quietly at the fishing hole, A.C. said sadly, “I wish Mama and Dad would hurry up and get here.”

“Missing them?” Joe asked, giving his nephew’s neck a friendly squeeze.

“A bit,” A.C. admitted cautiously. “They always come in and kiss me goodnight. Course, I’m too old to miss that,” he added quickly and looked at the others pugnaciously as if daring them to contradict him.

“Oh, when I was your age I still liked your grandpa to come tuck me in,” Joe said casually and saw his nephew’s features relax.

“Me and Dafydd are gonna teach Huw to fish when he’s bigger,” A.C. then said and his sister arched one eyebrow and said sarcastically, “I hope you’re going to teach him to be quiet.”

She looked and sounded so much like Adam that Joe blinked while A.C. stuck out his tongue. He took the hint, however. They returned to the ranch house with a nice string of trout and Buckshot made them clean the fish before he fried them for dinner.

A couple of days later when they were all gathered around the table eating breakfast, Joe asked A.C. if he wanted to come with him to meet his parents, Miranda and William at the depot.

“Too right!” A.C. exclaimed and Joe said, “I’ll take that as a yes,” and grinned at his nephew.

“Me go!” Huw announced, though everyone suspected he had responded in an effort to copy his uncle’s response.

“No, sweetie, you’re staying with Mama,” Beth said with a smile.

“No, me go Me-ma, Pa-pa,” Huw repeated more forcefully and everyone was surprised that Huw had deduced that it was his grandparents that Joe had been referring to.

“No, Huw,” Beth said more firmly. “You can see Me-ma and Pa-pa when they get here.”

“Me go!” the little boy repeated, sticking out his lip in a pout.

“I see there’s more Cartwright in you than I realized,” Joe said with a giggle while the women frowned at him.

“Please don’t encourage him, Uncle Joe,” Beth said.

“I’m sorry,” Joe said contritely, but couldn’t hold back a chuckle at the stubborn look on his grandnephew’s normally cheerful face. Ben’s eyes were alight with the memory of Hoss as a baby, declaring his intentions in a similar way when his big brother was about to do something that he wanted to do, too.

No more was said about it and Beth assumed her baby had forgotten his declaration, but as soon as she lifted him out of his highchair to the floor he ran toward the front door shouting, “Me go Me-ma, Pa-pa!”

“Huw Adda Jones! You come back here this instant!” Beth called running after him while Elen gleefully announced, “Huw’s bad!”

“Aw, Beth, why don’t you let him come?” Joe called, earning a glare from his wife. Beth returned carrying a sobbing Huw, who’d had his little behind spanked for his disobedience.

“Why can’t he come, sis?” A.C. asked. “I’d watch him and I bet Mama and Dad would be glad to see him.”

Beth wanted to be firm but seeing her uncle, brother and son’s eyes all looking at her beseechingly, she caved in. “Huw bach, you mustn’t ever talk back to Mama or she has to have a necessary talk with you. But, since your Uncle Joe and your Uncle A.C. have both asked, you may go with them to meet Me-ma and Pa-pa.” Huw grinned through his tears and she put him on his feet. He ran over and grabbed Joe’s hand and began tugging.

“Go Me-ma, Pa-pa, Unca Joe” he declared.

“Whoa, little buddy,” Joe said, tousling the child’s thick mop of hair. “Uncle A.C. and I have to go hitch up the team first.”

“C’mon, Huw bach,” Beth said, taking his hand, “you and I will sit on the porch and wait.”

The first thing Adam and Bronwen heard as they stepped off the train onto the platform was Huw’s high-pitched voice shrieking, “Me-ma! Pa-pa!” Adam could see his younger brother struggling to keep hold of a wriggling Huw so, taking Bronwen’s arm, he guided her toward their grandson as quickly as he could. He plucked Huw out of Joe’s arms and tossed him overhead. “Did you miss Me-ma and Pa-pa?” he asked the giggling toddler while A.C. hugged his mama and Joe stood by beaming. William and Miranda caught up then, a bit breathless.

“Jacob drove the buckboard,” Joe said. “We’ll load the trunks—except yours, William—and then I’ll go back to the ranch with Jacob, and Adam can take everyone else in the surrey. We’re planning on you eating dinner with us, William, but I guess you’ll want to register at the hotel first.”

“Yes, and I’ll need to have my trunk delivered there.”

“Jacob and I might as well deliver your trunk to the hotel,” Joe said with a grin, “since it’s on our way.”

“Thanks, Uncle Joe,” William said with a matching grin.

“I’ll come with you to the hotel,” Miranda declared and Adam said, “I think the rest of us will just wait for you two at the surrey.” As they walked along Bronwen asked A.C., “What have you been doing while we’ve been away?”

“One day Uncle Joe took me and Benj and Gwyneth fishing,” A.C. said with a grin. “Gwyneth caught the most trout,” he said in disgust but then added with a grin, “That made Benj mad. He doesn’t think girls should be better than boys at fishing and riding, but Gwyneth’s better than he is at both.”

“A.C.,” Adam said warningly.

“But she is, Dad! Uncle Joe says she rides better than any other woman he’s ever seen. Benj isn’t bad; he just isn’t as good as Gwyneth. Or me,” he added, trying to look modest, but not succeeding very well.

“I’m sure there are things Benj can do better than you,” Bronwen said and A.C. nodded reluctantly.

“Yesterday, Uncle Joe let me and Benj come with him when he hunted for strays,” he added proudly. “He said we did a good job, too. Said I had the makings of a real cowboy.”

“Oh, he did, did he?” Adam replied and Bronwen was just a little uneasy at the sharpness of his tone but A.C. seemed oblivious.

“Did you have a good time with William’s parents? Is his mother really a dragon?”

Adam scowled and started to snap at A.C., but bit his words off. It was Miranda’s fault; she shouldn’t have referred to her future mother-in-law that way. Having met Mrs. Gordon, he could understand her feeling that way, but it was still highly disrespectful. Bronwen was thinking the same thing and spoke up.

“A.C., it was very wrong of your sister to have written that about Mrs. Gordon. You mustn’t repeat it, especially not to William.” A.C. shrugged but she wasn’t sure she’d made him understand. “Think how you would feel if you heard someone call me a dragon.”

He frowned at that. “I wouldn’t like it.”

“And William won’t either. He would be justifiably angry if he knew Miranda had done so.”

“Right,” A.C. stated. Then he asked curiously, “What did you do while you were in Wilmington?”

“Nothing you would have enjoyed,” Adam answered, trying to rescue his hat from Huw. Rather than a Stetson, he’d started wearing a Dunkerley Slouch hat and Huw loved to play with it; unfortunately, the hat was getting pretty battered from his attentions. Just then Miranda and William approached. “Here, mate, you go with Me-ma and I’ll drive us home.” Bronwen smiled as she held out her arms and Huw allowed himself to be transferred without complaint.

Most of the conversation on the ride home centered around the wedding, which was only three days away. A.C. was growing bored with the talk of flowers and dresses, but his interest increased when they began to discuss the wedding cake.

“Could you and Beth make a tiered sponge cake with marzipan and white icing?” Miranda asked. “Mrs. Alden and Charlotte told me that’s the type of cake they’ve seen at all the weddings they’ve attended recently.”

“A tiered cake?” Bronwen repeated. “I suppose we could. How many tiers would you like?”

“Three,” Miranda said hesitantly.

“I suppose we can manage that,” Bronwen said with a smile. “We’ve never done one, but Beth and I like a challenge and I imagine Gwyneth will want to help.”

“How come you’re not having fruitcake like Beth did?” A.C. asked. “I like fruitcake better than sponge cake.”

“But I like sponge cake best,” Miranda replied with a smile.

“Besides, fruitcake has to age. We would have needed to make it at home and bring it with us,” his mother replied and A.C. began giggling at the idea of them traveling with Miranda’s wedding cake packed in a trunk.

As soon as Adam pulled the surrey into the yard, Bronwen turned around and said quietly, “After you say hello to Grandpa, would you take a little walk with me, Miranda?”

“All right,” Miranda said, her tone expressing her puzzlement.

As they walked toward the little bower not far from the house, Bronwen said with a quiet intensity, “I wanted an opportunity to talk with you in private about your mother-in-law.”

“Must we?” Miranda remarked flippantly.

“Yes, we must,” Bronwen replied very earnestly. “I know she is a difficult woman, but she is William’s mother and you must treat her with respect. Thanks to the way you wrote of her, A.C. just referred to her as ‘the dragon’, and it’s only sheer luck he didn’t do so in William’s hearing,” she added seeing the frisson of alarm in her daughter’s eyes. “Even if William is not close to his mother, it would not please him to hear her referred to in that fashion.”

“You’re right, Mama,” Miranda replied with downcast eyes and burning cheeks.

“Perhaps you and Mrs. Gordon will never like each other, but you can treat each other with respect for William’s sake.”

Miranda nodded and then said with just a slight grin, “It should be easier since we won’t live in the same state,” and her mother shook her head at such levity. With a sigh, Miranda added, “I know it’s a serious matter, Mama, and I will do my best to always treat Mrs. Gordon with respect.”

The next three days literally seemed to fly by. The men just tried to stay away from the house while the women cleaned, and Adam was put in charge of keeping Elen and Huw occupied. Even Buckshot kept out of the way. He was furious at being banned from his own kitchen while Bronwen, Beth and Gwyneth baked and then iced the tiered cake. The evening before the wedding, the immaculate house gleamed from the application of beeswax and the beautiful cake, painstakingly decorated by Beth with sugar roses, was carefully stored in the pantry. Gwyneth had taken her father’s old guitar and gone off to practice her solo while Bronwen, Annabelle and Beth had carefully pressed everyone’s wedding finery. Buckshot prepared beef stew for the evening meal, and they decided to eat on the porch.

William was eating with his newly arrived family in town, and although she missed him, Miranda was glad of the opportunity to be alone with her own family. This is the final supper I will eat as a Cartwright, she thought. By this time tomorrow, I will be Mrs. William Gordon. I haven’t had much experience at keeping house these past seven years. I hope I’ll be successful. William has hired a Mrs. Matthews to cook and a Nancy to be a maid of all work. I would have preferred to hire my own servants, but I know William is correct and we couldn’t wait and hire them after we’d set up house, especially since all the other faculty wives will be paying calls on me. I wish I were more like Beth. She never had to worry about her domestic skills; that always seemed to come naturally to her just as mathematics did to me.

Ben was watching Miranda as he ate. He didn’t have any favorites among his grandchildren, but his feelings about Miranda were special. She was the only one of his granddaughters to bear a marked resemblance to one of his lost loves. Looking at her was like having Liz back with him. After her wedding, it wouldn’t be the same, and yet, he wanted her to be happy with her William, as happy as he and Liz had been. God willing, she and William would have all those happy years together that he and Liz had been denied.

Adam, too, was thinking how his relationship with his daughter would be forever changed the next day. She would no longer be his little girl to love and cherish. He stole a glance at his father-in-law, engaged in lively conversation with his wife. I suppose it was the same for you, Tad. You and Bronwen had always been close, and then I came along and suddenly you were no longer the most important man in her life. But I know you were happy for us just as I’m happy for Miranda and William. He looked at his son, who was laughing with his young cousin, and then at back at his wife. I have a feeling, sweetheart, that you are going to find it just as difficult when A.C. falls in love.

As soon as Beth could see Elen and Huw were finished with their stew, she stood up and said, “C’mon, you two, it’s time for you to have a bath and then Mama will tuck you in.” She lifted Huw out of his highchair but Elen pouted and said, “No, I don’t wanna bath.”

“Elen,” Beth said warningly, and although still pouting, Elen jumped off her chair and took her mama’s hand, knowing that that same hand could warm her little bottom if she didn’t do as she was told.

“I want you to take a bath tonight as well, A.C.,” Bronwen added. “In fact, why don’t all the men bathe tonight and we can have our baths tomorrow morning?” Everyone agreed to that plan although A.C. grumbled about the idea of taking a bath any night other than Saturday.

“If I take one tonight, then I’m not takin’ one tomorrow night,” he announced.

“Fair enough,” Bronwen said. “I want you to wash your hair tonight; it should dry before you need to go to bed.” All the women had washed their hair earlier in the afternoon so it would be dry by that night.

After putting her children to bed, Beth came and sat on the porch with the others. Bronwen noticed her smile as she placed her hands protectively over her abdomen. “The baby?” she asked quietly and Beth nodded, a dreamy smile on her face.

“It’s the first time I’ve felt him or her move,” she said softly. “I’m glad your wedding is tomorrow, Miranda, because I’m anxious to get home to Dafydd.” The others all smiled at this.  "So is Elen.  Every night she asks when she'll see Tada again."  Beth's face clouded then as she added, "I'm afraid Huw has forgotten his tada."

"I don't think so," Dr. Davies said.  "But, even if he has, they’ll soon reestablish their bond. Don’t worry Beth fach."

‘You’re right, Tad-cu,” Beth said with a smile. She turned to her sister and said with a smile, “I am looking forward to meeting your in-laws. I hope they are enjoying Carson City.”

“Tell me again who Jacob is picking up tomorrow,” Joe said, “that is, besides William and his parents.”

“His aunt and uncle, Mr. and Mrs. Logan,” Miranda replied, “and his Best Man, Robert Lodge. Oh, and my friends Sylvia and Samantha.”

“You met Mr. Logan, Pa,” Adam said, “when we supplied lumber for that trestle.”

“Oh, yes,” Ben said, remembering how important that job had been to him—until his determination to get results at all costs resulted in the death of an old man. His guilt had caused him to veer from one extreme to another, but with some help from his old friend and rival, Barney Fuller, he’d been able to put things in perspective. “I look forward to seeing him again,” he added with a smile.

After A.C. took his bath and rejoined the group, Ben asked if they could sing. Adam got his guitar and they sang, in four part harmony, savoring the opportunity of all being together as an extended family, which they knew would never come again.

Early the next morning, Virginia McKaren arrived with roses from her garden that she’d made into a bouquet for Miranda.

“Thank you so much, Mrs. McKaren,” Miranda said, accepting the bouquet with a dimpled smile.

“Nonsense, I’m happy to help. I know you’ll be a beautiful bride,” Virginia replied. Just then Huw came toddling over, a big grin on his face.

“G’day” he said.

“Hello, sweetie,” Virginia replied, smiling at the little boy. “This must be your great-grandson,” she said to Ben, “because he surely has your eyes,” and Ben smiled.

“I Huw,” the little boy stated.

“Where’s your sister?” Virginia asked and Ben replied, “Elen is very shy.”

“I’ll have a chance to see her later,” Virginia said with an understanding nod. “Hello, Adam,” she said and then she exclaimed, “Don’t tell me this is A.C.!”

“That’s right,” Adam said proudly, putting his hand on A.C.’s shoulder.

“G’day, Mrs. McKaren,” A.C. said dimpling.

“I just can’t believe how much you’ve grown,” Virginia said, shaking her head. “Of course, it has been four years. Well, I can see you’re going to be a real heartbreaker, just like your dad.” A.C. looked puzzled and the others all smiled. Adam introduced Virginia to his in-laws and then she made her excuses, knowing the family would need to be getting dressed for the wedding.

While Bronwen and Mrs. Davies were bathing, Beth dressed Elen and Huw in their wedding finery and then asked her father and grandfathers to watch them.

“You look beautiful, precious,” Adam said as Elen pirouetted to show off her pretty salmon-pink silk frock. Beth had worked long hours on the dress with its yoke of tucked silk trimmed in cream muslin and delicate muslin ruffles at the wrists of the tight-fitting sleeves, not to mention the silk-covered buttons and tiny loops used to fasten it in the back. As a finishing touch, she had brushed her daughter’s thick golden-brown hair until it shone and then tied it back with a pink ribbon.

“And you look very fine, Huw,” Ben said. Beth had worked just as hard on Huw’s smocked frock of navy blue silk as she had on Elen’s dress, although at Dafydd’s request, she had refrained from adding lace or embroidery. She refused to cut Huw’s thick black hair until he was at least three, but the previous evening she had cut his bangs so they weren’t getting in his eyes.

A.C. and Benj came downstairs then, both looking very grownup in their black morning coats, black bow ties and white kid gloves. Bronwen, Sarah and Annabelle were next, and they watched the little ones so the men could get dressed. Soon everyone but the bride was dressed and Bronwen and Beth went upstairs to assist.

“You look lovely,” Beth said as she stepped back from pinning on her sister’s floor length veil. “This is such a beautiful veil.”

“It was Grandma’s,” Miranda replied with a sad smile. “Great-grandfather Stoddard arranged to have it sent to Grandpa after he died. When Grandpa knew William and I were going to be married here on the Ponderosa, he asked me if I’d like to wear Grandma’s wedding veil. I knew it would mean so much to him if I wore it.”

Beth smiled and nodded, for she understood why Grandpa had saved their grandmother’s wedding veil for Miranda’s wedding. “He’ll look at you in this veil and think of Grandma.”

“I promised him that I’d give it to my daughter for her wedding day. If I have a daughter,” she added, ever practical, causing Bronwen and Beth to grin.

Beth then asked, “Now, you’re wearing the blue silk garters I gave you?”

Miranda nodded. “That’s something old and something blue. Gwyneth bought me these silk stockings, so that’s something new, and Mam-gu gave me a silver sixpence for my shoe. All I need is something borrowed.”

“I have something borrowed,” Bronwen said softly. “Daddy gave me this locket,” and she handed the silver locket engraved with a spray of violets to her second born. “Open it up,” she added.

Miranda and Beth both felt their eyes fill with tears as they saw the lock of their little sister’s hair and her portrait smiling at them. “Oh Mama,” Miranda got out in a choked voice.

“Daddy and I wanted you to know Penny is with you, sharing your special day,” Bronwen said, her own voice unsteady as she fastened the locket around Miranda’s neck. “We also wanted to give you this.” She handed Miranda her father’s dog-eared copy of Shakespeare’s sonnets. “We pressed two blooms from Penny’s rosebush for you so you can always have something of her with you. The sonnets are yours as well since we know they are your favorites.”

With trembling fingers, Miranda opened the book and found the two dark crimson blooms marking her favorite sonnet, 116.

“Don’t cry, cariad, because Penny wouldn’t want that,” Bronwen said softly as she embraced her daughter, whose eyes were now overflowing with tears.

“No, she wouldn’t,” Miranda agreed with a shaky laugh, as she borrowed her mother’s proffered handkerchief and dabbed at her eyes.

“The guests will be arriving so I need to go downstairs,” Bronwen said. “I’ll go ahead and send your daddy up.”

She met Adam on the stairs and thought how handsome he looked in his new tailcoat and crisply starched dress shirt. He stopped on the stairs so he could actually look her in the eye and then, putting his finger under her chin and tilting her face up, he dropped a quick kiss on her lips.

“You look pretty enough to be the bride,” he said softly, and indeed her simple gown of pale azure taffeta suited her very well.

She smiled back and said, “Miranda and Beth are waiting for you. Who is watching Elen and Huw?”

“Tad and Mam, with some help from Pa,” he replied with a grin. “I’m sure they won’t mind a reinforcement. Jacob hasn’t returned yet, but the McKarens are here as is Paul.”

Everyone was happily conversing and enjoying Elen and Huw when the surrey pulled into the yard. Joe and Ben went out followed by A.C. and Benj.

“Welcome to the Ponderosa,” Ben said, leaning on Joe’s arm, for he refused to use his cane today. “I’m Ben Cartwright.”

The men helped the women alight. Ben saw a rather stout woman with a sour expression and guessed this was William’s mother. The two young women must be Sylvia and Samantha and the other older woman was probably William’s aunt.

As soon as everyone was in the yard, William said, “Mother and Father, I’d like you to meet Miranda’s grandfather.”

“I’m pleased to make your acquaintance, Mr. Cartwright,” the sour-faced woman stated stiffly while the stout gentleman, who had William’s large blue eyes and aquiline nose, smiled warmly as he extended his hand and said, “Yes, indeed. It’s an honor, sir, to meet one of this country’s pioneers.”

“I’d also like to present Miranda’s uncle, Joseph Cartwright, and his son, Benj. And last, but certainly not least, her brother, A.C.,” William said with a broad smile. They all shook hands and Mr. Gordon said genially, “Well, A.C., your sister told us you were tall for your age and I can see she certainly didn’t exaggerate.”

“Thank you, sir,” A.C. replied dimpling, which made all the women (except Mrs. Gordon) exchange smiles.

The rest of the introductions were made quickly and they moved inside where William introduced everyone else. Then they all took their seats while William and Robert stood in front of Reverend Newton and Gwyneth began to play Jesu, Joy of Man’s Desiring on Adam’s guitar.

As soon as she heard the music, Beth kissed her sister’s cheek and carefully arranged her veil. “I’ll see you both in a few minutes,” she said with a smile before descending the stairs.

“I’m sure you and William will be very happy, Angel,” Adam said earnestly, “but always remember you have family here and in Queensland that loves you. Don’t be too proud to ask us for help if you ever need it.”

“I won’t, Daddy,” she said softly, then added, “I’m ready,” so he offered her his arm and led her carefully down the stairs to stand beside William.

Gwyneth’s incredible voice began to fill the room with Bach’s haunting melody and then Adam stood by his second born listening to the words the minister was intoning:

“Dearly beloved, we are gathered together here in the sight of God, and in the face of this congregation, to join together this Man and this Woman in holy Matrimony; which is an honorable estate, instituted of God in the time of man's innocency, signifying unto us the mystical union that is betwixt Christ and his Church ¼”

He saw the joy on William’s face as he looked at Miranda; her expression was hidden behind her veil but he felt her trembling slightly as she gazed at her beloved.

“¼ and therefore is not by any to be enterprised, nor taken in hand, unadvisedly, lightly, or wantonly, to satisfy men's carnal lusts and appetites, like brute beasts that have no understanding; but reverently, discreetly, advisedly, soberly, and in the fear of God; duly considering the causes for which Matrimony was ordained. ¼”

He remembered the pride he’d felt when five-year-old Miranda with her big hazel eyes and black curls would sit on his lap and count to 100. He could see her joy when she learned first how to add and subtract and then to multiply and divide. He remembered her delight when she was able to prove a theorem, and when she learned how to solve quadratic equations.

He looked at Beth, standing at her sister’s side, her face radiant with the joy she felt at her sister’s happiness. He smiled a little as he remembered some of the arguments between his two oldest girls. Beth had no use for lessons and couldn’t understand how anyone could actually enjoy them, and Miranda couldn’t believe that her sister really hated something she loved so much. It had always reminded him of when he and Hoss were growing up.

He came back to the present when he heard Reverend Newton address William.

“William, wilt thou have this woman to thy wedded wife, to live together after God's ordinance in the holy estate of Matrimony? Wilt thou love her, comfort her, honor, and keep her in sickness and in health; and, forsaking all other, keep thee only unto her, so long as ye both shall live?”

William’s voice was low but sure as he answered, “I will.”

Then Reverend Newton turned to Miranda.

“Miranda, wilt thou have this man to thy wedded husband, to live together after God's ordinance in the holy estate of Matrimony? Wilt thou love, honor, and keep him in sickness and in health; and, forsaking all other, keep thee only unto him, so long as ye both shall live?”

Adam smiled inwardly at the absence of the vow to obey as Miranda replied firmly, “I will.”

Then Reverend Newton looked at him and said, “Who giveth this woman to be married to this man?

Adam said resolutely, “I do.”

He took his seat by Bronwen, enfolding her small, delicate hand in his, and thought I really gave you away seven years ago, Angel, when your mama and I decided to let you attend the Girls Latin School in Boston. I have missed you so much, missed seeing you grow from a girl to a young woman, and now I will miss seeing you as a wife and mother. Still, I can’t truly regret our decision. In William, you have found your intellectual equal, a man who loves you and values your intelligence. You will be happier living with him in Hanover than you would be living with us in Cloncurry, and your happiness is more important than being able to see you as often as I’d like.

He glanced down at Bronwen and saw her face was wet with tears so he let go of her hand and put his arm around her shoulders comfortingly. He could feel tears on his own cheeks as he heard Miranda say:

“I, Miranda, take thee, William, to my wedded husband, to have and to hold from this day forward, for better for worse, for richer for poorer, in sickness and in health, to love, and to cherish, till death us do part, according to God's holy ordinance; and thereto I give thee my troth.”

Chapter 3

Reverend Newton said with a beaming smile, “William, you may kiss your bride,” and William took Miranda in his arms. When they broke apart, and faced their families and guests, Ben was almost overwhelmed by his emotions. Oh Elizabeth, my love, she is the image of you on our wedding day. I see the same joy and hope on her face and William’s that we felt. I pray that their love will not be cut tragically short as ours was.

His thoughts were interrupted by Gwyneth playing Greensleeves on Adam’s guitar, which was the signal for first the bridal couple, and then the wedding guests to move to the yard.

While the wedding had been taking place, Jacob had been directing some of the other hands as they strung Chinese lanterns for decorations and set up one table for the wedding cake and punch and another for the side dishes accompanying the beef. Meanwhile, Buckshot was supervising barbecuing the steer. When Miranda and William emerged from the ranch house, the hands set up a cheer and lined up for the honor of kissing the bride.

“Now, boys,” Ben said with a blinding smile, “grandfathers have the first claim. Right, Llywelyn?”

“Too right!” Dr. Davies stated emphatically as he unobtrusively guided Ben to the front of the line.

“Followed by fathers,” Adam added and was seconded by Mr. Gordon as they took their places behind the older men.

“Then brothers, uncles, and cousins” Joe interjected, putting his arms about A.C.’s and Benj’s shoulders as they moved next in line.

Mrs. Gordon stood off to one side and watched the ranch hands, dressed in clean shirts with their hair slicked down, take turns kissing her new daughter-in-law while her son stood by grinning and shaking their hands. “How barbaric,” she said with a sniff. Her in-laws were standing close by and Mr. Logan said coldly, “Amaryllis, you are without a doubt the biggest snob I’ve ever met.” He turned to his wife and, offering his arm said, “Let’s join the others, shall we?” They left Mrs. Gordon standing alone, looking down her nose at the other guests.

Ben was too good a host to see a guest being ignored so he walked slowly over to Mrs. Gordon. “I haven’t had a chance to tell you how happy we all are to have your son as a member of our family, Mrs. Gordon. He is a fine young man.”

“Of course we’re happy to have your granddaughter as a member of ours,” she replied stiffly, impressed in spite of herself by the elderly man’s courtesy. Just then Beth approached with Elen and Huw.

“Mrs. Gordon, allow me to present Miranda’s older sister, Elizabeth. You already met Elen and Huw before the ceremony,” Ben said.

Beth looked at Miranda’s mother-in-law and, seeing the cold, sour expression on her face, decided Miranda had been accurate in her description. However, she felt sorry for the older woman.

“I’m very pleased to meet you, Mrs. Gordon,” she said with a warm smile and even Mrs. Gordon was not immune to her beauty and found herself returning the smile. I could have understood it better if William had married this Cartwright daughter. What a pity the little girl didn’t inherit her mother’s looks. The little boy is appealing though.

“I’m hungry, Mama,” Elen whined and Beth said patiently, “It’s not time to eat yet, Elen. Would you like to look at one of your picture books?” Elen nodded so Beth said, “Would you excuse me, Mrs. Gordon?” and she left with her two little ones.

Annabelle strolled over then so Ben excused himself and went to greet the newest arrivals. “You are Miranda’s aunt?” Mrs. Gordon asked and Annabelle nodded.

“My family is from Boston; I understand yours is from Philadelphia?” she asked politely.

“Yes.” Mrs. Gordon paused for a moment and then asked in a disdainful tone, “You left Boston to come live here?”

“That’s correct,” Annabelle replied in a frosty tone. Fortunately, Sarah came running over then.

“Mama, are you going to try to catch Miranda’s bouquet?” she asked excitedly. Then she noticed Mrs. Gordon and added hastily, “Excuse me, Mrs. Gordon.”

“Only unmarried young ladies try and catch the bouquet,” Annabelle answered her daughter with a smile.

“Can—I mean may—I try?” Sarah begged.

“I suppose,” her mother replied. Then she turned to Mrs. Gordon. “If you’ll excuse me, Mrs. Gordon. Come, Sarah.”

Standing by herself, Mrs. Gordon saw with a frown that her husband was ignoring her to flirt with Mrs. Cartwright, so she forced herself to join the others.

“Ah, Mrs. Gordon,” Bronwen said with a smile, happy to find a polite way of ending her tête-à-tête with Miranda’s father-in-law. “Let me introduce you and Mr. Gordon to some of the new arrivals,” and she moved toward the Fuller family, exchanging a brief wink with Adam, who was chatting with Sylvia and Samantha.

Ben had been watching and when he saw all the guests had arrived, he signaled unobtrusively to Buckshot. A few minutes later, the cook emerged from the house with some buckets containing chilled bottles of champagne and trays of glasses.

The guests gathered round while the Cartwrights poured the champagne. When everyone had a glass, Adam raised his and said, “Friends, Bronwen and I want to welcome you all and thank you for coming to help us celebrate the wedding of our daughter, Miranda, and Dr. William Gordon.”

“I will never forget the day Miranda was born. Her mother had promised that she’d give me a birthday to remember, and she certainly did. Instead of attending a fancy dinner party, I spent my thirty-ninth birthday waiting anxiously for our second child to be born. You were the best birthday gift I ever received, Angel,” and he smiled lovingly at her. “Ever since Miranda was a tiny girl, she’s had a love of learning. Her grandparents,” and he nodded at Dr. and Mrs. Davies, “would buy picture books for her older sister, but it was Miranda who looked at the books until they were dog-eared.”

He shared a smile with Bronwen and then continued. “When she was sixteen, she asked her mother and me if she could attend the Girls Latin School in Boston, the city of my birth. It was a very difficult decision for us, knowing if we agreed that we wouldn’t see her again for two or three years. But we love her and want the best for her, so with a degree of trepidation, we said yes.”

“It was while she was living in Boston that she met the young man who would become her true-love. It was hard for me, reading in her letters about this young man who was courting her, afraid he might not be the sort of young man I would approve of, but then I reminded myself that Miranda has always been level-headed—a girl who would follow her head rather than her heart. From what I’ve seen these past few weeks, her head and her heart are in complete agreement that William is the man for her. Now that I’ve finally a chance to meet him, I have to say that she has made the right choice.”

He lifted his glass higher then, saying, “"So, ladies and gentlemen, family and friends, let us raise our glasses and join together in wishing Miranda and William every happiness, and may God bless them.”

After Adam’s toast, William held up his glass. “Mr. Cartwright, I give you my heartfelt thanks for the wondrous gift you’ve bestowed on me, my dearest love, Miranda. Friends, for I hope I may call you all that, I thank you for your good wishes.” He turned to gaze into Miranda’s eyes then saying, “Most of all, my dearest, I thank you for the gift of yourself. You are indeed my better half without which my life would be incomplete.”

He smiled then at Beth and Gwyneth. “And I mustn’t forget my new sisters. Not many men are as lucky as I am to gain two such lovely and talented sisters. Gwyneth, I didn’t believe Miranda when she told me you had the better voice, but dearest,” he said, smiling at his radiant bride, “I stand corrected. Gwyneth has the voice of an angel.” He turned to smile at Beth then. “My bride also told me that her sister, Beth, was more beautiful, but here I beg to differ. Lovely as you are, Beth, Miranda is the fairer.” Beth smiled warmly at her brother-in-law then.

“Ladies and gentlemen, will you join me in drinking a toast to Beth and Gwyneth.”

Everyone drank a toast to the bride’s sisters and then William’s best man, Robert Lodge, raised his glass. “Ladies and gentlemen, I first met William here when we were freshman at Harvard. When I opened the door to my room in the dormitory, I discovered this skinny, bespectacled fellow. I soon learned my new roommate had actually come to college to study. What a shock!” Most of the ranch hands laughed heartily at this. “I did my best to show him the error of his ways, but with no success.” The guests laughed while William shook his head. Robert continued with a grin. “Not that William spent all his time at Harvard with his nose in a book. No, he was a member of the Harvard crew and the baseball team.”

The guests looked puzzled at Robert’s mention of the Harvard crew, but smiled approvingly on learning William had played baseball in college.

“I was there when William and Miranda met for the first time, and it was clear to me right from the start that they had one thing in common: They were both bookworms. I wasn’t at all surprised to learn that they had decided to marry, and I’m sure they’ll be very happy together.”

“Now, I have some telegrams from family and friends who were unable to be here, and I’d like to share them.” He read telegrams from the Aldens, Rhys and Matilda, and from William’s other uncles and aunts. He concluded by lifting his glass high and saying, “Ladies and gentlemen, please join me in toasting the parents of the bride and groom.”

A final toast, unexpected but deeply felt, was offered by the patriarch of the Cartwright family. Ben rose slowly from his chair and a hush fell over the family and guests in deference to this much respected man. Clearing his throat as he had always done when faced with an emotional task, he supported himself on the table before him and spoke.

“I would like to offer not only my best wishes and congratulations to my dear granddaughter and her husband on their special day, but my heartfelt gratitude for choosing to hold their wedding ceremony here on the Ponderosa. It has meant the world to me to have all my family, including the Davies and now the Gordons, here to celebrate this most joyous occasion. Thank you both for making this a day I will always cherish. To the bride and groom.”

He raised his glass in a toast and as one voice, the audience echoed his sentiments, “To the bride and groom.” Adam felt his own throat tighten as he brought the glass to his lips, and a single tear escaped from the corner of his eye as he knew in his heart that this visit would be the last time he would see his father in this lifetime.

When the toasts were finished, Buckshot began carving the steer while some hands brought out the sliced bread and side dishes. Beth took Huw into the kitchen to feed, promising him he could have a piece of Auntie Miranda’s and Uncle William’s cake to quiet his fussing. Elen sat by her grandma wearing a big towel as a bib, delighted to be able to eat with the grownups. Beth knew her children needed a nap but they were much too excited and she didn’t want to spoil the day by causing a scene with her two youngsters, so she decided she would just send them to bed early after the festivities were over.

“There you are, Princess,” Adam said with a smile when she reappeared with Huw, “we didn’t want to start the dancing without you.” He nodded to the fiddler Ben had hired. The man began to play and Adam whirled Miranda around the yard in a two-step waltz.

“You are a beautiful bride, Angel,” he said as they danced gracefully. “William is a lucky man,” and she blushed, just like her mother had all those many years before when he had held her in his arms for the first time as husband and wife.

When their dance ended, William approached and Adam said with a bittersweet smile. “She’s yours now, William.” He stepped back to stand with Bronwen, putting his arm around her shoulders as they watched their daughter glide about the yard in the arms of her husband.

“They dance so beautifully together,” Beth said softly, happy for her sister. How I wish Dafydd was here; I yearn to be in his arms, to love him and be one with him.

Bronwen found herself dancing a waltz with Mr. Gordon, who kept trying to hold her too close. Adam was dancing with Mrs. Gordon but keeping an eye on Bronwen and Mr. Gordon; however, he could only direct baleful glares at Mr. Gordon. With a grin, Joe, who’d been watching from the sidelines, cut in on Mr. Gordon.

“Thank you,” Bronwen said with a smile. “I don’t think Adam could have stood much more.”

“I know,” Joe grinned. “I couldn’t let my niece’s wedding be spoiled by a brawl between her father and her brand-new father-in-law.” He chuckled adding, “You certainly have made a conquest,” and she rolled her eyes in a dead-on imitation of her husband.

By the time the cake had been cut, the bouquet tossed (and caught by Gwyneth), the bride and groom escaped to the little cabin, and the last guest departed, Huw was rubbing his eyes to keep them open. The rest of the family collapsed in the great room, the men and boys all loosening their ties.

“It was a lovely wedding,” Mrs. Davies said. “I know they’ll be very happy, especially since they live some distance from William’s parents. I quite like him, but his parents ¼” She carefully kept her thoughts to herself, but everyone silently echoed her unspoken opinion.

“How come William’s dad was always hanging around Mama?” A.C. asked.

“I think he likes Aunt Bronwen,” Sarah said and the adults all exchanged apprehensive glances.

“I’m sure it’s Mrs. Gordon that Mr. Gordon really likes,” Bronwen said with a faint smile.

“But you’re prettier and lots nicer than she is,” Sarah commented and Adam added under his breath, “Amen to that.”

“Thank you very much for the compliment, Sarah,” Bronwen said, smiling at her niece. “But it really doesn’t matter because I only like your Uncle Adam.” He leaned over and kissed her then while the others smiled.

Ben then said, “If you all will excuse me, I think I’ll retire.”

“Yes, that sounds like an excellent suggestion,” Dr. Davies said and Mrs. Davies nodded her agreement.

“C’mon, sweeties, you and Mama are going to bed,” Beth said, “just like Great-grandpa, Hendaid and Hennain,” and the little ones reluctantly allowed themselves to be led off to bed.

“I don’t have to go to bed yet, do I?” Benj asked his parents.

“No,” Joe said. “Your uncle and I are going on the shivaree; would you like to come?”

“What’s a shivaree?” Benj asked, his curiosity piqued.

“It’s when you go serenade the bride and groom,” Adam answered. “Do you think it’s a good idea, Joe?”

“Aw, he’s thirteen, Adam. I think he can handle it. Besides, his being with us will have everyone on their best behavior.”

“You have a point there,” Adam agreed.

“I wanna come, too, Dad,” A.C. begged.

“No,” Adam said firmly. Seeing his son was about to argue he added, “And I don’t want to hear anymore about it, is that understood?”

“Yes, sir,” A.C. said sullenly.

Sarah then asked, “May I come on the shivaree,” but Joe said, “Sorry, sugar, but a shivaree is only for men.” Seeing her disappointment, and hoping to distract her and his nephew from the subject, he suggested brightly, “Why don’t you and A.C. play a game of checkers?”

“All right,” she replied, her expression brightening. “You wanna play, A.C.?”

“Yeah, okay,” he replied, still sulking because his dad was treating him like a baby.

“When does the shivaree start?” Benj asked and his dad replied, “Oh, not until moonrise. Let’s go ahead and change out of these fancy duds.”

“Yes, I think you should change as well, Sarah,” Annabelle said. “I don’t want anything happening to that dress.”

“I’ll change, too,” A.C. added, jumping up and taking the stairs two at a time.

“That boy,” Bronwen said, shaking her head. “He looks so handsome in his morning coat. But he’s definitely his father’s son when it comes to dressing up,” and she directed a mock frown at Adam, who just grinned at her before heading upstairs to change.

“I think I’ll go read in my room,” Annabelle said and Bronwen added, “That sounds like an excellent idea.”

The others soon reassembled in the great room in more comfortable clothes and the two youngest set up the checkerboard. Adam said, “Gwyneth and I have an idea for something the rest of us could do to pass the time. Do you know how to play Hearts?” Benj and Joe shook their heads and Gwyneth spoke up then saying, “Dad and I could teach you. It’s lots of fun.”

“I’m game,” Joe said. “How about you, Pardner?” and Benj nodded.

They had time to play a couple of games (Adam and Benj defeated Joe and Gwyneth both times) before Adam and Joe heard signs of activity in the yard and said it was time to go.

After they left, Gwyneth decided to read. She picked up her copy of What Maisie Knew, which she’d slipped among her grandpa’s books, and curled up in the blue velvet chair. Once he saw her open the book, A.C. stretched and said, “I’m too tired to finish this game. Think I’m going to bed.” Then he winked at Sarah and gestured toward the stairs. She looked surprised for a minute and then nodded.

“Yeah, I think I’m going to turn in, too,” she announced. Gwyneth was already so absorbed in her book that she didn’t pay any attention except to say absently, “Goodnight.”

When they reached the top of the stairs, A.C. motioned for Sarah to follow him into his room. “You wanna come with me to the shivaree?” he whispered once the door was safely shut.

“But our dads said we weren’t to go,” Sarah protested, keeping her voice low.

“They don’t have to know,” he whispered back. “We know they’re goin’ to the cabin and we can ride far enough behind they won’t know we’re there. Well, you wanna come or not?”

Sarah hesitated for a moment but then she nodded and said, “Okay, but Gwyneth’ll see us if we go outside, and she’ll stop us.”

“Not if we climb out of my window. Look, there’s a branch that’s real close. All we hafta do is slide a little bit on the roof to get to it. Then it’ll be easy to climb down,” and Sarah nodded hesitantly. He threw up the sash and climbed out, trying to scrabble as quietly as he could to the branch. Sarah felt like she was going to be sick when she climbed out the window and saw how far below her the ground was. She stood frozen, her hands clutching the window for dear life.

“C’mon!” A.C. hissed but she shook her head.

“I’m too scared.”

“Don’t look down. Look at me. Here, all you hafta do is take my hand. You can do it.” He swung off the branch and stood on the roof, clutching the branch with one arm while he extended the other to his cousin.

She fixed her eyes on him and slowly let go of the window and began to inch toward his outstretched arm. As soon as she was close enough, he clasped her arm and pulled her closer until she could grab the branch. She swung onto the branch and he was right behind her. They climbed down the tree easily and then Sarah asked, “Can you ride bareback? It’d be quicker than having to saddle our mounts.”

A.C. had never ridden bareback, but was sure that he could, so he nodded and they ran to the barn.

The horse and the pony were a bit startled when their riders vaulted on their backs without first saddling them, and it felt a bit strange to both children. However, they were both experienced riders and had no trouble keeping their balance. Luckily there was a full moon providing adequate light. They started off at a walk until they felt comfortable and then they rode at a canter until they could hear the other horses ahead of them, and slowed back to a walk. They noticed some of the riders were carrying torches and made sure they kept back to the shadows.

It was a longer ride to the cabin than they realized but finally its dim outline was visible. They moved as close to the group of men as they could while still remaining out of sight. “I wonder what happens now?” Sarah asked in a loud whisper.

“I don’t know. Dad says they serenade, but I’m not sure what that is,” A.C. whispered back. Just then they heard the sound of a guitar being strummed and then Adam’s voice could be heard singing the first verse of Billy Boy and the others all joining in.

“I guess serenading must be the same as singing,” Sarah whispered. “Oh, look! There’s William!”

They saw William standing in the doorway in his bare feet and robe. Sarah was surprised that he didn’t seem to be wearing a nightshirt under his robe.

“Thank you for the shivaree, gentlemen,” he said with a grin.

“Where’s your little wife, Billy Boy?” one of the hands called. “We want her to thank us.”

“I’m afraid my bride has retired and she asked me to thank you on her behalf,” William replied firmly, rather relieved to see Adam and Joe among the others.

“He means we’re interrupting his fun,” another hand said with a laugh.

“No, we’re enjoying the music and my wife wonders if you could sing Scarborough Fair,” William replied with a smile.

“I know it,” Adam answered. His son-in-law’s appearance was an uncomfortable reminder that his little girl was now a wife, but he was here to ensure the shivaree didn’t get out of hand. His rich baritone began singing the old ballad.

Scarborough Fair just happened to be one of Sarah’s favorite songs and without thinking she began to sing with Adam. All the hands were astonished to hear a soprano voice singing along with Adam, and Joe recognized the voice immediately. Signaling his intention to Adam, who continued singing, Joe turned his mount and rode quietly in the direction of his daughter’s voice. He saw the two children and with a fearsome scowl said, “Sarah Marie Cartwright, what are you doing here! And your dad will be having a ‘necessary’ talk with you, Adam Stoddard Cartwright, Jr.!” His eyes narrowing, he added in an ominously quiet tone, “Did the two of you ride here bareback?” Their eyes wide and frightened, they nodded mutely. “And was that your idea, young man?”

“N-no, it was mine, Daddy,” Sarah said in a small voice. “But we didn’t have any problems and it was f-fun.”

“It’s too late now but tomorrow morning after breakfast, you and I are going to have a very ‘necessary’ talk about what is proper fun for a young lady,” Joe said sternly. “Right now, I’m going to escort the two of you back to the house.”

As they rode back, Joe suddenly asked, “How did the two of you get out of the house without anyone stopping you?”

Sarah looked at her cousin. He licked his lips nervously and reached up to tug on an earlobe, unconsciously imitating his father. “Uh, we, uh, climbed out my window and then down the tree.”

Joe felt sick as the picture flashed through his mind of his daughter’s crumpled form lying at the base of the tree. “And whose idea was that?”

“M-mine, Uncle Joe,” the young boy stuttered and Joe reminded himself that no matter how tall the boy was, he was still only ten. Pa, I think I finally realize what I must have put you through.

“So breaking your arm and getting a concussion didn’t teach you about the dangers of climbing trees?” he asked, trying to keep his tone calm.

“I-I’m not supposed to climb them,” the boy said in a very small voice.

“That’s what I thought,” Joe said flatly. “You are going to have to tell your dad what you did, but that can wait until morning. No reason to disturb everyone else in the middle of the night. Besides, I think it will do you both good to think about what you did.”

When they got back to the ranch house, they found everyone had gone to bed, but Gwyneth had left a lamp burning low in the great room. “You two get on upstairs, and do it without waking anyone. A.C.’s dad and I will deal with you both tomorrow,” Joe said.

The children crept up the stairs soundlessly and Joe sat in Pa’s leather chair to wait for his older brother to return. He had dozed off so he was startled awake when he heard the sound of the door opening. Adam saw him and after Benj headed to bed, he asked Joe quietly, “A.C. was with Sarah, wasn’t he?”

“Yeah, he was. I sent them both to bed and said we’d punish them tomorrow.” Adam nodded his agreement and Joe continued. “I think I’d better prepare you even though I told A.C. he’d have to fess up to you what he’d done. They rode bareback; that was Sarah’s idea. They got out of the house without anyone knowing by climbing out A.C.’s window and then down the tree.” Joe paused and then added carefully, “That was A.C’s idea.”

He saw his older brother close his eyes for a moment while his lips thinned. “I thought I had taught him to keep his word. Obviously I failed.”

“Remember, he’s just a kid, Adam,” Joe said quietly.

“He’s old enough to know when he’s breaking a promise he made to his mother,” Adam replied. “I’m glad I have some time before punishing him. I’m so angry now that I wouldn’t trust myself.” He sighed and added in a mocking tone, “He should have been born first. I’m getting too old to deal with this.” Joe could only nod in sympathy.

The two children slept very poorly that night, dreading the upcoming ‘necessary’ discussions with their fathers. They woke up without being called, and they were the first ones downstairs. Beth and her little ones were next. “G’day, Unca A.C.!” Huw greeted his uncle enthusiastically. “G’day, Sarah!”

“My, you two are up early,” Beth commented, knowing her brother was usually the last one down.

“I’m hungry,” Elen announced and Beth said, “We’ll eat when the others come downstairs.”

Buckshot came in carrying a dish of scrambled eggs and a platter of biscuits. Elen ran over to him and said, “I wanna help.”

“All right, little lady,” the walleyed cook replied in his gravelly voice, smiling at the little girl.

“Mama will put the plates on the table and you can put on the silverware,” Beth said.

“I’ll put on the cups and saucers and the glasses,” Sarah said, walking toward the dining room, and after a brief hesitation, A.C. offered to put the napkins on the table.

Annabelle and Bronwen came down the stairs a few minutes later trailed by Gwyneth and the Davies. “Well, if this isn’t a sight to gladden any mother’s heart,” Bronwen said with a grin. “Don’t we have well-behaved children, Annabelle?”

“We surely do,” Annabelle replied with a little smile while Sarah and A.C. only exchanged tragic glances, which were not lost on Beth, but she kept her suspicions to herself.

By the time Adam, Joe and Benj came down the stairs, the others were seated around the table and Beth was putting Huw in his high chair.

“Good morning,” Ben said with a smile. “We were just debating whether we should start without you three. Since you’re here, would you say grace, Adam?”

Adam nodded and slipped into the chair between Bronwen and A.C., who swallowed convulsively at the sight of his dad’s stern face.

After Adam blessed the food and everyone began passing round the platters, Sarah noticed that Miranda and William were absent. When she mentioned it, the adults smiled.

“There won’t be any flapjacks left pretty soon. Shouldn’t someone should go to the cabin and get them?” she queried.

“They’ll survive missing breakfast, sugar, trust me,” Ben replied calmly. “I expect we’ll see them at dinner.”

“I think I’ll go fishing,” Gwyneth announced. (Since they’d had an exhausting day Saturday, and the drive to church was so long, they’d all agreed this Sunday they would stay home.) “Anyone like to come with me?” Benj immediately said yes. A.C. started to say he’d go when he remembered and closed his mouth.

“Don’t you want to come, A.C.?” Gwyneth asked, surprised that he hadn’t jumped at the opportunity.

“I’m afraid your brother will be occupied in other ways,” Adam said quietly, and recognizing the tone, Bronwen looked at her husband in surprise. “As soon as we’ve finished breakfast, A.C. has a few things that he needs to tell us, sweetheart. Right, A.C.?”

A.C. nodded and then seeing his dad’s frown said, “Yes, sir.”

“And Sarah and I will be having a ‘necessary’ talk after she does some explaining to you,” Joe said to Annabelle.

A pall seemed to settle on the meal after that. The Davies and Ben didn’t know what had happened but it was clear A.C. and Sarah were in serious trouble judging by their fathers’ expressions. A.C.’s appetite vanished and he found himself pushing his food around his plate until he saw his dad’s frown and forced himself to eat, even though it made him feel sick. Sarah wasn’t faring any better and she couldn’t stop her tears from overflowing. It wasn’t so much the spanking, although she was dreading that; it was the knowledge that she’d disappointed her daddy that really hurt. Only Huw seemed oblivious to the atmosphere and ate with his usual messy glee.

Adam, Bronwen and A.C. finished first. After they excused themselves, Adam suggested they go to the barn. They were all quiet until they were inside and then Adam turned to his son. “Uncle Joe tells me you have some explaining to do, young man.”

A.C. stared at the ground, pulling on his earlobe as he began. “Sarah and I—“ but his dad interrupted.

“Do us the courtesy of looking at us when you speak,” he commanded in that ominously quiet tone and A.C. forced himself to look up, although he couldn’t meet his parents’ eyes.

“Sarah and I went to the shivaree,” he said in a voice so soft they had to strain to hear.

Adam waited and when A.C. said nothing more he commanded, “Your mother and I want to hear the details.”

A.C. took a deep breath, and looking somewhere over his father’s left shoulder, he said, “We sneaked out of the house and then we rode bareback to the cabin. It was Sarah’s idea to ride bareback,” he added, looking into his father’s eyes for the first time.

“How did you sneak out of the house?” Adam asked in an implacable tone.

The boy’s eyes shifted off to the side again as he said, “We climbed out my window and then down the tree.”

“A.C.!” Bronwen exclaimed, “you promised me that you wouldn’t climb any more trees.”

“I just forgot, Mama. Honest! I’m sorry. Dad, I’m really sorry,” and his large hazel eyes began to fill with tears at the hurt he saw in his mama’s eyes and the disappointment in his dad’s.

“You should be sorry,” Adam said grimly. “You willfully disobeyed me, you broke a promise you made to your mama, and you put not only your own life, but Sarah’s at risk. We are going to have a necessary talk, but that is not enough punishment for this. You are confined to the house and the yard for the remainder of our visit and you will chop firewood for Buckshot, clean and whitewash the henhouse, and do any other chores he has for you.”

“Adam,” Bronwen started to protest, but at the look he gave her, she closed her mouth. She couldn’t really argue that the punishment was too strict. That A.C. would break a promise he had made to her and his dad made her both sad and angry.

A.C. looked at her beseechingly. “Mama ¼”

She shook her head. “I am extremely disappointed in you, A.C. bach.” She turned then saying, “I’ll see you inside, cariad.”

Joe, Annabelle and Sarah went upstairs to her room. As soon as Joe closed the door, he turned to his daughter and said, “All right, Sarah Marie, I want you to tell your mother why you are being punished.”

Sarah’s greenish hazel eyes pooled with tears as she said, “I disobeyed Daddy and went to hear the shivaree with A.C. We climbed out his window and down the tree so Gwyneth wouldn’t see us and then we rode bareback to the cabin.” She stopped and said in a shaky voice, “I’m sorry. I know it was wrong, and I know I’m older than A.C. and I should have stopped him instead of going with him.”

“I’m glad to hear that you realize that,” Joe said in a stern voice.

Annabelle, who had been shocked at her daughter’s admission, now spoke up. “Before Sarah receives her punishment, I need to speak with you in our room.”

Joe frowned a little but nodded curtly. As soon as they reached their room, Annabelle said, “Joe, I don’t think you should spank Sarah. She’s nearly twelve years old and I think that’s too old for corporal punishment. I would prefer we confine her to her room for the rest of the day and then to the ranch house for the remainder of our stay.”

“Remainder of your stay,” Joe repeated, feeling his heart constrict.

“I do love you, Joe,” she said softly, “and I know you can’t leave Pa, but I want our children educated in Boston with all its cultural advantages, not here.”

“The greatest advantage we can give our children is for them to grow up in a family where they are loved. That’s what’s important. Not what schools they go to!” he replied. “And it’s not just the children—I love you, Annabelle, and I don’t want to be separated. I need you,” and he took her in his arms and kissed her hungrily.

At first, she melted into his embrace, but then she pushed away. “You can visit Boston and we can be together then, but I just can’t live here. I can’t!” She saw the pain in his eyes and said, “I tried—I tried for eleven years—but I was miserable. In Boston I have friends. It’s true that some have turned their backs on me because I live apart from you, but not my true friends. I am a fish out of water here. You know I am.”

His shoulders slumped in defeat, he asked, “When are you leaving?”

“The same day as the others. I thought it would be easier on Sarah and Benj that way.” She reached for his hand, but he jerked it away. “Please, Joe. Please try to understand.”

“I only understand how much you’re hurting our family, and Pa. But I know I can’t stop you. Just, please, don’t say anything until the day before you leave. Don’t spoil this special time.”

“I won’t,” she agreed.

When Gwyneth and Benj returned, with a fine string of trout, they found Beth and Bronwen playing catch with Elen in the yard, Ben and Dr. Davies playing chess on the porch and Adam giving Huw a piggyback ride. They all saw William and Miranda riding up from the direction of the cabin.

“You missed breakfast!” Benj shouted.

“No, we didn’t,” Miranda replied as they drew closer. “Sylvia and Samantha both told me if we wanted to have good luck, then I needed to cook our first meal. They were so insistent that I fixed our breakfast.”

Seeing his father-in-law’s raised eyebrow, William added. “It was only toast. It wasn’t burnt enough to be inedible.” And he grinned from ear to ear.

“William!”

“Well, dearest, you did say you were a terrible cook; I am just being a good husband and agreeing” he replied, putting his arm about her waist and giving her a squeeze.

“It’s the last time you’ll have to eat a meal I prepared,” she replied with a smile while her older sister snickered.

“C’mon, let’s get these trout cleaned. I’m hungry,” Benj said. Seeing the way his cousin and her husband gazed into each other’s eyes made him uncomfortable. When he and Gwyneth went around back, they found A.C., spattered with whitewash, just finishing the henhouse.

“I guess this is part of your punishment, huh?” Benj asked. When his cousin nodded, he added, “At least it’s better than a tanning.”

“I got that, too,” A.C. said, rubbing his posterior and smearing it with whitewash.

“Gosh, Uncle Adam must be really strict,” Benj commented in surprise.

“He is,” Gwyneth responded, adding, “but he’s fair. Right, little brother?”

After a moment, A.C. nodded reluctantly. Just then Bronwen walked over.

“A.C., you’d better hurry and finish because you’re not sitting down at the table until you’ve had a bath and washed your hair.”

“I just had a bath the day before yesterday,” he whined.

“I don’t care; you are filthy and you have to have another. I hope I can get that whitewash out of your clothes. I’ll go put some clean ones in the bathhouse and heat some water for your bath.”

It was an odd dinner. Sarah was confined to her room and A.C., usually a chatterbox, was very subdued. William and Miranda were so wrapped up in each other they seemed barely aware of the others gathered round the table. Their happiness made Joe and Annabelle painfully aware of their estrangement but reminded the happily married couples of their honeymoons. Ben was lost in memories of his Liz while Beth was missing Dafydd and Gwyneth was dreaming of the time when she and Mark would be husband and wife. Benj and Elen concentrated on their dinner while Huw chewed on the tiny, tender pieces of trout his mama gave him and smeared his mashed potatoes over his face and in his hair before she could stop him.

After dinner, Ben and the Davies declared their intention to take a nap.

“A nap sounds like a wonderful idea,” Adam said, stretching. “I guess I’m getting too old for these late nights.”

“Huw, I’ll have to wash your hair before you take your nap, you naughty boy,” Beth scolded while her little darling grinned unrepentantly.

“I wanna take my nap wiv Pa-pa,” Elen declared and Huw added, “Me nap Pa-pa.”

“I guess we can all three fit,” Adam said, grinning at his grandchildren. “Care to make it four, Me-ma?” he asked Bronwen with a wink.

“No, I think that arrangement would be too crowded. I think I’ll take The Well-Beloved and read on the porch,” she replied with a smile, and Annabelle said she’d get her book and join her.

Adam then asked Buckshot, “I hope you have plenty of work for A.C.?”

“Yes, sir,” the cook replied in his gravelly voice. “He’s gonna wash the dishes, pots and pans, and then he’s gonna weed my vegetable garden. I figure that should take most of the afternoon.”

“Yeah, I think it should,” Adam replied, watching his son’s shoulders sag and his face fall at the mention of all that work.

“We’ll see you all at supper,” Miranda said, taking William’s hand as they exited.

“I’m glad they’re so happy, but it makes me miss Dafydd,” Beth said in an undertone to Gwyneth.

Gwyneth nodded. “And I miss Mark so much. I hope we won’t have to wait long after he graduates to marry.”

Beth smiled in understanding. “Could you watch Elen while I wash this little man’s hair?” and her sister nodded.

“How about I help you with Huw?” Adam suggested. “For a child who loves water, he hates bathing.”

“Thanks, Daddy. I could use the help,” and Beth accepted with a smile.

“How would you like to go for a ride, Pardner?” Joe asked and Benj agreed willingly.

When everyone woke up from their naps, Ben suggested they sit on the porch and sing. “You’re only going to be here for another day, and this is probably the last time we will all be together again.”

“Sure, Pa,” Adam said quietly, knowing the truth of his words. “I’ll get my guitar and Joe and Benj can join us when they get back. And I think A.C. has done enough work today.”

Annabelle added, “I’ll go tell Sarah that she may come join us.”

“Since today is Sunday, I suggest we sing hymns,” Mrs. Davies said and everyone agreed.

Joe heard their voices singing the old beloved hymns in four-part harmony as he and Benj rode up to the yard, and for a moment he was overcome with grief and sadness.

“Are you okay, Dad?” Benj asked worriedly, seeing the tears in his dad’s eyes.

“I’m fine, Pardner,” Joe replied, managing to keep his voice steady for his son’s sake. “I guess I was just feeling sad, remembering when your uncles, grandpa and I used to sing hymns together.”

“You really miss Uncle Hoss, don’t you?” the boy said slowly.

“Yeah, I do. And I miss Uncle Adam. Reading his letters just isn’t the same as having him here.”

“I kinda miss Sarah when I’m at school, and I miss you and Mama. But now I miss my friends.”

Joe hesitated and then said, “You won’t miss them much longer. You’ll be heading back to Boston the day after tomorrow.”

“But I thought ¼” and the boy’s voice trailed off.

“So did I, but your mama wants you all to return to Boston,” Joe replied, trying to keep any bitterness from his tone.

‘Don’t you and Mama love each other?” the boy asked in an anguished tone.

“Yes, we do, but sometimes love just isn’t enough,” Joe said sadly.

The next morning after making love, William gently smoothed back Miranda’s curls and said softly, “I thought we’d spend today with your family.”

“Fair dinkum? I mean, really?” she asked with shining eyes.

“Of course. We have the rest of our lives to spend together, but I know your family won’t be able to visit often.” He grinned. “Now, I don’t think they’ll mind if we’re a little late to breakfast, hmm?” and she giggled before wrapping her arms around him.

They found the others were just beginning to pass around the food when they arrived and A.C. said cheekily, “You’re late. All the biscuits are gone.”

Buckshot said with a wink at the newlyweds, “I got another batch in the oven; be ready in just a few minutes.”

“Do we have any plans for today?” Miranda asked. “If not, I was hoping maybe we could have a picnic at the lake.”

“Maybe play horseshoes,” William suggested and Joe snickered. “I’ve been practicing, Uncle Joe,” he replied with a straight face and with a lift of an eyebrow, Adam said to his brother, “How about you and Benj against William and me?”

“You’re on, brother,” Joe said.

Adam suddenly noticed the woebegone expression on his son’s face and realized the problem. “Jackeroo, you may come on the picnic, but I want you to help Beth watch Elen and Huw and play some games with them.”

“Sarah, you can do the same,” Joe said and the two youngsters nodded, happy grins on their faces, as their fathers’ pronouncements let them know that they had both been forgiven for their disobedience.

Adam and William soundly defeated Joe and Benj, to Joe’s utter amazement. “I guess you have been practicing,” he muttered, disbelief written all over his face.

“It turns out the head of my department loves to play horseshoes and so he was happy to help me improve my game,” William said smugly while Miranda gazed on proudly and Adam guffawed.

Meanwhile, A.C. quickly tired of rolling the ball to Huw but Elen wanted to play catch with Sarah and her mama, and he knew better than to complain. He was relieved when Beth and Gwyneth suggested playing some other games. He enjoyed playing London Bridge and shaking everyone else up. He even enjoyed playing ring-a-round-a-rosy, although he’d never admit it.

After the horseshoe game, Adam suggested a game of Needle’s Eye, and everyone but Ben and the Davies joined in, Adam and Joe running with Huw and Elen to ensure they broke through.

As the sun moved farther in the west, Adam said, “I think we should say our goodbyes now when we can be private.”

“Siân and I will go for a walk along the shore to give you more privacy,” Dr. Davies said and William offered to accompany them but Bronwen said, “No, please stay, William.”

“I’ll come with you,” Annabelle said quickly and everyone except Joe and Benj exchanged glances.

Beth said in a shaky voice, “I doubt if the children and I will ever be able to travel here again, but I’m so glad I got to see all of you, and to meet you, William.” She hugged Ben and kissed his cheek and then turned to Miranda. The hugged each other tightly and made no effort to check their tears. Next she turned to William and Joe and hugged them quickly. “It was wonderful seeing you again, Sarah and Benj.” Sarah threw her arms about her cousin, hugging her tightly, and then Beth smiled and asked Benj, “Do I get a hug?” He stiffened at first, but then he hugged her back. Elen and Huw had stood by with big eyes and now Beth said, “We’re going to leave for home tomorrow, so can you give everyone a goodbye kiss?” Elen was a little shy but Huw was enthusiastic in his kisses. Beth took them to Ben last.

“Great-grandpa is really going to miss you,” Ben said as he cupped their smooth, soft cheeks in his gnarled old hands.

“I miss you,” Elen said and two fat tears rolled down her cheeks as she kissed his weathered one.

“Bye-bye, Geatganpa,” Huw said smacking Ben’s cheek loudly and Ben smiled at his beautiful, innocent countenance.

“I’m going to miss you so much, Grandpa,” Gwyneth said softly before she hugged him.

“I hope you and your Mark will be very happy. You make sure your daddy sends me a picture of the two of you on your wedding day,” Ben said unsteadily, and Gwyneth nodded, too moved to speak. Miranda held out her arms and the two sisters, so opposite in height, hugged fiercely.

“You take good care of my sister,” Gwyneth said to William with a wobbly smile, and he answered solemnly, “I will. You make sure Miranda and I also get a photograph of you and Mark on your wedding day.” They hugged before Gwyneth said her goodbyes to her uncle and cousins.

“You’re not too big to give your grandpa a hug, are you, A.C.?” Ben said with a smile and A.C. shook his head before hugging Ben, and he didn’t even squirm when Ben kissed his cheek although normally he only tolerated kisses from his mama. “I love you, Grandpa,” he whispered. “I love you too, child” Ben answered, unashamed at the tears that fell from his eyes.

“I want a hug, too,” Miranda said to her not-so-little brother, so he hugged her and blushed when she kissed his cheek. William held out his hand and clasped A.C.’s arm.

“You write your sister and me, all right?” and the boy nodded.

Joe said with a grin, “I know your cousins don’t want a hug, but I do,” and he held out his arms.

After they hugged, A.C. said to his cousins, “I’m glad I got to see you again, and I’m sorry I got us in trouble, Sarah.”

“That’s okay. I should have stopped you instead of going with you,” she replied with a faint grin.

“You can write to me at my school,” Benj said. “I’ll give you the address when we get back to the ranch,” and A.C. nodded.

Beth had already taken her children to join the Davies and now Gwyneth and A.C. started after them while Bronwen turned to Sarah and Benj.

“I’m sorry we aren’t able to spend more time together, but I’m happy we had this brief visit. I’d like it very much if you wrote to me and your uncle.” She smiled at Benj and then hugged Sarah before turning to her brother-in-law. “Joe, I’ll miss you so much.” She hugged him tightly as she whispered, “I hope that things will work out for you.”

“My brother is a very lucky man,” Joe said softly. “If he ever needs to be reminded of that, you just let me know,” and he kissed her cheek.

“Oh Pa,” Bronwen said as Ben held out his arms to her, and she couldn’t stop the tears, knowing she would probably never see her father-in-law again.

“Don’t cry, dear,” he said gently after kissing her cheek. “I couldn’t love you more if you were my own daughter, and I can’t thank you enough for the happiness you’ve given my son.”

She hugged Ben one more time before turning to her second born and her new son-in-law. “It’s so hard to leave you, Miranda fach. It helps knowing that you and William have found each other, but only a little.”

“I’ll write often, Mama. I promise,” Miranda said, her voice unsteady and her eyes filling with tears. They shared a fierce embrace, reluctant to end it, but Bronwen forced herself to turn to her son-in-law. “I wish we could have spent more time together, William, but I know you’ll make my little girl happy.”

“I’ll do my best,” he hesitated and added, “Mama.” She smiled and hugged him before following the others to the lakeshore.

Adam turned to his brother’s children, saying with a smile, “Your aunt spoke for both of us when she said we wish we could have spent more time with you, and we would like to hear from you.”

“I’ll write, I promise, Uncle Adam,” Sarah said before throwing her arms around her tall uncle. He kissed her cheek before holding out his hand to Benj, who said, “I’ll write and I’d like to hear from you.”

They started to go after the others but Joe said, “Don’t go. I have something I need to say.” Sarah looked puzzled while Benj nodded his understanding. Adam and Ben exchanged worried glances. “There’s no easy way to say this. Tomorrow you both are returning to Boston with your mother.”

“I thought we were going to live here with you and Grandpa,” Sarah said, tears trickling down her cheeks. She ran to him and hugged him tightly.

“You’ll still spend your summers here and I’ll try and visit in October,” Joe said softly as he stroked his little girl’s curls.

“I’ll miss you, Grandpa,” Benj said, and he was old enough to understand that his grandpa might not be there next summer when he visited, so he hugged him—something he hadn’t done since he was A.C.’s age. Sarah ran over and hugged Ben and he held both the children close. He had to struggle not to break down knowing that it might be the last time he saw any of his grandchildren.

Sarah scrubbed her cheeks with the backs of her hands and then she and Benj ran to join the others along the lakeshore.

Adam turned to his brother and said quietly, “Joe, I’m so sorry.”

“I know you are, Adam, but I’d rather not talk about it,” Joe replied, struggling to keep his emotions under control. He paused then added, “You’re a very lucky man.”

“Yes, I am,” Adam replied softly. “If there’s anything I can do ¼” Joe nodded afraid to speak, but he embraced his brother before heading after his children.

Adam turned to his daughter and new son-in-law, who’d stood by shocked and saddened by Joe’s announcement. “I can only echo your mother and say how hard it is to leave you, Angel, even knowing that you now belong to William.” He took her in his arms and felt his eyes fill with tears, knowing it would be years before he would see his precious daughter again. As he kissed her cheek, he could taste the saltiness of her tears.

When they broke apart, he turned to his son-in-law, and they clasped arms. “I promise I’ll love her and care for her ¼” William paused and then asked, “May I call you Dad as A.C. does?”

“I’d like that very much, William,” Adam said with one of his rare, blinding smiles.

William turned to Miranda then and said, “Why don’t we join the others? I know you want to say goodbye to your tad-cu and mam-gu,” and he only stumbled a little over the Welsh words.

When they were out of sight, Adam turned to his pa, fresh tears forming in his eyes. The two men embraced and then Ben said in a voice that he couldn’t quite steady, “I’m holding you to your promise, son.”

“I’ll keep it, Pa, no matter how hard it is,” Adam answered in a strained voice. “I love you, and I know I haven’t said it enough.”

Ben smiled as he said gently, “You’ve shown your love in many ways over the years. You are a son any man would be proud of: intelligent, hardworking, and loyal. You are a man of integrity, and you have the strength of your convictions. That is something I have always admired about you.”

He reached up and caressed the silvery curls at his son’s nape. “You may be nearly sixty-two now, but when I look at you, I can still see that precious little boy with his curls and dimples who started off from Boston with me in that old farm wagon.”

Adam shook his head and smiled ruefully but then he added slowly, “I know what you mean. When I looked at Miranda dressed in her wedding gown and veil, I could see the tiny infant I held in my arms and the little girl with her big eyes and curls sitting on my lap and “reading” to me from one of her picture books. It was the same with Beth and it will be the same with Gwyneth.”

“Yes, you do understand,” Ben said. Clasping his son’s hand in his own, he said gently, “When the time comes that I go to join your mothers, your brother, and your precious Penny, you will still have your memories, and they will always be there when you need them.”

Chapter 4

“As much as I enjoyed seeing your native land and being with your family again, Adam bach,” Mrs. Davies stated as their ship approached Sydney’s harbor, “I have to say it will be so good to be home again.”

“See Tada?” Elen asked her mama with shining eyes.

“No, sweetie, not yet. But we’ll see Tada soon, I promise,” Beth replied, giving her little girl a reassuring hug and kiss.

“Llywelyn and Mark are planning on meeting the ship,” Dr. Davies commented and saw the way Gwyneth’s face lit up, just as her little niece’s had a moment before at the mention of the most important man in her life.

Gwyneth was the first to spot the two young men, and waved her arm to get their attention. They saw her and hurried toward the group. Their eyes nearly popped out when they saw Beth. In all the excitement of the graduation and wedding, no one had remembered to write them that Beth was enceinte.

“Congratulations,” Llywelyn said with an enormous grin. Then he smiled at Elen and Huw, who were clutching their mama’s hands tightly as the crowd milled around them. “So you’re going to have a baby brother or sister.”

“I wanna sister,” Elen asserted causing everyone to smile.

“Llywelyn will get some hackney cabs, and I’ll see to everyone’s luggage,” Mark then said. “You’re staying at the same hotel, aren’t you, Mr. Cartwright?”

“Yes, that’s correct. Thank you both,” Adam replied, directing a smile at the two young men.

Before he left to take care of the luggage, Mark said to Adam in an undertone, “Could I speak with you privately this afternoon, sir?” and Adam nodded. He had just given away a daughter in America, and now it appeared that he would soon be repeating the bittersweet ritual with his remaining girl in Queensland.

When Mark arrived at their suite at the hotel, Adam suggested they go for a walk so they could have some privacy. He knew what the young man wanted to discuss with him, but waited patiently for him to speak.

Mark liked Gwyneth’s father, but he had always found him just a little intimidating. He’d worked out exactly what he wanted to say ahead of time, but now that time had come to speak he was finding it very difficult.

Adam finally took pity on the young man and said, “You wanted to speak with me, Mark? I can guess that it’s about Gwyneth.”

“Yes, sir,” Mark replied. He took a deep breath to steady his nerves and said as confidently as he could, “Mr. Cartwright, you know that Gwyneth and I are in love.” Adam nodded, with just a hint of a smile quirking his lips. “I realize that I don’t graduate for almost four months, and I know it will be several months after I begin working at Cartwright & Davies before I’ll be able to save up enough money to make a down payment on a house. However, sir, I would like your permission to ask Gwyneth to marry me now. I want her to return to Cloncurry wearing my ring so Douglas Campbell will know that she’s made her choice.”

Adam nodded slowly. “You have my permission, Mark. In fact, I think it is a good idea that Gwyneth returns home as your fiancée. I agree that you cannot marry until after you’ve graduated, but I don’t think it’s necessary for you to wait until you’ve saved enough to make a down payment on a house. Thanks to her time in Brisbane, Gwyneth already owns everything you’ll need to set up housekeeping and she knows how to make a budget and follow it. I’m sure the two of you can manage on your salary at the mine. I’ll be happy to loan you the money for a down payment on a house.”

“I thank you for your generosity, sir, but no. I don’t want to be in anyone’s debt,” Mark said firmly.

“I admire your opinion on that subject, but hear me out, Mark, because my motives are not selfless.” Mark’s eyebrows raised showing his disbelief, but Adam continued. “You and Gwyneth have been in love since before you went away to school four years ago, and I have no doubts about your feelings for each other. Now, it may be hard for you to believe, but I was once young and in love and I know that the flesh is weak. I think it would be best if you and Gwyneth marry as soon as possible after you return to Cloncurry. Please, accept my offer of a loan so you can be together.”

Adam watched the struggle on the young man’s face between his pride and his love for Gwyneth, and was relieved when the young man said. “All right, but I must pay you interest on the loan.”

“One percent,” Adam said, extending his hand.

“That’s too little,” the younger man objected and Adam laughed.

“Mark, I don’t want to make money off the loan. One percent is plenty.” He didn’t tell him that he intended to deposit the interest in Gwyneth’s trust fund.

“Do I have your permission to take Gwyneth to supper tonight?” Mark asked, a bit stiffly, and Adam dimpled.

“Of course. Just don’t keep her out too late. Beth is anxious to return to Dafydd, so we’re going to leave for Townsville on the first available train tomorrow,” and Mark nodded, now returning his future father-in-law’s smile.

Mark chose an unassuming restaurant on a quiet street not too far from the Cartwrights’ hotel. As they waited for their food to be served, he said, “So what do you think of Miranda’s professor?”

“I like him,” Gwyneth replied honestly. “He’s very nice. He’s not up himself, but his mother is another story.” Her lips quirked up in a smile as she added, “And William’s father kept flirting with Mama.”

“Fair dinkum?” Mark said, his eyebrows shooting up in surprise.

“Too right,” Gwyneth replied with a giggle. “Daddy didn’t like it at all.”

“I wouldn’t like it if anyone flirted with you,” Mark said very seriously and Gwyneth’s cheeks reddened.

“We got to see the house William and Miranda are buying in Hanover. I guess professors earn more than I realized because it’s as big as our house. It’s old though,” she added quickly. “I think William said it was built back in the 1860s.”

“I suppose you want a big house, too,” he said dejectedly.

“No,” she replied quickly. “I liked my flat and I think I’d prefer a small house. Although I guess it would depend on the size of my family.” Realizing what she’d said, her face flamed and he smiled and reached for her hand. Just then the waiter arrived with their food, so they concentrated on their meal. After he’d paid their check, Mark suggested they go for a walk.

“Gwyneth,” he began as they walked along the nearly deserted street holding hands, “I’ve loved you ever since that first time we danced together and your glorious hair came unpinned and tumbled down around you. The more time we spent together, the deeper my love grew.” He stopped then because they had come to a large gum tree slightly off to the side of the road. He drew her behind the tree where they were hidden from any passing eyes. “I spoke with your father this afternoon and he gave me permission to ask you to be mine.” He took her hand and dropped to one knee. “Gwyneth, my darling, will you marry me?”

“Oh yes, Mark,” she replied softly, so he stood and took her into his arms, and they shared a kiss that conveyed their feelings without words.

“I have something for you,” he said when they finally ended their kiss. “I know diamonds are your birthstone. I couldn’t afford a very big one—”

“I don’t care about that,” she interrupted and he slid the ring on her finger. “It’s beautiful,” she added turning her hand to admire the plain gold band and the tiny sparkling stone set in the center.

“Your dad offered to loan us the money for the down payment on a house. It will need to be a small one for now. We can always move to a bigger house after I’ve been able to save more money.”

“I have a trust fund—” she began, but he cut her off.

“I’m not living off my wife’s money,” he said harshly.

“All right,” she agreed. “Beth told me she and Dafydd agreed that they would use her trust fund for their children’s education.”

“I guess that would be all right,” he conceded. “Your dad mentioned that you’d already bought everything we’d need to set up housekeeping. Why don’t you find us a house? Take your dad along and ask his advice; I trust you. That way we can get married soon after I graduate.”

“I’d like that,” she said, snuggling close.

“Do you want a big wedding?” he asked with a hint of apprehension because he knew his family would be very uncomfortable at a big wedding, for they felt inferior to the Cartwrights and the Davies.

“No,” she said. “I’d prefer a small wedding like Miranda’s with only our families. And I don’t really want a big reception like Miranda and Beth had.”

“Are you sure?” he asked, for he didn’t want her cheated out of something she truly wanted.

“I’m sure,” she replied with a shy smile.

“I’m glad it’s the bride and her family that are in charge of the wedding,” he replied with real feeling. Then he took her in his arms for another long, passionate kiss. When they broke apart he said, “It’s a good thing you’re leaving for Cloncurry tomorrow. This is going to be the longest four months of my life.”

“And mine,” she whispered. He was barely able to resist the temptation to take her in his arms again, to unpin that glorious hair and bury his face in the softness of those curls.

“I think we’d better head back for the hotel,” he said, stepping away from her, but reaching for her hand.

They knocked on the door of her parents’ suite together and found everyone, including Dr. and Mrs. Davies, and they all smiled at the young couple.

“Mark and I are going to be married,” Gwyneth announced, her shy and reserved expression replaced by one of complete happiness. Even Mark’s normally saturnine countenance was lightened by his obvious joy.

After everyone had congratulated the couple and admired Gwyneth’s ring, Bronwen asked, “Have you thought about a date?”

“I was thinking of the first Saturday in February,” Gwyneth replied. “That won’t be very long after Llywelyn and Mark return to Cloncurry, but as Mark says, we’ll be making the arrangements so I don’t see why we should wait. We’ve already waited four years.”

Her parents nodded their understanding and then Beth spoke up. “We should buy the material for your wedding dress here, and take it back to Cloncurry with us. Will we have time to shop before we have to leave, Daddy?”

“I think you’ll have time as long as you are quick about it,” he replied. “What about you and Mama? Won’t you need new dresses?”

“Mark and I want a very small wedding—only our families,” Gwyneth said and Mark nodded his agreement as he put his arm around her shoulders and drew her close. “No one in Cloncurry has seen what Beth and Mama wore to Miranda’s wedding so I don’t see why they couldn’t wear those dresses,” Gwyneth suggested.

“That’s true,” Bronwen said and Beth added, “Maybe I’ll finally be able to wear the dress I made for Miranda’s wedding.”

“That’s settled then,” Adam said, with an inner sigh of relief. They’d spent a considerable sum on the trip to the States and back plus the expense of Miranda’s wedding, and although wealthy, he was, by nature, a frugal man.

“Gwyneth and I were hoping that you could help her select a house for us,” Mark said quietly to Adam, who nodded.

“Once we find a house, we’ll have to arrange to have your belongings transported from Brisbane. It would be so much easier if we were connected by rail,” Adam remarked with a frown, for Cloncurry’s lack of a rail connection was a sore point with him. He and Rhys had to make arrangements to have their ore transported by Afghan cameleers. Transporting the ore by rail would be so much more efficient and cost effective. Communication with their families in Sydney and the States would be quicker by rail than by Cobb and Co. mail coach.

“It seems like you’re gonna move away almost as soon as you get home,” A.C. remarked sadly.

“I won’t be that far away,” Gwyneth said gently. “You can visit Mark and me just like you visit Beth and Dafydd.”

“Yeah, I guess,” A.C. replied but everyone could sense his sadness so, to change the mood, Llywelyn said to his young cousin, “So I hear you and Uncle Adam are going to build a scull?”

“Too right!” the youngster replied, his attention successfully diverted, and he began to talk of his experience sculling on the Charles with his father and newest brother-in-law.

Before he headed back to his grandparents’ house, Llywelyn managed to take Adam aside. “Uncle Adam, I have a proposition to make you.” Adam said nothing but arched an eyebrow, so Llywelyn continued. “When I return to Cloncurry, I’m going to speak with Mr. Lawrence and then I intend to ask Emma to marry me. If I get the answer I expect, then I wanted to ask you to design a house for us. I’ve been saving for some time so I’m sure I can buy a small piece of land and I know my dad will help pay for the construction cost as a wedding present. It will have to be a small house, though.”

Adam smiled warmly at his nephew. ”I’d love to design a house for you and Emma. You can consider it our wedding gift.”

All too soon for Bronwen, it was time for the Cartwright family to head back to Cloncurry. “Oh, Mam,” she said tearfully as she kissed and hugged her mother good-bye. “It’s been so wonderful to be with you and Tada for these last months. I almost feel like I did when I married Adam and moved away from you both.”

Mrs. Davies made no effort to check her tears as she hugged her daughter, who would always be her baby even though she was now a grandmother. “Dw i’n dy garu di, Bronwen fach.”

Dr. Davies took his precious daughter’s face in his palms and kissed her gently on the forehead. “You are with us every day in our hearts, Bronwen fach, and we will always have our memories of this time together. Hwyl. ”

“Dw i’n dy garu di,” she said to each in turn, and, once seated on the train, she waved until her parents were out of sight. Adam put his arm about her shoulders, and the warmth of his embrace caused her barely contained tears to overflow.

As the train pulled into the Townsville station, Gwyneth suddenly announced excitedly, “There’s Dafydd!”

“It can’t be!” Beth exclaimed, standing on tiptoe and holding the overhead rail of the train car to get a better view. “Oh, it is!” she exclaimed in delight as she looked where her sister pointed.

Adam saw Dafydd then and scooped up his granddaughter, lifting her to see through the top of the window. “Look, precious! There’s your tada!”

Dafydd spotted Adam and Gwyneth’s tall figures and then his little daughter, and began waving to her.

“Tada!” she shrieked. “It’s my tada!”

Gwyneth picked up Huw and pointed. “Look, Huw. There’s your tada.” He smiled, but showed no sign of recognition.

Dafydd was waiting at the stairs as the train came to a halt. He tenderly helped Beth down to the ground and gave her a quick peck on the lips. Noticing that Adam was having trouble keeping Elen from jumping out of his arms, he reached up and plucked his little girl from her grandfather.

“Tada, Tada, I missed you!” she cried as she threw her arms around his neck and clung to him while Beth smiled happily. Adam turned to assist Bronwen and Gwyneth, who was carrying Huw, and then A.C. jumped down to the ground.

“How’s my boy?” Dafydd asked, but Huw clung to Gwyneth and looked at his father with big eyes. Dafydd was not unprepared for this reaction so he said calmly, “I have a couple of hackney cabs waiting to take us to the hotel. I thought Bethan should rest a day before we start back home.” He leaned over and kissed her properly, still holding Elen who refused to leave her father’s arms.

“Excellent idea,” Adam agreed and Bronwen nodded.

“My friend, Charles Edgerton, and his wife have invited all of us to dine with them at the rectory. They have a little boy about Huw’s age, so it will be much more comfortable than dining at a restaurant.” The others nodded their agreement, but just then Dafydd noticed the ring on Gwyneth’s left hand.

“You and Mark are engaged?” he asked with a warm smile.

Gwyneth blushed and nodded.

“Well, we can talk more at the hotel,” Dafydd said with a smile. “I’ll just go see to your baggage. The cabs are right over there,” and he gestured.

“I’ll come with you,” Adam said. “A.C., would you please escort you mother and sisters to the cabs?”

“Yes, sir,” A.C. stated, visibly swelling with pride at being treated as a man.

In the cab on the way to the hotel, Dafydd, who held Elen on his lap, placed his arm around Beth and she leaned her head against his broad shoulder. “I’m so glad to see you, darling, but surprised.”

“Ewyrth Rhys came on behalf of the congregation to tell me they wanted me to travel here to meet you because they thought we’d been apart too long. I didn’t argue with them, especially after the wonderful news you’d already shared.”

“I gonna get a baby sister, Tada,” Elen announced then, wanting her tada’s attention all for herself.

“Well now, Elen fach, you might get another brother,” he said, pinching her rosy cheek.

“I wanna sister,” Elen declared stubbornly.

“Want Pa-pa,” Huw said then, his lip sticking out in a pout since the rest of the family had taken the second cab.

“You’ll see Pa-pa as soon as we get to the hotel,” Beth said soothingly to her little boy. “Wouldn’t you like to sit on Tada’s lap?” she coaxed.

“No, want Pa-pa,” Huw replied, his chin beginning to quiver and his eyes to fill with tears.

“It’s all right, Anwyld,” Dafydd said softly. “I knew Huw bach might forget me after all this time, but he’ll remember me soon. We just have to give him time.” He leaned over and kissed her lightly. “Now, tell me all about the wedding and our new brother-in-law.”

Before Beth could open her mouth, Elen piped up. “Auntie Manda is pitty, Tada. And Unca Willum is nice. He took me ‘n’ Huw to ride swan boat.”

Beth said with a smile, “Yes, Elen and Huw both enjoyed riding the swan boats in Boston.”

“I got to ride Pa-pa’s horsy and Huw rode wiv Mama,” Elen continued excitedly. “And we saw Geatganpa and Hendaid and Hennain and Unca Joe and Benj and Sara and Auntie Anbell.”

“It sounds like you had a wonderful time,” Dafydd said, sharing a smile with Beth at the exuberance of their normally shy little girl.

“Why don’t you tell Tada about Auntie Miranda and Uncle William’s house?” Beth suggested.

“It’s big, Tada,” Elen said stretching her arms to illustrate, “and they have funny outhouse.”

Seeing her husband’s puzzled expression Beth explained, “They have a brand-new WC made of porcelain that flushes the waste away.” She added with a grin, “William is very proud of having the most modern WC.”

“Geatganpa lives in a big house and he has lots of cows and piggies and chickens,” Elen continued.

“Horsies,” Huw interjected with a big grin, and Beth said, “That’s right, Huw bach; Great-grandpa has lots of horses.” She smiled at her baby and then said quickly, “The wedding was lovely and so was the reception. Everyone had a marvelous time except for William’s mother. I’m afraid she is exactly as Miranda painted her.” She added with a giggle, “William’s father kept flirting with Mama.”

“You’re joking!” Dafydd replied but Beth shook her head.

“No. You could see Daddy was getting really angry and poor Mama was embarrassed.” She stopped and added in a low voice, “The only other unfortunate incident was that A.C. broke his promise not to climb any more trees and he disobeyed Daddy. I was really surprised that he disobeyed, knowing what the outcome would be, but I think he’s learned his lesson. Not so much from his punishment, but from seeing how he disappointed all the rest of us.”

“I’m afraid A.C. does seem to have to learn things the hard way,” Dafydd replied, reaching for her hand and giving it a squeeze.

“Mista Buckshot letted me help set the table,” Elen inserted proudly, and Beth added with a smile, “Yes, you were very helpful and Mama was proud of you.” Then she said to Dafydd, “The graduation was very impressive. All the young women wore caps and gowns. William was as proud of Miranda as any of us. Daddy took some photographs of her in her cap and gown, holding her diploma and he took some of all of us at the wedding.” She smiled wistfully then, saying quietly, “It was wonderful seeing Grandpa again, but sad knowing that it was probably the last time.” Dafydd squeezed her hand then and she continued, “He was so happy to see Elen and Huw and to know about the baby.” She sighed. “I suppose it was probably the last time we’ll see Tad-cu and Mam-gu, too.” She smiled faintly as she added, “You may have missed Miranda and William’s wedding, but you’ll soon be marrying Gwyneth and Mark.”

“Have they set a date?” Dafydd said in surprise and Beth nodded.

“The first Saturday in February,” Beth replied and then added, “Poor Gwyneth is dreading having to tell Douglas.”

“It won’t be easy, and probably she should have told him earlier. I know she meant to be kind, but in the end, I’m afraid she’s made it harder for him,” Dafydd said quietly. “Every time I saw him, he’d ask if I had any news about her.”

“You need to tell us what’s been happening while we’ve been gone,” Beth said then with a smile.

“Oh, Nani had a litter of four puppies,” Dafydd began and Huw squealed, “Puppies!” and grinned at his father, who grinned back. “They’ve started construction on the courthouse; it’s going to be on the corner of Sheaffe and Daintree. Oh, and they’re building an office for the District Rabbit Board on Scarr Street. And a lot of new houses are being built. I think you’ll all be surprised.”

“The town seems to be growing so fast now,” Beth said, shaking her head slightly.

“Yes, it really is,” Dafydd agreed as their hackney cab pulled up in front of the hotel.

Dinner with the Edgertons was very pleasant and as they were leaving, Bronwen said, “Elen and Huw, I have a surprise for you. You are going to sleep with me and Pa-pa tonight.”

Huw grinned happily but Elen’s lower lip came out in a pout. “I wanna sleep wiv Tada,” she whined.

“You’ll see Tada in the morning, but he and your mama want to spend some time together,” Adam said firmly. Elen still pouted, but she didn’t make a fuss. Beth and Dafydd smiled gratefully at the older couple.

By the time they reached Cloncurry, Dafydd had re-forged his bond with Huw. Poor Beth was in her sixth month and heartily sick of traveling. Everyone was happy to be returning home, except Gwyneth. She dreaded having to tell Douglas that she was going to marry Mark, for she knew she was going to hurt him badly. The sun was going down as they approached the town. Both the little ones were sleeping as Adam pulled the surrey in front of the rectory. He let A.C. hold the reins while he carried a sleeping Elen and Dafydd held his son in one arm and offered the other to his wife.

Friends and neighbors called their hellos to the Cartwrights as they headed to their own home and Adam said quietly, “I think we can expect a visit from Douglas.”

“I can’t see him tonight,” Gwyneth replied in an anguished voice.

“I’ll tell him that you’re gonna marry Mark if you want me to,” A.C. offered magnanimously, not understanding why the idea upset his sister so much.

“That’s a generous offer, A.C. bach,” Bronwen replied, managing to keep her face straight, “but this is something Gwyneth has to do. She owes it to Douglas. However, I agree it can wait until tomorrow; we’re all tired now.”

“I’m not,” her energetic son replied. “I wanted to say g’day to Robby. Please?”

Adam shook his head slightly but then seeing his son’s dejected expression he answered, “All right, after supper. But you can’t stay very long. You’ll see Robby tomorrow at school.”

“I forgot about school,” A.C. said in a disgusted tone that made his parents and older sister smile.

Lady and Duchess were patrolling their territory, spotted their family immediately, and began running alongside the surrey, barking hysterically. As soon as Adam brought the surrey to a halt, A.C. and Gwyneth jumped out. She picked up Lady and he picked up Duchess, and both dogs began covering their faces in kisses. Adam shook his head in bemusement and then helped Bronwen down while Mary, hearing the dogs barking, had come out to see the cause. Rhys and Matilda had just sat down to supper, but hearing the commotion next door, stepped onto their verandah and were now hurrying over to welcome the Cartwrights home.

Matilda insisted they have supper with them and soon the six of them were gathered in the Davies’ dining room, talking about Miranda’s graduation and wedding and congratulating Gwyneth on her engagement. Just as Daisy was serving dessert, there was a knock at the front door. “Now I wonder who that could be?” Rhys mused as Daisy went to answer the door. A minute later Douglas Campbell’s tall, muscular frame filled the doorway, his face lighting up with joy at the sight of Gwyneth. Adam said quickly in an authoritative tone, “Douglas, would you mind calling on Gwyneth tomorrow? We’d like a chance to spend some time with the Davies this evening.”

“Of course,” Douglas replied with obvious reluctance, managing to tear his eyes from Gwyneth’s face. She’d met his eyes for a moment and seen such longing, such love, and was horrified to feel a wave of desire at the sight of his broad shoulders and muscular body. She quickly hid her left hand under her napkin, lest he see her engagement ring accidentally.

After his departure, only A.C. was oblivious to the change in atmosphere. “May I go visit Robby now?” he asked through a mouthful of Spotted Dick.

“Don’t talk with your mouth full,” Bronwen responded automatically. “When you’ve finished your pudding, then you may go.”

“But you’re just to say hello and then come back home,” Adam reminded him. Then he turned to his friend and business partner. “Dafydd told us a number of new houses are being built; would you mind if I took one more day off so Gwyneth and I could do some house hunting? I told Mark I’d help her choose one for them.”

“Not at all,” Rhys replied, and they were all pleased to see Gwyneth looked happy again at the prospect of choosing a home for herself and Mark.

The next morning as the four Cartwrights gathered in the dining room for breakfast, Bronwen asked, “Do you mind if I come with you and Daddy this morning? Not to offer my opinion, but just for company.”

“Of course you’re welcome, Mama,” Gwyneth said with a grin. “And I’d value your opinion.”

“I’ll be glad to come and give you mine,” A.C. offered enthusiastically.

“That’s very kind of you, Jackeroo,” Adam said with a straight face, although his eyes twinkled, “but I’m afraid you’ll be too busy at school to offer us your expert opinion.”

A.C. grinned back at his dad, knowing his leg was being pulled, and then asked anxiously, “We’re still gonna start work on our scull, right?”

“I said we would,” Adam replied.

“Robby wants to help; his dad said he could, if it’s okay with you,” and the boy grinned when his dad nodded his permission. Gwyneth and Bronwen exchanged little smiles. Robby spent so much time at the Cartwrights’ home that he seemed like a second son. He’d discovered that while A.C.’s dad might look old, he was more willing to play catch or go fishing, swimming and riding than his own was. It was Adam who’d taught Robby to ride, and Rhiannon, Miranda’s old cob, was Robby’s mount whenever he and A.C. went riding.

“Speaking of school,” Bronwen interjected, “you’d better hurry or you’ll be late.”

A.C. nodded and then proceeded to wolf down his scrambled eggs and bacon, causing his mama to shake her head and sigh because that wasn’t what she’d meant. Not long after he’d dashed out the door with his schoolbooks, the other three headed to Alice and Margaret Streets, where Dafydd had told them several new houses were going up. Adam saw immediately that the houses were either what was known as a “hip house” because of the veranda jutting out at the back and front, or a “pyramid house”, which got its name from the shape of its roof. (Pyramid houses also had verandahs at the back and front.) They were all small houses; the hip houses tended to have three or four small rooms while the pyramid houses had three or four slightly larger rooms. After discussion and after Adam had a chance to examine the structures, Gwyneth narrowed her decision to two of the pyramid houses on Margaret Street, a quiet cul-de-sac. Adam decided he would meet with the builder after they had dinner while the two women had already made plans to visit with Matilda so they could look at her pattern books and choose one for Gwyneth’s wedding dress.

When A.C. and Robby arrived home from school, they found Adam had already purchased lumber and soon the three of them were busy working on the scull while the women were in the library busily cutting the pieces of the wedding dress. In the midst of their talking and cutting, Mary walked into the library, her expression somber.

“Mister Douglas is here to see you, Miss Gwyneth,” she said quietly. The two older women exchanged uneasy glances as Gwyneth left the room, her expression mournful. “He’s waiting in the drawing room,” Mary said and then went back into the kitchen to finish preparing supper.

Douglas was pacing the room impatiently, but when he saw Gwyneth, his countenance reflected his joy and his love. “Oh, Gwyneth, my love, I’ve missed you so,” he said and tried to take her in his arms, but she eluded him.

“Douglas, I’m sorry,” she began, nervously twisting the diamond ring on her left hand, and he suddenly noticed it.

“You’re engaged to Pentreath,” he said in a voice that wasn’t quite steady. “You’re going to tell me that you’re sorry, but you’re going to marry him.”

“I never wanted to hurt you, Douglas. Please believe me,” she said, her eyes filling with tears behind her spectacles.

“You mean everything to me,” he said, grabbing her arms and pulling her close. “I’ve tried so hard to be the man you wanted me to be, and now, it’s all for nothing. I’m just supposed to stand by and watch you marry Pentreath, knowing that you want me as much as I want you,” and he fastened his mouth on her hungrily. For a moment, she felt her own desire flare and returned his kiss, but then she turned her head aside and pushed at him. He tried to capture her mouth again, but when she moved her head away, his shoulders slumped in defeat and he dropped his hand to his side.

“I’ll be damned if I’ll wish you happiness,” he said bitterly and strode from the room.

Adam entered the room silently a short time later, and found his daughter huddled on the settee, sobbing uncontrollably. He sat beside her, putting his arm around her heaving shoulders, and she turned to bury her face on his chest, soaking his shirt. When she had no more tears left, he wordlessly handed her his handkerchief so she could clean her spectacles and then blow her streaming nose.

“It’s not your fault, Punkin,” he said gently when she’d finished. “Life isn’t fair. However, Douglas is not the first man to be disappointed in love, and although he may not believe it now, his life is not over. He has a lot going for him and someday he’ll fall in love again and hopefully she’ll return his love. But I don’t want you worrying about him. You have to concentrate on the life you and Mark are going to share.” After a long moment, she nodded to show she understood.

Cloncurry was a typical small town and soon everyone knew that Gwyneth Cartwright was engaged to Mark Pentreath and Douglas Campbell was drowning his sorrows in whiskey at the Prince of Wales, brawling with anyone who gave him the slightest excuse. Just about everyone kept out of his way, and every evening he would sit in a back corner and drink himself senseless. At closing time, the owner would persuade a couple of men to haul Douglas’ six foot, three inch, sixteen stone body to a room to sleep it off.

This went on for nearly two weeks, but early one evening, all conversation at the Prince of Wales ceased when Melanie Andrews walked through the door.

“Miss Andrews!” Mr. Gibson said in a shocked tone. “You shouldn’t be here.”

“I need to speak with Douglas Campbell and I know this is where I can find him,” Melanie replied firmly.

“No, Miss Andrews, Douglas Campbell is in no condition to speak with a lady,” Mr. Gibson stated.

“Nevertheless, I must try,” she said. “Could you point me in his direction?”

Very reluctantly, Mr. Gibson pointed to a dark corner in the back of the pub.

As Melanie drew near, she was relieved to see that Douglas was only one sheet to the wind. His eyes were bloodshot, but the hand holding his glass of whiskey was still steady. He smiled when he saw her, but it was not a pleasant smile.

“Ah. Melanie, come to offer me comfort, have you?” he slurred, pulling her onto his lap and bending to capture her mouth with his.

She shoved him away and jumped out of reach. “Not that kind of comfort. In fact, I’ve come here to tell you how disappointed I am in you.”

His expression hardened but then his features relaxed and he replied, “You’ve got company. My parents are disappointed as well.”

“And so is Gwyneth,” Melanie said softly and for a moment she thought he was going to cry but instead he twisted his features into a sneer.

“She doesn’t give a damn about me,” and he picked up his shot of whiskey and downed it before pouring another.

“She doesn’t care the way you want her to care, but that doesn’t mean she has no feeling for you and you know it. That’s why you are doing this,” she said gesturing with her hands at the half empty bottle of whiskey and his disreputable condition. “To punish her. I think you’ve punished her enough for the crime of not loving you more than Mark.”

“You don’t understand,” he said before reaching for his glass, but she put her hand over his.

“Yes, I do. I understand only too well how much it hurts to watch the one I love give his heart to someone else,” and for the first time she made no effort to hide the love she felt. His eyes widened slightly and she continued. “If you can’t bear to see her with Mark, then find a job somewhere else. You’re a skilled printer and an intelligent man; don’t let this one disappointment sour your whole life.”

He was quiet, but he shoved the glass away. “I’ll think about what you said.”

She stood and turned to go. At the doorway she turned back. “If you do decide to go, would you write me and let me know how you are doing?”

He shook his head slowly. “It would be cruel to give you false hope. I have learned that much.” She turned then and ran from the room so he wouldn’t see her break down in tears.

{ { { {

It was a glorious autumn morning: the sky was that intense cerulean only seen on a sunny October day and the air was crisp enough that Ben was wearing the wool cardigan Miranda had given him the previous year as a Christmas gift. He and Paul were sitting on the front porch enjoying the sunshine and playing a game of chess when Buckshot returned from a trip to town for supplies.

“Gotcha some letters, Mr. Ben,” he called as he climbed off the buckboard, waving a fistful of envelopes. He hurried over and placed them on the space the two elderly men had made on the table.

“Since Joe isn’t back from Boston, let’s go ahead and read the letters,” Ben said with a smile, and his old friend nodded with a matching grin. “Let’s see. Letters from Adam, Gwyneth, and Mrs. William Gordon. I think I’ll start with Miranda’s,” he said, getting out his bifocals. “I’m anxious to hear how she’s adjusting to married life.”

October 18, 1898

Dear Grandpa,

I hope you’ll forgive me for not writing you more than a short note before this, but I’ll try to make up for that with this letter.

Since William and I knew we didn’t need to be back in Hanover until the end of August, we decided to stop and visit some cities on our route home. The first we visited was Kansas City. We saw the Hannibal Bridge, the first to span the Missouri River. I think Daddy would have been impressed. William wanted to visit the stockyard and the Livestock Exchange. I found the Exchange more interesting than the stockyard, which was loud and smelly. Kansas City has a lovely public park, donated by a Col. Swope, hence it is named Swope Park. We had the hotel restaurant prepare us a picnic lunch and we spent the afternoon in the park. The next day we visited Independence. I imagine it looks different than the town you saw back in the 1840s. Now, it is an attractive small town with lovely tree lined streets and a red-brick courthouse in the town square. Not a lot to see, but we rented some horses and went for a nice ride in the afternoon and saw some of the countryside, perhaps even where you and Daddy and Grandma Inger had camped.

We spent two days visiting Kansas City and Independence. The other city we visited was Chicago. I told William that since we visited the stockyards in Kansas City, I would prefer not to see those in Chicago. We did visit the area known as the Loop, which contains a high concentration of high rise buildings, and we rode the elevator to the observatory of the Masonic Temple, which is twenty-one stories high! It seemed strange to be that far off the ground but the view was spectacular! I had a chance to do a little shopping at the Marshall Field Wholesale Store. We also saw Hull House. We had both read about Jane Addams and her efforts to help Chicago’s poor and we were interested in seeing her work firsthand. We spent almost an entire day visiting the Zoo. I think Duchess the elephant was my favourite. The roos made me a bit homesick for the Outback. During our three days in Chicago we rode both the street cars and the elevated railroad. I think you can tell I had a marvellous time.

William had arranged with our maid, Nancy, to have the house aired and ready for us when we returned on August 25. She’d aired the house and dusted, but neglected to make up the bed, so when we arrived late that evening, feeling rather tired, we had to make up our own bed.

Our cook, Mrs. Matthews, arrived on time the next morning and prepared a hearty breakfast for us. (Like Mama, I prefer tea and toast; Mrs. Matthews was affronted thinking I didn’t care for her cooking but I explained I never eat more than toast for breakfast and promised to do justice to the dinner she prepared.) After we finished breakfast and I had my talk with Mrs. Matthews, William told me he was going to show me my wedding gift. (He’d already explained he couldn’t give it to me until we returned home.) He’d bought me a beautiful mahogany bay mare, whom I’ve named Desdemona. She is a Saddlebred and she has the smoothest gait of any horse I’ve ever ridden. William told me that he’d asked Daddy’s advice and that he and A.C. picked Desdemona out for me. We went for a ride and then we returned home to dinner. Mrs. Matthews had prepared sirloin steaks, but they were as tough as shoe leather. I told her as diplomatically as I could that I preferred my beef a little rare. She did not take it well and I was afraid she was going to give her notice, but I was able to soothe her. That wasn’t the first time that I had to explain my preferences, which would cause her to be insulted and then I’d have to calm her down. (These scenes occur much less frequently now, I am happy to report.)

After dinner, William went to visit with his colleague, Dr. Bronson, and I began to address my wedding cards. Some of the ones I had looked at in Boston were much too grandiose for my taste; I chose a plain card ornamented only by a silver edge. I had to address cards for each faculty member and his spouse, and in order to keep my handwriting neat, I had to write slowly and carefully. I wasn’t quite finished when William returned for supper. We decided the cards could wait until the next day.

I see I forgot to mention that after I had my talk with Mrs. Matthews and before we went riding, I had to have a talk with Nancy. She apologized for the confusion about our arrival date. (I think she was afraid she’d lose her position.) She seems pleasant and hardworking, if perhaps a bit slow.

The next day I finished the wedding cards and then we did some shopping. (We still needed to buy some rugs and we decided to buy a piano so I can continue playing.) The piano was going to be delivered the next day so we stayed home and unpacked William’s books, which had arrived the previous day while we were shopping. Oh, and we hung our diplomas, side by side, on the wall in the library. After the piano arrived, we went for another ride. We only had one last day to spend together before we had to be at home to receive calls.

I don’t know how calls on newlyweds are done in Nevada, but here in New England it is very formal. Mrs. Alden had already warned me that I must never receive a visitor alone. She also told me that I would be expected to serve wedding cake and wine to my guests, so while we were all visiting Hanover before the wedding, I made arrangements with a bakery to make us a sponge cake with marzipan and white icing and deliver it the first day we were to begin receiving calls. Promptly at 10 o’clock, President and Mrs. Tucker and Professor and Mrs. Smith arrived. (Professor Smith is the Professor of Modern History, which means he is William’s superior.) I was nervous but William told me afterward that I hid it very well. President Tucker congratulated me on earning my degree from Radcliffe. They all were interested in hearing about the wedding and Professor Smith quizzed William on what Daddy told us about his trip west by wagon train.

Just as they were leaving, Dr. Bronson and his wife arrived. (I had stayed with them on my visit to Hanover in the spring, and it was very nice to see familiar faces.) Lucy Bronson is only a few years my senior, and we had enjoyed each other’s company during my visit. She and her husband are expecting their first child about the same time Beth’s baby is due.

Everyone who visited was kind and friendly, but many of the faculty wives were much older than I. Besides Lucy Bronson, there are two others near my age: Lydia Tompkins and Gertrude Templeton. Lydia Tompkins’ husband is an assistant professor at the Thayer School of Engineering and Gertrude Templeton’s husband is an assistant professor of Medieval History. Lydia and her husband were only married six months ago while Gertrude and her husband have been married for two years and have a little girl who is not quite a year old.

Once our days for receiving wedding calls were over, we began to settle into our new routine. Classes began the first week in September, so I am on my own until William returns for luncheon. Every Thursday afternoon, we have tea for William’s students. It feels so strange to be the hostess, pouring all those cups of tea. (Mrs. Matthews is not much of a baker so on those days I have tea cake and petit fours delivered to our house by the bakery.) In addition, Mrs. Matthews makes plenty of bread and butter and cucumber sandwiches but these young men have enormous appetites and we never have any food left over. I was hoping to have cerebral conversations, but I’m afraid I shock them if I try to talk about current events or anything of a serious nature. Even Lucy, Lydia and Gertrude have no interest in talking about anything but their children or the latest fashions. At least William will talk with me about more important topics.

I’m also taking advantage of the Dartmouth Bookstore and doing a lot of reading. And Desdemona and I go for a ride every afternoon unless it’s raining. It seems so strange to have no set schedule each day. I was so used to attending classes and studying afterwards that I feel somewhat at loose ends now. I suppose it is because married life is so new to me, but I’m hopeful that we will soon settle into a routine.

We had been invited to dine several times and last Friday evening we gave our first dinner party. I was so nervous. I talked the menu over with Mrs. Matthews. I suppose I was thinking in terms of the type of dinners Mrs. Alden used to give, but I quickly realized beef bourguignon, duck a l’Orange and coq au vin were beyond her capabilities. We settled on a rib roast and side dishes of cauliflower in cheese sauce and artichokes in butter sauce and pumpkin pie for dessert. I didn’t feel ready to host a large dinner party so we only invited the Bronsons and the Templetons since they are all part of the history department. The dinner went smoothly except the roast was a bit overdone. Afterward I played the piano and we sang. It was a pleasant evening.

I promise I will be a more faithful correspondent in the future.

Your loving granddaughter,

Miranda

P.S. William has reminded me to say hello from him and that he hopes you are in good health.

Dr. Martin smiled at his friend. “It sounds as though Miranda and her professor are enjoying marital bliss.”

Ben nodded and then remarked, “She sounds so much like Liz did, just before her father and I opened the chandlery. Then she had the bookkeeping to keep her busy and before long, Adam was on his way. I hope Miranda will soon be expecting a child. I think she’ll have less interest in current events and such once she has a baby to look after.” He paused and then said, “I think I’ll read Gwyneth’s letter next, and save Adam’s for last.”

September 17, 1898

Dear Grandpa,

My life since I returned to Cloncurry has veered from overflowing joy to unbearable sadness. The day we arrived in Sydney, Mark and Llywelyn met us at the dock and that evening Mark proposed to me. We are going to be married the first Saturday in February. It will be a very small, private wedding. I had wanted a small reception but Daddy said all the men who work at Cartwright & Davies know us and they know Mark’s family so it wouldn’t be right not to invite them to the reception, and Mama said our neighbours and the Pentreaths’ neighbours should also be invited. It’s beginning to look as though most of Cloncurry will be attending the reception.

The town really grew while I was living in Brisbane. They’ve built several new houses and Daddy, at our request, helped me choose one for Mark and me. We’ll have all my furniture and other things shipped from Brisbane, but they probably won’t arrive until sometime in November. Meanwhile, Aunt Matilda, Mama and I are working on curtains for the house and Beth is hooking some rugs for me. This is the overflowing joy I’ve experienced. The sadness centres on Douglas.

Oh, Grandpa, telling Douglas that I am marrying Mark was even more difficult than I had feared. He really loves me and it hurt so much to see the pain I caused him. If I had no feelings for him, I suppose it wouldn’t hurt as much, but I do care for Douglas. If I hadn’t met Mark, I would have accepted Douglas’ proposal and I believe we would be happily married. But the love I feel for Mark is stronger than what I feel for Douglas.

He took my rejection very badly and began drinking to forget his misery. That lasted for nearly two weeks but now he has left Cloncurry. He wrote me a letter and said Melanie had made him see that he was drinking as a way of punishing me, and he realized that was wrong. He said that he couldn’t bear to see me married to Mark, so he is going to find a new life somewhere else. He ended by writing that I was the love of his life, and even if he couldn’t have me, he would try to live so I would be proud of him. Poor Melanie is also heartbroken. I realize that it’s only in plays or novels that everyone finds his or her true-love. Life is much crueller.

I’ll close by saying I wish you could be here for my wedding, but I know you’ll be here in spirit.

Love,

Gwyneth

Ben shook his head. “Poor Gwyneth. In many ways, she is so like her father, but her tenderheartedness reminds me of Hoss.” He smiled at little at his old friend and said, “Now, let’s see what Adam has to say.”

September 5, 1898

Dear Pa,

The mail coach won’t be here again for two weeks, but I thought I’d start a letter to you today and then add on to it before it actually goes out in the mail. We had a pleasant voyage home but I know Tad and Mam were glad their journey had come to an end. Llywelyn and Mark were there to meet us and took care of arranging for hackney cabs and having everyone’s luggage delivered to the appropriate place, which was a great help. Mark asked to speak to me privately. (I’m sure you know why, but that is Gwyneth’s news to share so I won’t write anymore on that topic.)

When we arrived at Townsville, we were pleasantly surprised to discover Dafydd waiting to greet us. (Rhys told me later that he convinced the rest of Chapel Bethel to persuade Dafydd it was all right for him to be gone for a few weeks so he could be reunited with Beth and the children.) Elen was overjoyed to see her tada again, but at first Huw didn’t seem to recognize him. Dafydd was very patient and he and Huw were as close as ever by the time we reached Cloncurry. Poor Beth was heartily sick of traveling, and frankly, so were Bronwen and I.

September 10, 1898

Yesterday was the fifth anniversary of Penny’s death. It’s hard to believe that so many years have passed. I know that she would be just a few months from her eighteenth birthday, but I still see the pretty little girl all dressed up for her sister’s wedding, or the little imp wearing her hand-me-down knickerbockers with her hair stuffed under the cap she’d gotten from Llywelyn. I still miss her so much. We all went to visit her yesterday morning. To Elen and Huw she is the auntie who is in heaven with Jesus, and even A.C. knows her more through the stories Bronwen and I tell him than through his own memories. I couldn’t stop my tears when Gwyneth told her how much she wished she could be her maid of honor. How Penny would have loved it! But I must stop; it is too painful for me to write and I know it will be painful for you to read.

Ben stopped then, wiping his tears with his handkerchief and then blowing his nose. “Would you rather I read,” Paul asked gently and Ben nodded, not trusting his voice.

September 14, 1898

A.C. and I (along with his friend, Robby) have been working industriously on our scull. It’s coming along; I actually think I could work faster alone but I am trying to be patient even when they don’t listen to my instructions and end up having to redo a task. A.C., in particular, tends to be too impulsive and doesn’t think things through, as he demonstrated by that little escapade at the shivaree. Sometimes I really worry about that boy.

Ben interrupted then and said with a frown, “That’s just the way he used to talk about Joe when he was young, and I remember all the arguments and fights I had to break up between them.”

“But he and Joe are close now,” Paul said gently. “I’m not really surprised since most men want to see themselves in their sons, but in Adam’s case, it’s Miranda who has inherited his logical, analytical mind and his practicality.”

“Whereas A.C. has his mother’s temperament,” Ben finished. “It’s interesting that the very qualities he finds endearing in her, should irritate him in A.C. You’re right, of course, about Adam and Joe so I know I shouldn’t worry.” He smiled and said, “Let’s get back to Adam’s letter.”

Gwyneth wrote Mark to let him know that she has selected a house for the two of them. (I had arranged to make Mark a loan so he could afford a down payment.) It’s a small house but not as small as our cabin was. It has two bedrooms plus a kitchen and a parlor and a verandah in the front and back. It’s on a quiet little cul-de-sac not too far from either our house or the rectory. Since the houses on the street are brand new, only one is occupied, by another young couple with a child. I imagine most of their neighbors will be young couples like themselves. We’re arranging for Gwyneth’s belongings to be transported from Brisbane, but it will take time. Still, she can have everything arranged as she likes before they are ready to move in.

September 18

The mail coach should arrive tomorrow so I wanted to finish my letter. Douglas did not take the news of Gwyneth’s engagement well. Bronwen and I both told Gwyneth that she was not responsible if Douglas chose to drown his sorrow in alcohol, but you know my quiet girl. She does care for him and it grieved her deeply to know he seemed bent on self-destruction. From what I’ve heard, Gwyneth’s friend, Melanie Andrews, apparently went to the pub/saloon and confronted Douglas. Whatever she said to him had the effect of sobering him up. However, he has left Cloncurry, which has upset his parents since he was their only son. I wouldn’t say we had been friends, but they are very cold to us now. I can’t find it in my heart to blame them. I can imagine how I would feel if A.C. left Cloncurry because the girl he loved chose someone else. Perhaps in time, Douglas will return, hopefully with a wife.

I only have one other bit of news to relate. Gwyneth’s and Mark’s won’t be the only wedding in our family in 1899. Llywelyn confided in me that he plans on proposing to Miranda’s friend Emma and asked if I would design their house. I told him I’d be happy to and that it would be our wedding gift to them. I think they’ll be happy together. Emma is very serious, just like Miranda, and more reserved whereas you know Llywelyn is more outgoing—rather the reverse of me and Bronwen.

That’s all the news I can think of for now. Bronwen and A.C. both send their love. (He’s not much of a letter writer, but I’ll see if I can get him to write you the next time the mail coach will be in town.)

Affectionately yours,

Adam

Ben refolded Adam’s letter and placed it back in its envelope. “I’m sorry for the Campbells, but I’m glad this Douglas has left Cloncurry. I’m sure it’s best for him as well as Gwyneth and Mark.” He smiled a little before adding, “Now, let’s return to our game, shall we?”

Chapter 5

For the first time in four days, it wasn’t the sound of pouring rain beating against the roof and windowpanes that woke Dafydd; it was the restless movements of his very pregnant wife.

“Can’t sleep?” he asked through a yawn.

“No, but I didn’t mean to wake you. This baby is more restless than I remember Elen or Huw being,” Beth replied with a tired smile. “At least the rain has stopped for now. I’ve been longing for some sunshine. I’ll just dress Elen and Huw in their oldest clothes and let them play in the mud.”

They shared a smile and then he said, “Since it’s not raining I really should go pay some calls, but I hate leaving you.”

“I’ll be fine, darling. It’s only the end of November and the baby isn’t due until for another week. Besides, if I do go into labor while you’re gone, then I’ll just go next door and tell Jenna Hughnans. She and I have already worked it all out: Since today is Saturday and there isn’t any school, she’ll send Tegen for Dr. Brooke, Elowen will watch Huw and Elen along with her younger brother and sister, and Jenna will come stay with me until Dr. Brooke gets here. As soon as Tegen gets back from fetching Dr. Brooke, then she’ll go tell Mama.” Beth smiled and said, “See, there’s nothing for you to worry about.”

“Husbands always worry,” he said with a tender smile. “Just ask Tada.”

She frowned a little at that, saying, “Poor Daddy. Mama told me that she thought he suffered more than she did with each birth.”

Dafydd put an arm about her shoulders then. “But your mam gave birth to five healthy babies with no complications and I’m praying that you will take after her.” He sighed a little and said, “I’ll make my calls; I probably won’t be back until supper.”

Beth nodded and then said, “Since I can’t sleep anyway, I’ll fix your breakfast and let you get a little more sleep.”

The rectory’s kitchen had a window that overlooked the backyard, so right after breakfast, Beth let the children play while she watched them as she washed the dishes. Elen and Huw were ecstatic at the thought of playing in the mud. Huw in particular loved the feeling of the mud oozing up between his bare toes. Elen enjoyed making mud pies for her dolly and Wiggles, her stuffed rabbit. Soon Nani and Colwyn, the puppy they had decided to keep, came to join the fun. Watching, Beth realized with dismay that not only would her two little ones need a bath, but the two dogs as well. Just then she felt a contraction. She was surprised but not alarmed. She didn’t want the children covered in mud if they did have to go to the neighbors so she filled the round wooden wash tub with water and then stepped to the backdoor and called for Elen and Huw.

“No, don’t wanna come inside, Mama,” Elen whined while Huw continued to chase the two little terriers.

“Elen Penelope! Huw Adda! You come inside this minute or we’ll have a necessary talk!” Beth called firmly and this time the children reluctantly obeyed. Once they were inside, she helped them both take off their muddy frocks and she discovered Huw’s nappy was wet.

“Now, both of you into the tub,” she said firmly. Elen stepped in so Beth handed her a bar of Pears’ soap and Huw used that moment to run away as fast as his chubby little legs would take him.

“Huw!” Beth exclaimed and waddled after him while Elen began to lather the soap on her hands and arms. A few minutes later Beth returned dragging a pouting Huw. As Beth placed her wriggling little boy in the wooden tub, she felt her second contraction.

“I’m done, Mama,” Elen announced.

Beth, who was trying to wash a screaming Huw said, “Wait just a minute and then Mama can help you dry off.”

“No, I’m a big girl. I dry myself,” Elen announced. She got out of the tub carefully and then reached for the towel her mama had draped over a chair. Beth tried to keep one eye on Elen and the other plus both hands on her squirming, crying little boy. Elen decided she was dry enough and reached for her cotton drawers and sat on the kitchen floor to put her feet through the legs. Beth lifted the wet, slippery twenty-one-month old out of the tub just as Nani and Colwyn barked at the backdoor to be let in. Beth was concentrating on drying Huw, who’d stopped crying but not wiggling, and didn’t notice Elen, clad only in her cotton drawers, run to open the door for the two muddy little dogs. She heard the dogs’ excited barking and looked up in time to see them tracking mud all over her clean kitchen floor and run toward the front of the house, where they’d track mud all over the rugs and furniture.

“Nani, Colwyn, sit!” she commanded sharply. The two dogs quivered with excited energy but obeyed. “Oh Elen, now your legs are muddy again,” Beth scolded and just then she felt another contraction, stronger than the previous two and both children saw her grimace.

She managed to get the two dogs back outside, dried Huw off and put a clean nappy on him before the next contraction. “We’re going to go over and see Mrs. Hughnan so you both need to put on your shoes and stockings,” she told the children with a big smile. Elen could put hers on, but still needed help fastening the strap and waited impatiently as Beth finished dressing Huw and laced up his boots.

Beth’s contractions were increasing in frequency and intensity, but she knew it was probably still hours before the baby would be born. However, she thought it best if she took the children next door now and let Jenna know that she’d need to send for Dr. Brooke later.

It was the middle Hughnan daughter, Tegen, who answered their knock.

“G’day, Tegen,” Elen said with a big smile and Huw echoed, “G’day.’

“G’day,” Tegen replied, adding, “won’t you come in?”

“Thank you,” Beth replied, and just then felt a sudden gush that she knew meant her water had broken.

Tegan saw the expression on her face and asked anxiously, “Are you all right, Mrs. Jones?”

Beth smiled reassuringly and said, “Yes, I’m fine. I would like to speak with your mother, but I think I’ll wait on the verandah.” The girl nodded and went to get her mother while Beth slowly eased herself onto one of the wicker chairs. She’d barely sat when the next contraction hit and it was so strong and so painful, she had to bite her lip to keep from groaning in pain and frightening her children. Jenna Hughnan, a friendly, capable woman ten years Beth’s senior, emerged just in time to see Beth’s grimace of pain.

“Baby’s on his way, I see,” she commented.

Beth nodded. “My water just broke so I think you’d best send Tegen to let Dr. Brooke know I’ll need him later today.

“Why don’t you leave Elen and Huw here with Elowen, and I’ll come back to the rectory with you,” Jenna suggested quietly and Beth agreed with relief. Jenna turned to the two children. “I made pasties today for our dinner. How would you two like to have dinner with Elowen, Jowan and Kerra? Wouldn’t that be fun?” Both children nodded eagerly for they’d eaten Mrs. Hughnan’s pasties before and liked them very much. “All right, you just come with me,” Jenna said cheerily and, smiling at Beth, she shepherded the two little ones inside. In a few minutes she and Tegen returned, just as another powerful contraction brought tears to the young mother’s eyes.

“Tegen,” Jenna said quietly, “you tell Dr. Brooke that I said he should come check on Mrs. Jones now. I think this baby may be coming sooner than she expects.” Tegen nodded and set off for the doctor’s home at a brisk pace. Beth suffered a couple more powerful contractions before they reached the rectory and Jenna suggested she lie down for a bit, but Beth said that she’d rather walk around the backyard.

That’s how Dr. Brooke found her, and her contractions were now more frequent and more intense. He had her lie down on the bed that Jenna had readied. He took one look and said with a smile, “I can see the baby’s head so I don’t think it will be too much longer.”

Tegen, meanwhile, had hurried to the Cartwrights’ house only to discover Bronwen and Gwyneth were both at Gwyneth and Mark’s house since Gwyneth’s furniture had arrived from Brisbane just that morning. By the time all the Cartwrights converged on the rectory, a smiling Jenna told them Beth had given birth to a healthy baby boy.

“I wana see him,” A.C. said excitedly, causing his older sister to roll her eyes.

“What I need you to do right now,” Bronwen said with a smile, “is go get Elen and Huw. They’re going to stay with us for a couple of days.”

“I’ll come with you,” Gwyneth added, seeing the disappointed look on her brother’s face.

As soon as they were out of earshot, Bronwen turned to Jenna. “They are both all right?”

“They’re fine,” Jenna reassured her. “He’s a lovely little boy.”

“I’m so glad you were able to be with her,” Bronwen said and Jenna replied, “I’m glad I was, too. This little boy was in a hurry to be born.” She added, “Now that you’re here, I’d better get back home.”

Bronwen found Beth propped up against some pillows looking tired but radiant, and holding a small bundle. “So, I understand I have a new grandson,” she said with a happy smile as she sat down on the side of the bed and Beth adjusted the blanket so her mama could see the baby’s face.

“Dylan was in a big hurry to be born, just like A.C., except he did at least wait for Dr. Brooke,” Beth said with an answering smile.

“Dylan Benjamin Jones. Your grandpa will be so pleased,” Bronwen replied. Just then they heard the front door slam and Elen and Huw could be heard shrieking, “Mama!” Dylan screwed up his little face and began to scream.

“I’ll go quiet them down,” Bronwen said, standing and moving quickly to the door as Beth began rocking her newborn in a soothing motion. A few minutes later after the baby had quieted, Bronwen led Elen and Huw into the room. “Here’s your new baby brother, Dylan,” she said quietly.

“I wanted a baby sister,” Elen said petulantly.

“Baby,” Huw said, walking over and staring at the little bundle his mama was holding.

“That’s right, Huw bach, this is your baby brother,” Beth said with a smile. Just then A.C. and Gwyneth appeared in the doorway.

“May we see the baby?” Gwyneth asked quietly and her sister nodded.

“Stone the crows, he’s awful small,” A.C. said, for once remembering to lower his voice.

“He’s so sweet,” Gwyneth said, putting her finger by his fist and feeling him grip it.

Beth looked at her sister and smiled. “This time next year, you may have a baby of your own,” she said softly and the two sisters shared a tender smile.

As Adam rode up to the stable that evening he found his two youngest children in the paddock waiting for him, each holding one of his grandchildren.

“Guess what, Dad! I got another nephew!” A.C. shouted while at the same time Elen shrieked, “I got a baby brother!”

“Beth had the baby?” Adam asked in surprise and Gwyneth nodded, putting a wriggling Elen down on the ground and taking her by the hand.

“I knew you’d want to go see them right away, so I went ahead and gave Elen and Huw their dinner.” She added in an undertone, “They want to sleep with you while Mama’s at Beth’s. Is that all right?”

He nodded with a grin adding, “Just make sure you put several nappies down for Huw so he doesn’t soak the bed. May I take Artemis?” She nodded so he turned to A.C. “Can you take care of Mercury for me, son?”

“Right,” the boy replied, handing Huw to Adam and taking the reins. Now that the horse was gone, Gwyneth let go of the little girl’s hand and Adam bent down to scoop her up in his arms as well.

He kissed each in turn and asked “Have you been good for Auntie Gwyneth?”

“Me good,” Huw announced firmly with a big grin.

“I was good,” Elen replied, looking at her tall aunt for confirmation.

“Yes, you were both good,” Gwyneth replied. “Now, let’s go back up to the house. Pa-pa wants to go see your mama and your new brother.

“Where’s my tada?” Elen asked anxiously.

“He’ll come back with me to see you, don’t you worry,” Adam replied, as he set the children down and then headed for the barn to saddle Artemis.

Beth had just finished nursing Dylan when Adam entered the room. “Where’s this new grandson of mine?” he queried with a smile.

“Would you like to hold him?’ she asked and Adam held out his arms.

“He’s beautiful, Princess,” he said, smiling at the tiny infant. “Your mama told me Dylan here was in just as big a hurry to arrive as your brother was.”

Beth replied with a smile, “Well, at least he waited for Dr. Brooke. I’m not sure if Jenna Hughnan was ready to act as a midwife.” Her father said a silent prayer of thanks that his beloved daughter had survived the ordeal and given him another precious grandson to love. Just then Dafydd burst into the room.

“Bethan, anwyld,” he said moving past Adam to sit on the bed and take his wife’s hands.

“We have another son, darling,” she said softly before he leaned over to kiss her.

When they broke apart, Adam said, “Reverend Dafydd Jones, allow me to present Master Dylan Benjamin Jones,” and he placed the baby into the proud father’s open arms.

{ { { {

“It is raining cats and dogs!” Joe said as he walked through the front door of the ranch house, his mackintosh dripping puddles on the hardwood floor until he kicked the braided rug beneath it. He smiled at his pa, who was happily sitting near the great room’s mammoth stone fireplace with a warm blanket covering his legs and his wool cardigan buttoned up over his chest. “Wettest March I can remember,” Joe added, hanging his tan Stetson on its hook beside the door.

“Did we get any mail from Queensland?” Ben asked anxiously.

“Sure did,” Joe replied with a grin as he brought forth with a flourish the package he’d kept hidden from his father’s view. “I’ll bet Adam’s sent some photographs along with a letter,” he added as he handed the package to his pa and leaned forward over the back of his chair.

Ben ripped through the paper and then Joe helped him pry open the small wooden crate stuffed with excelsior and extract a fat letter, a framed photograph and a small photograph album. Ben held up the framed photograph first.

“Gwyneth sure is a beautiful bride,” Joe commented as he gazed at his youngest niece’s tall, slender figure, dressed in white, standing next to her groom in his black morning coat and striped grey trousers.

“Indeed she is,” Ben said softly. “I wish I could have been there to see her take her vows.”

“I know,” Joe said, putting his hand on his pa’s shoulder and giving it a comforting squeeze. “But seeing the photograph is the next best thing.” He looked at it again and remarked, “I think Mark is about the happiest bridegroom I’ve ever seen, but he waited a long time for this day. I remember Beth writing us that she thought he was in love with Gwyneth back before her own wedding.” He paused, letting Ben gaze at the photograph of his granddaughter and her new husband before suggesting, “Why don’t we look at the album?”

Ben nodded and they opened the album to see a photograph of the bride and groom and their parents. “Bronwen looks so tiny standing between Gwyneth and Adam,” Joe said with an enormous grin and Ben had to chuckle his agreement. They turned the page and saw Beth and A.C. standing by Adam and Bronwen, and two dark-haired young women standing by Mark’s parents that they assumed must be his sisters. The next photograph was of Dafydd, Beth and their three children.

“Elen and Huw have grown so much since we saw them and that’s only been about seven months,” Ben commented wistfully.

“A.C. has grown, too,” Joe said, turning back to the previous page. “He’s taller than Beth now.” He wondered how much his own children would have grown when he saw them again in three months.

The remainder of the album contained individual photographs. There was one of A.C. standing by the completed scull; Elen was photographed proudly sitting on Sport, for she had received A.C.’s pony and tack for her fourth birthday; and Adam had photographed Huw smiling at his baby brother who was sleeping in his cradle. The final photograph was of Gwyneth in her wedding dress and veil, looking breathtakingly lovely. Ben studied each photograph carefully before turning to his son and saying, “Let’s read what Adam has to say.”

Joe took the letter from his father and began to read aloud.

February 11, 1899

Dear Pa and Joe,

Today has been a bittersweet one because it is the day I gave away the last of my girls. It seems like only yesterday that my four little girls were living here—laughing, fighting and playing. I can so vividly remember the mornings when all four of them would gather in our bed and ask me to tell them a story. Then for three short but wonderful years, all five of our children were with us. Now we only have A.C., and in seven years, he’ll be heading off to school and it will be just Bronwen and me. That will seem very strange. We will be married twenty-five years this May, and yet, except for the first nine months, it’s never been just the two of us.

Today was a typical one for February. We’ve had heavy rains for the past two days, so Mark, Llywelyn, and the Joneses all brought their wedding finery and dressed here. (Mark and Llywelyn used Nell’s old room, A.C. shared his with Dafydd and Huw and me and Bronwen shared our room with Beth and Elen. The other guests arrived wearing mackintoshes.

The ceremony was private just as Gwyneth and Mark wished. Mark’s parents and his two sisters attended. His older sister (who is younger than Gwyneth) is married and has two stepchildren as well as two of her own, and of course her family was there. His younger sister is engaged and so her finance attended. Emma Lawrence, who is now officially engaged to Llywelyn, was invited and came with Rhys and Matilda. Naturally, we all wished that both of you and Tad and Mam could have been with us, but we knew you were there in spirit.

Llywelyn was Mark’s best man and Beth her sister’s matron of honor. Dafydd performed the ceremony and so Bronwen and I were in charge of Elen, Huw and Dylan, who thankfully slept through the entire ceremony; I had nightmares of his waking and the ceremony stopping while Beth nursed him.

Joe started laughing at that mental picture and even Ben couldn’t help chuckling.

As you can see from the photographs, Gwyneth was a beautiful bride. She and Mark had waited a long time for this day and they were both radiant. Mark actually wept at the sight of Gwyneth in her wedding gown coming down the stairs on my arm. Just as with Dafydd and William, I know he will love and cherish my precious daughter.

As bittersweet as the moment has been every time I’ve had to answer the question, “Who giveth this woman to be married to this man?” I still wish I could have answered it one more time. On a special day such as this, Penny is in our thoughts and hearts more than ever. Just as she’d done for Miranda on her wedding day, Bronwen let Gwyneth borrow the locket I gave her that has a lock of Penny’s hair and her picture, so she could feel Penny was with her on her special day. Gwyneth and Penny were always so close and I’m sure Penny would have been Gwyneth’s maid of honor. Bronwen told me afterward she could see how much it meant to Gwyneth to think her baby sister was still part of the happiest day of her life. Bronwen said she and Gwyneth and Beth were crying and only able to stop when Beth told them to imagine how Penny would scold them for making their eyes and noses all red and puffy when they should be looking their very best. (I could picture that scene so vividly myself.)

Joe had to stop reading then and blink back the tears that threatened to run down his cheeks at the grief so evident in his brother’s words. He glanced at his pa, and saw he was weeping unashamedly. Ben reached for Joe’s hand and squeezed it. After a moment, Joe looked at his pa, who nodded his head for Joe to continue reading.

Because of the heavy rain, I hadn’t thought many people would come to the reception, but our verandah was covered with mackintoshes and umbrellas. Nearly everyone from Cartwright & Davies was there along with most of our neighbors and the Pentreaths’ neighbors. Fortunately, Bronwen and Mary had prepared plenty of food. The rain stopped about the time the cake was cut, but of course it was wet and muddy outside, so we shoved the drawing room furniture up against the walls to make a small dance floor. Gwyneth and I waltzed about the room but all too soon I had to give her to Mark.

Now the newlyweds are in their own little home and tomorrow morning it will just be the three of us gathered around the breakfast table, just like it was when Gwyneth was living in Brisbane. At least tomorrow Beth, Dafydd and the children have promised to have dinner with us.

It’s getting late so I’d better close. Bronwen sends her love.

Affectionately yours,

Adam

“I know what he means about the empty places around the table,” Joe said sadly. “Not just Benj and Sarah and ¼ .” He stopped himself from mentioning Annabelle’s name. “I still come down in the morning, expecting to see Adam and Hoss sitting at the table in their old places.”

“So do I,” Ben said quietly. “I think often of the days when all three of my boys were here with me, and of the happy years we all spent in the old cabin when your mother was alive, the days on the trail with Inger, Adam and baby Hoss, and the years I spent traveling with Adam. Finally, I think of those few brief months I had with Liz. So many happy times.”

“It’s like you say, Pa. Memories are always there when you need them most,” Joe stated softly and the two men shared a loving smile tinged with sadness.

{ { { {

It was a sunny fall day in mid April when Gwyneth knocked on the rectory door and saw Elen and Huw both running down the hallway. They caught sight of her and Elen shouted, “G’day, Auntie Gwyneth!” while Huw yelled, “G’day, Tee-tee Genth!” With a smile, Gwyneth pushed open the door just as Beth appeared in the hallway carrying four-month-old Dylan. The sight of her baby nephew made Gwyneth wonder if she might have conceived because she’d been married for over two months. Of course, Miranda had been married for nine months and she hadn’t written to say she was expecting a child yet. And Beth had been married nearly a year and a half before Elen had been born.

“Will you ride with me, Auntie Gwyneth?” Elen asked, for she loved to ride her pony but her mama and tada were usually too busy to ride with her.

“If it’s all right with your mama,” Gwyneth replied, looking questioningly at her sister.

“It’s all right with me,” Beth stated with a heartfelt smile, for Elen had been whiny and difficult all morning.

“Me ride?” Huw asked, smiling beguilingly at his tall aunt.

“Too right!” she replied, reaching down to tweak his upturned little nose.

“But Auntie Gwyneth and I need to talk first,” Beth said firmly. “You may each have one ginger biscuit while we talk.” She turned to Gwyneth. “You don’t mind eating in the kitchen do you?”

“That’s where we’d be eating at my house,” Gwyneth replied, sharing a smile with her oldest sister.

Once they were gathered around the nicked and scarred kitchen table and the children were occupied with their biscuits, Beth said, “Mama and Daddy’s twenty-fifth anniversary is less than a month away. I know that we all went together to buy them the silver tea service that Miranda and William picked out, but I don’t think that is enough. I think we should plan something special.”

“What did you have in mind?” Gwyneth asked, nibbling on a biscuit.

“Well, I thought about a party where we would invite everyone who works for Daddy and Uncle Rhys and their families and all the neighbors and everyone from church.”

“That’s a lot of people to feed,” Gwyneth commented apprehensively.

“I know but I wrote Grandpa and told him what kind of party we wanted and asked him how he barbecues a steer and he wrote back with directions. I’m sure that Mr. and Mrs. Dawson would be happy to contribute a steer and I think Mr. Graham would butcher it for us. You and I can make some side dishes and we can make a cake—tiered like Miranda’s wedding cake.”

“It sounds like you’ve been giving this a lot of thought,” Gwyneth said slowly.

“I have. I think twenty-five years together is something to celebrate. When I first married Dafydd, I never realized how much effort it would take to make our marriage work. The best advice Mama gave me was to make sure we kept some part of the day just for the two of us. It’s not easy now with three children, but I realize why she said it was so important.”

As soon as her mama finished speaking, Elen said quickly, “I’m done.”

“We’ll go riding as soon as Huw finishes his biscuit,” Gwyneth agreed.

“Don’t eat so fast that you choke, Huw,” Beth cautioned, seeing him start to take a bite that was much too big. Then she turned to her sister and commented, “According to what Miranda wrote in her last letter, her in-laws should be visiting them now.”

Gwyneth nodded then said with a slight shudder. “Imagine having to be around Mrs. Gordon for a fortnight. I’m glad Mam and I get along so well.”

“You are very lucky in your mother-in-law,” Beth replied, “but I feel sorry for Mrs. Gordon.”

“Miranda says she keeps asking William if she’s with child yet. I can tell Miranda is worried that she hasn’t conceived, and Mrs. Gordon isn’t helping.”

“I know,” Beth replied. “I wrote her that she shouldn’t worry yet. I was married for eight months before I conceived Elen. I’m hoping that the next time she writes, she’ll tell us that she is expecting. However,” and she shook her head slightly, “from what she’s written, I’m afraid her mother-in-law problems are only going to get worse once she and William have a child.”

“I know,” Gwyneth agreed. “She wrote that Mrs. Gordon says that she’ll find them an excellent nursemaid. It sounds as though Miranda won’t be expected to spend much time with her own baby.”

Just then Huw announced that he was finished. “All right, let’s go help Elen saddle Sport and then the three of us can go for a ride,” Gwyneth replied, lifting Huw up high as he giggled. She set him on his feet and the two children ran out the door leaving their mother and aunt exchanging grins. “You can take them for as long a ride as you’d like,” Beth added. “I’m going to put Dylan in his crib and get caught up on my ironing.”

“It will be a nice long ride,” Gwyneth promised with a dimpled grin.

That Sunday afternoon as the Cartwrights, Joneses and Pentreaths gathered in the Cartwrights’ dining room, Beth brought up the subject of her parents’ upcoming anniversary.

“Twenty-five years!” A.C. exclaimed in disbelief.

“Your sister is twenty-four and your mama and I got married a year earlier. You needn’t make it sound as though we’re as old as Methuselah,” Adam replied, reaching over and lightly punching his son’s arm while Elen and Huw both giggled at the strange-sounding name.

“Gwyneth and I thought we should have a big party to celebrate,” Beth inserted, “but we wanted to check with you first.”

“A big party sounds fine to me,” Adam replied with a grin. “What about you, sweetheart?” he asked, turning to Bronwen.

“It sounds lovely, but I don’t want you girls exhausting yourselves,” Bronwen said.

“We won’t, Mama,” Gwyneth said earnestly and Beth nodded.

“What about me?” A.C. asked. “I want to help.”

“There’ll be plenty for you and Dafydd and Mark to do; don’t worry,” Beth promised with a wink.

May 14, 1899, was as lovely as it had been on the same date in 1874. Beth and Gwyneth (with help from Matilda and Llywelyn’s fiancée, Emma) had arranged everything for the celebration. The Dawsons had been happy to donate a steer and Mr. Graham to butcher it for them. Dafydd, Mark, Llywelyn, and A.C. were charge of the barbecue while the four women made a variety of side dishes and the cake. Bronwen’s involvement was restricted to watching her grandchildren while their mother was busy cooking and baking.

The Cartwrights’ yard soon filled with guests. Once everyone had eaten their fill of beef, Dafydd and Mark proudly brought out the four-tier cake that Beth had decorated with pink sugar roses while A.C. and Llywelyn carried out the punch bowl filled with Ben Cartwright’s famous punch. Once Adam could see everyone had a glass of punch, he put one arm around Bronwen, drawing her close, and with the other he lifted his glass and began to speak.

“Twenty-five years ago, my ship docked at Sydney’s harbor. I was planning to spend a few weeks visiting this continent before sailing to China and India. My very first day exploring Sydney, I barreled into this delicate little woman, who was carrying a stack of books almost as tall as she was. Little did I know then that that encounter would be the most important one of my entire life. Since I was raised a gentleman, I offered to help her carry her books home, and as we walked together, discussing our favorite authors and books, she stole my heart.”

“Of course, being what my younger brother calls a ‘Yankee Granite head,’ I didn’t immediately realize that, to paraphrase Sir Philip Sydney, ‘My true-love had my heart and I had hers’. However, once it finally got through my thick skull how much I loved her, I didn’t hesitate to ask her to do me the very great honor of becoming my wife.”

“Throughout these past twenty-five years, Bronwen and I have shared our joys and our sorrows. I brought her far from the comforts of life in a big city to face the hardships of life in a little mining town in the outback, but she never complained and rose to meet every challenge. She created a warm and loving home for our family and has been a beautiful example to our daughters of a virtuous woman whose price is far above rubies.”

He lifted his glass high then, saying, “Ladies and gentlemen, family and friends, please join me in raising your glass to toast my lovely bride of twenty-five years, Bronwen Marged Davies Cartwright.”

Everyone raised their glasses (Elen and Huw had been given glasses of water so they mimicked the adults) and toasted Bronwen. Then Rhys lifted his glass, saying, “It was twenty-five years ago, while I was visiting my parents in Sydney, that my mam told me we were having a guest for dinner—this Yank who’d walked into my little sister and then carried her library books home for her. I could tell by my sister’s blushes that this bloke had made quite an impression, and that had me curious, and a bit anxious. I didn’t want some foreigner coming along and breaking my sister’s heart.”

“Almost as soon as I met Adam Cartwright, I knew he wasn’t that kind of man, and it was easy to see the rapport between him and Bronwen. I liked him, and it was clear to me that my little sister more than liked him—she was head over heels in love with him! He was harder to read, and he was quite firm about his intention to return home to the States, so I was afraid my sister was going to be hurt. I was delighted when I received the news that he’d asked Bronwen to marry him, and honored when he asked me to be his best man. We’ve been business partners and brothers-in-law for twenty-five years now, but, Adam,” Rhys said, speaking to him directly, “I don’t look on you as merely a business partner or brother-in-law. You are my friend and as much my brother as the one my mother bore me.” He lifted his glass high, saying, “A toast to the finest man I’ve ever had the privilege of knowing, Adam Stoddard Cartwright.”

That night, as Adam and Bronwen lay curled together after a private celebration of their twenty-five years together, he dropped butterfly kisses on each eyelid before saying softly, “I am so blessed to have found you. If I hadn’t run into you that day, I would be a lonely, bitter man. But you have brought me so much love, so much joy.”

“If I hadn’t met you, I’d be a forlorn spinster wondering why I was never lucky enough to meet my true-love,” she whispered, softly caressing his cheek with the back of her hand.

They shared a smile and she snuggled closer, resting her head on his chest, as he absently played with her silvery white tresses. After a moment he spoke again. “But we did find each other and we’ve made a marriage of true minds.” She lifted her face toward his then for one final kiss before they drifted to sleep in each other’s arms.

{ { { {

“Dearest,” William called up the stairs from the foyer, “we’re going to miss the train if we don’t hurry!”

“I’m coming,” Miranda called back, trying to keep a tremor of excitement from her voice. Her monthly flux should have begun a week ago, but there was still no sign of it. Maybe, just maybe, her prayers had been answered and she was finally with child. She wouldn’t say anything to William until she was certain because she’d gotten her hopes up before but discovered she was only late. She hadn’t wanted to conceive as quickly as her mother and have everyone counting the months, but she never realized that she’d be married for eleven months and still not be with child. And it certainly wasn’t from lack of trying—or at least that was true until William’s parents had come for a visit in April.

Mrs. Gordon had made snide remarks about the cleanliness of the house and had poor Nancy in tears, terrified that she’d lose her position; she complained about Mrs. Matthews’ cooking until she had threatened to turn in her notice and it was only with difficulty Miranda had calmed her down and convinced her that she and William were satisfied with her culinary skills. (Miranda had finally trained her not to overcook the meat and she wasn’t convinced she would find a better cook in Hanover so she didn’t want to lose one who was beginning to learn to prepare their favorite dishes.) Moreover, the knowledge that his parents were down the hall had definitely put a damper on William’s ardor. However, once they’d returned to Wilmington, William had been eager to make up for his earlier neglect.

Now, she and William were on their way to the Ponderosa to spend the month of July visiting Grandpa and Uncle Joe. Aunt Annabelle had agreed that Benj and Sarah should continue to spend their summer vacation with their father, so it would be family reunion of sorts.

{ { { {

“I can hardly wait to see Miranda, again, Grandpa,” Sarah said as she and Ben sat side by side behind her father and brother in the surrey. “And, of course, William.”

“I feel the same, sugar,” Ben replied, reaching over and patting her hand.

“I was hoping she’d have a baby and she’d let me help take care of it,” Sarah continued.

“Some people have babies soon after they marry and others are married for some time before they have one,” Ben said calmly.

Benj had been eavesdropping and now spoke up. “Some people don’t have children. Like Mr. and Mrs. Finley.”

Ben added quickly, “I think it would be best that we don’t talk about babies around Miranda and William. All right?”

“All right,” Benj replied and Sarah nodded

Ben had agreed to wait in the surrey since he couldn’t stand for any length of time, but Joe had timed their arrival carefully and Ben only had to wait a few minutes before his older granddaughter and her husband were hurrying toward him.

After Miranda had hugged and kissed him and William had shaken his hand, Ben looked them both over and said with a broad smile, “Married life seems to agree with you both.”

“Yes indeed,” William replied with a grin, “the state of matrimony has much to recommend it,” and he put his arm around Miranda’s shoulders and drew her close. Ben smiled at them, rejoicing in their obvious love for one another.

Over the next several days, Miranda managed to find excuses not to go riding, usually by saying she wanted to spend time with Ben. She was becoming more convinced that she was with child. She hadn’t experienced any nausea in the morning the way Beth and her mother both said they had, but she had begun feeling queasy just about every afternoon since they’d arrived. She’d also noted that she’d had to visit the outhouse more frequently and she found herself taking a nap in the afternoons when her grandpa did because she felt so tired. Her monthly flux was due in a few days, and if she missed again, then she would tell William they were having a baby. She had it all planned out. They would take a buggy ride to the lake, just the two of them, and there in that beautiful environment, she would share her wonderful news.

That special morning began with a thunderstorm and heavy rain, putting an end to a visit to the lake. As the six of them gathered around the breakfast table, Benj and Sarah were both out of sorts.

“I wanted to go fishing today,” Benj grumbled while Sarah whined, “I was going to ride to the Lightly place and visit Melissa.”

“You’ll have to think of something else to do,” Joe snapped. “Why don’t you two put the tack room in order? If you find anything that needs to be mended, bring it to your grandpa and he’ll show you how.” He turned to his niece then and asked, “Would you mind working on the books, Miranda?”

“I’ll catch up on my correspondence and we can share the desk,” William suggested with a smile so Miranda acquiesced.

“Could you pass me the last biscuit, please, dear?” she asked William. “Uncle Joe, are there any more scrambled eggs left?”

“Uh, sure, there are a few,” Joe said, looking a bit startled, as he passed the dish to her. Although, he thought, her appetite certainly seems to have improved since she’s been married. I remember when she used to only eat tea and toast for breakfast.

“There are some fried potatoes left, too,” Benj said but Miranda said quickly, “No, thank you,” and then began slathering her biscuit with butter and blackberry jam while her uncle and grandpa exchanged amused glances and William looked a bit puzzled.

As they walked together to Ben’s massive partner’s desk, he said in a low voice, “You’re going to get fat if you keep eating so much, dearest. Of course, you seem to be getting plumper in the right places, so I won’t complain.”

“What do you mean?” she said an indignant but low voice

“I mean that your breasts seem a little larger since we’ve been here and you’ve been eating larger meals. I liked them fine before, but now there’s just a bit more to like,” he added with a wink and her cheeks grew pink.

That’s another of the symptoms Mama and Beth had told me about, she thought. Oh, I have to find a way for the two of us to be alone so I can tell William the wonderful news.

She and William worked quietly all morning as the rain continued to pour and the stillness of the great room was punctuated by loud claps of thunder. Buckshot had made vegetable soup and roast beef sandwiches for the noonday meal and William and Ben both noticed that Miranda had two bowls of soup. Benj and Sarah hadn’t totally finished putting the tack room in shape, but Ben felt they’d worked hard enough and suggested they all play charades. They even convinced Buckshot to join in so they’d have an even number since Joe had gone to check the cattle in the south pasture. After an hour, William said, “We need to do something more active than playing charades. How about some dancing?”

“Dancing?” Benj said, sounding horrified.

“You’re what—fifteen now?” Miranda asked, and Benj nodded. “Well then, it’s high time you learned to dance. You’ll be escorting young ladies to balls before you know it.”

“And I’ll be happy to teach you, Sarah,” William offered with a smile and she nodded eagerly.

“But we don’t have any music,” Benj objected.

“I’ll be happy to hum a tune for you to dance to,” Ben said with a big grin. “You’ll just need to move the furniture and the rug out of the way.

When that had been accomplished, William suggested they start with a polka. “It’s very easy to learn.”

Once Benj got over feeling self-conscious, he proved to be a graceful dancer and Sarah was having a marvelous time whirling around the room in William’s arms. He and Miranda taught the two youngsters the polka and the waltz.

“Now, let Miranda and I demonstrate some more modern dances,” William said. “I’m afraid we’ll have to provide our own music, sir.” He held out his hand to Miranda and said, “Shall we start with the Cakewalk?”

With Miranda humming a ragtime tune, she and William demonstrated the popular dance. Benj and Sarah enjoyed it while Ben had reservations. However, as the young couple danced a tango, Ben was frankly horrified.

“Do you mean to tell me unmarried men and women dance like that?” he exclaimed in a tone that left no doubt as to the depth of his outrage. “Did you dance that way before you were married?”

“It’s a very popular dance, Grandpa,” Miranda said, adopting what she hoped was a soothing tone.

“So I take it that the answer to my question is, yes, you did dance it before you were married,” Ben stated with a ferocious scowl.

“We were always with a group of people, sir,” William added hastily. “And we danced the polka and the waltz more often.

Ben shook his head and then looked at his younger granddaughter and said sternly, “I hope you will not dance the tango until you are married.”

“I won’t if you don’t want me to, Grandpa,” Sarah replied, although privately she thought the dance looked very romantic.

“Why don’t we do something less energetic?” William suggested. “Maybe play Hearts?” and the other three quickly agreed.

They were having a good time playing cards but as the afternoon wore on, Miranda began to feel nauseous, just as she had for the past several days. Today was different though; the feeling grew so strong that she had to jump up from the table and run out the front door. William found her at the end of the porch, on her knees, retching. He knelt beside her, placing his arm around her trembling shoulders.

When she was able to stop, he handed her his handkerchief to wipe her mouth, and said in a worried tone, “I am going to town for Dr. Pascoe.”

“No, you don’t need to do that,” she said quietly. He started to protest but she overrode him saying firmly, “I know what’s wrong.” He looked puzzled so she smiled and said, “This is not how I planned to tell you, but I’m with child.”

She saw his face light up, just as if she had thrown one of the new-fangled electric light switches. “You’re sure?”

“I’m sure,” she replied, throwing her arms about him and hugging him tightly. “I believe the baby should be born around the end of December or beginning of January. I hope January so he or she can be born in a brand-new century,” she added.

Just then Ben came walking slowly toward them. “Are you all right, dear?” he asked in an anxious tone.

“I’m fine,” she said, smiling radiantly at him, and William, who was grinning from ear to ear, added, “You can congratulate us, sir; we’re having a baby!”

“Both of you?” Ben asked with a twinkle in his eye and William blushed. “I am so happy for you,” he added, hugging Miranda and then thumping William on the back.

Just then Sarah came to the door. “Is Miranda all right?” she asked apprehensively.

“I’m fine, Sarah,” Miranda answered. “I just felt a bit ill, but that happens sometimes when a woman is expecting a child.”

“You’re going to have a baby!” Sarah squealed. “When?”

“Not for some time,” Miranda replied with a laugh. “My baby will probably be born around Christmas or New Year’s.” Seeing her young cousin’s dejected expression she added, “Perhaps you and your mother could come visit us after the baby is born. After all, it doesn’t take long to travel from Boston to Hanover by train. And we’ll bring the baby here next summer to visit.” Then she looked at William. “Won’t we, dear?” she asked.

“Of course. He or she will be half a Cartwright, so he or she should get to know the Ponderosa.” He smiled at Ben and then exclaimed, “We’ve got to write our parents and share the news with them!”

About a week later, Jacob came back from town with a small crate and brought it to Ben, Miranda and William, who were sitting on the porch drinking lemonade and chatting.

“Got a package here for the Gordons and the Cartwrights,” he said with a wide grin and twinkling brown eyes. “Came all the way from Queensland.”

“Maybe there’ll be news about Gwyneth,” Miranda said. “Wouldn’t it be wonderful if she is also with child?”

“We won’t know until we open the package,” William said with just a hint of a smile.

As they dug through the excelsior, they found two identical framed pictures of Adam and Bronwen surrounded by their children, grandchildren, and sons-in-law.

“I’ll bet this photograph was taken to commemorate their twenty-fifth wedding anniversary,” Ben said, and he smiled warmly as he gazed at the happy family, although there was just a touch of wistfulness in his eyes since he would have liked to have been there to share in Adam and Bronwen’s happiness.

Miranda dug a little deeper and found another framed photograph and showed it to William. “This is my cousin, Llywelyn, and his bride, Emma, and that’s my Uncle Rhys and Aunt Matilda.”

“May I see it?” Ben asked and Miranda passed it to him. “I was able to meet Rhys, Matilda and Llywelyn when we all traveled to Cloncurry for Beth and Dafydd’s wedding,” he explained to William. “Llywelyn wasn’t much more than a boy then, but I see he’s become a fine young man.”

“Emma and I were best friends growing up,” Miranda added. “I never would have guessed she and Llywelyn would fall in love and get married, but they look very happy and very much in love in this photograph.”

“Your father wrote Joe and me that he designed a house for Llywelyn and Emma. I think he was touched that your cousin asked him,” Ben commented. Then he asked, “Isn’t there a letter in the crate?”

“I’m sure there is,” Miranda replied and began digging through the excelsior. “Here’s one from Daddy, one from A.C. and one from Gwyneth,” she declared, holding them up.

“None from Beth?” Ben asked and his disappointment was obvious.

“She’s so busy with three little ones that she’s told me that it’s hard for her to find time to write,” Miranda replied, apologizing for her older sister.

“You’re right,” Ben said, “and I’m sure you’re father will tell us all about Elen, Huw and Dylan.”

“Why don’t we read A.C.’s and Gwyneth’s letters now, and then save Daddy’s until tonight when everyone can hear it?” Miranda suggested and Ben nodded his agreement. “I’ll start with A.C.’s,” Miranda said, carefully opening the envelope.

June 11, 1899

Dear Grandpa, Uncle Joe, Miranda, William, Benj and Sarah,

I hope you are all having fun on the Ponderosa. I wish I could be there, too, except I’d miss Mama and Dad and Elen and Huw and Dylan and Beth and Dafydd and Gwyneth and Mark and Llywelyn and Lady and Duchess and Bucephalas. Stone the crows! I guess I’d miss lots of people and animals if I was gone.

Llywelyn and Emma got married yesterday. Mark was the best man but I stood up with Llywelyn too. (I just asked Dad and he said I was a groomsman.) Gwyneth was Emma’s matrun of honour and Miss Andrews was a bridesmaid. They had fruitcake for their wedding cake.

Miranda stopped then to explain to Ben, “A.C. was very disappointed that William and I had a sponge cake for our wedding cake,” and the three shared a smile before she continued reading.

¼ Miss Andrews caught Emma’s flowers, but when someone said she’d be the next to get married, she looked like she was going to cry. I heard Mama and Aunt Matilda talking and they said Miss Andrews loves Douglas, but he’s gone and they don’t think he’s coming back since Gwyneth married Mark and that makes Miss Andrews sad.

Now Llywelyn and Emma are on their way to Brisbane. They are going to stay there for two weeks and then come back home. I asked Mama and Dad why they went away cause Beth and Dafydd didn’t go away and neither did Gwyneth and Mark. Mama said that she and Dad went to Melbourne for a visit right after they got married.

We had a big party for Mama and Dad because they’ve been married for 25 years. Just about everybody in Cloncurry came. We all gave Mama and Dad a silver tea set because Beth said this is their silver anniversary. Oh, I guess Miranda and William knew about the tea set cause Beth told me you helped to buy it. Mama and Dad really liked it. Mama even cried a little when we gave it to them.

Dylan can smile now and he crawls. I wish he’d start walking and talking, but Mama and Beth say that he’s too little. It sure takes babies a long time to grow. Elen really likes riding Sport. Huw likes to ride too. I would let him ride with me but Mama and Beth say no. I don’t think that’s fair since Gwyneth can take him for a ride. Mama says I may be almost as tall as Gwyneth, but I am not old enough to be responsible for Huw. Stone the crows! I’m almost twelve. How old do you have to be? I know that Dad got to do lots of things when he was twelve. Huw asked Robby and me to cut his hair, but when we did, Mama and Beth got really angry and Dad and I had a necessary talk.

Now that the rainy season is over, Dad and Robby and I go sculling every Sunday afternoon. Robby and I wanted to go after school by ourselves but Mama and Dad and Robby’s parents all say we are absolutely forbidden and if we do, then we’ll never be able to go sculling again. I don’t think that’s fair either

Mama says I should tell you that I am at the top of my class. Robby says it’s not fair that he works lots harder and I still make better marks. I guess he’s right. How come there are so many unfair things?

A.C.

“A.C. is quite a philosopher,” William remarked with a smile.

“Too bad we don’t have an answer for him,” Miranda said thoughtfully.

“Let’s see what your sister has to say,” Ben suggested and, with a smile, Miranda opened Gwyneth’s letter and began to read.

June 10, 1899

Dear Family,

Llywelyn and Emma have left on their honeymoon; Mama, Aunt Matilda and I have finished helping Mrs. Lawrence and Rose clean up after the reception; Daddy, who is minding Dylan, Uncle Rhys, and Mr. Lawrence are sitting on the veranda talking. A.C. and Robby decided to go for ride. Elen wanted to go as well and that meant Huw wanted to go, so Mark offered to ride Artemis and take Huw with him. With Daddy watching Dylan, Beth and Dafydd have a chance to spend some time together, which Beth says doesn’t happen nearly enough. As eager as I am to have a child, I have to admit I am reluctant to give up this time when Mark and I are alone—we don’t have to divide our time and affection with our children. I love Elen, Huw and Dylan, but I can see how exhausting taking care of them is. I don’t know how Mama managed with two babies not even a year apart and then not even two and a half years later I came along, followed three years later by Penny. It must have been almost impossible for Daddy and her to have any time alone together.

In spite of what I just wrote, I will be happy when I know that I am carrying Mark’s child.

As I mentioned, poor Beth has very little free time so I’ll write you about Elen, Huw and Dylan. I’ll start with Dylan. His dark baby hair is all gone now and he is growing curly black hair like Daddy’s and mine. (Beth is pleased, but she wishes it was Elen who’d inherited Daddy’s curls.) Dylan seems smaller than Elen or Huw were at the same age but he’s more active. He’s already crawling everywhere, and Beth said Elen and Huw were both in their seventh month when they began.

Huw is such a sweet little boy, but he has inherited his share of what Mama calls “the Cartwright stubborn streak.” (Daddy always shakes his head and says she’s mistaken; it’s the “Davies stubborn streak.”) Anyway, now that he’s turned two, his stubborn streak is more in evidence. (Mama said she noticed we all seemed more stubborn at age two.) But back to Huw. His stubborn streak is coming out over how he dresses. He wants to dress like Uncle A.C. and does not want to wear the little smocked frocks Beth sews for him. He talked A.C. and Robby into cutting his hair. I thought Beth was going to commit fratricide when she saw the results. (Daddy thought it was funny and said he didn’t blame Huw; of course, he didn’t say this in A.C.’s hearing, and he was suitably punished.) Now that Huw’s hair has been cut so short, Beth has told him that if he can learn to go to the outhouse and not have any accidents, then she will make him a pair of knickerbockers like boys wear. The bribe seems to be working although he hasn’t quite earned the knickerbockers yet.

Miranda interrupted her reading then to exclaim, “I know just what we’ll get Huw for Christmas this year! One of those little suits all the little boys in Hanover wear. You know the ones I mean, William: They have a belted tunic and short pants and the little boys wear them with plain white collars and a big black bow.” She smiled adding, “Huw will look adorable.” She saw her grandpa’s slight frown and resumed her reading.

Elen is proving to be a natural equestrienne. Beth says she’d sleep in the stable if they’d let her and she simply adores Sport. That reminds me. I really miss Cath so Mark got me a kitten. She’s ginger with a white chin and one white sock and I’ve named her Athena. Elen loves to pet her when Beth and the children visit. She asked to have a kitten of her own and Beth had to explain that Nani and Colwyn (just like Lady and Duchess) hate cats. Elen loves animals; Beth has decided to keep a goose and gander and raise the goslings to sell at Christmas time and Elen has named each gosling. Something tells me there will be trouble when it’s time to sell them to Mr. Graham, our butcher, and I definitely doubt that we’ll be eating a Christmas goose. I guess Elen is like Uncle Hoss because Daddy told us many stories of all the animals he had. She’s still shy with strangers. She plays with the little girl next door, Kerra Hughnan, who’s a year older. Kerra is already in school so Elen only has Huw to play with during the day and he doesn’t have any interest in playing with dolls or having tea parties so they don’t always play as nicely as their mama would like. Sometimes Auntie Gwyneth comes to the rescue and goes riding with them (with Elen on Sport and Huw riding Artemis with me).

I think that’s all the news I have for now. Mark and I both send you all our love. Maybe the next time I write it will be to tell you that a new little Pentreath is on the way.

Love,
Gwyneth

As Miranda carefully folded her sister’s letter, William commented thoughtfully, “I understand what Gwyneth means about not wanting to have a baby too soon. I’m actually glad that Miranda and I will have an entire year—

“A year and six months,” Miranda corrected and Ben hid his grin behind his hand.

“I stand corrected, Madame Mathematician,” William said with a smile. “I’m glad we’ll have eighteen months alone before the baby arrives.”

“I am, too,” Miranda said quietly, and reached for his hand.

“It is nice for a husband and wife to have time to get to know each other and get used to being married before they have to get used to being parents,” Ben commented with a slight smile. “I wonder how easily your parents will adjust to it just being the two of them when A.C. goes to school?” he queried thoughtfully.

“That’s right,” Miranda replied, “it’s going to seem very strange to them.” She yawned and then turned to Ben and said, “I think I’m going to take a little nap. What about you, Grandpa?”

“A nap sounds like an excellent idea.”

“While you and Miranda nap, I think I’ll work on my notes about what you and Dad told me about your journey here,” William stated, rising and dropping a kiss on Miranda’s cheek before heading to Ben’s study.

That night after supper the four Cartwrights and the Gordons all gathered on the front porch, where it was cooler, to hear Miranda read her father’s letter

June 15, 1899

Dear Family,

Let me begin by saying I hope all of you are having a wonderful summer. I am so happy that Miranda and William were able to visit again this year. I wish William success with his paper on the United States’ westward expansion. I look forward to reading it very much.

I’m sure A.C. and Gwyneth wrote you that Llywelyn and Emma are now married and on their way to Brisbane where they’ll spend a fortnight. I am overseeing the finishing touches on their house, and before they return, their new furniture will be delivered. (Emma told her mother and Matilda how she wanted the furniture arranged so that the house will be all ready for them when they return. After discussing it with them, I designed a two-story house with a verandah that runs around three-sides of the first-story. There are three bedrooms upstairs (a large master bedroom and two smaller ones) and downstairs there is a kitchen with a bathhouse attached like ours, a dining room, library, and what is being called a living room. They both seem very pleased with the house. It’s built on an empty lot in Gwyneth and Mark’s cul-de-sac so they will be neighbors, and the two couples are looking forward to that.

Rhys and I expected Llywelyn and Mark to return from the technical college with ideas about how to improve the mine; however, we did not anticipate just how radical some of the changes would be. Yes, Pa, I can see you smiling and remembering how we used to butt heads about some of the changes I suggested when I returned from Harvard. I am beginning to think it is inevitable. Rhys and I have had to admit the changes we have decided to implement have proven very successful, so we’re going back and rethinking some of the others they’ve suggested.

About two weeks ago, A.C. and his friend Robby decided to try their hand at barbering and cut (or perhaps I should say hacked) Huw’s hair short, The little scamp begged them to do it; he wanted to have short hair like theirs and of course Beth has refused to cut it short until he turns three this coming March. Beth and Bronwen were extremely put out with all three boys and they have been suitably punished. (Just between us, my sympathy is with Huw. I don’t see why he can’t be allowed to have short hair and wear knickerbockers if that’s what he wants.) Mr. Puzo did his best with the hair the two boys left behind but Huw’s hair is now cropped very short. Beth and Dafydd have decided to use his desire to be treated as a “big boy” to their advantage: if Huw can get to the outhouse for one week without any accidents, then he can wear the little knickerbockers Beth is making him.

I can’t close my letter without thanking all of you for your good wishes on our twenty-fifth anniversary. Bronwen and I want to thank Miranda and William (along with Beth and Dafydd, Gwyneth and Mark, and A.C.) for the lovely silver tea set, which we were told the two of you selected. Pa and Joe, we want to thank you both for the silver candlesticks. We know we are blessed to have shared the past twenty-five years. We’d love to celebrate our golden anniversary but I’d have to live to be eighty-eight. Of course, that’s not impossible.

Bronwen sends her love to all and we hope you have a wonderful summer.

Affectionately yours,

Adam

“I wish I could be there when they open my letter,” Miranda said wistfully.

“I can imagine how happy they all will be for us,” William said, putting his arm about his wife’s shoulders and giving her a comforting squeeze.

{ { { {

Bronwen heard a knock at the front door and quickly untied her apron and flung it over a kitchen chair before going to answer the door. She smiled at the sight of her third daughter.

“I stopped by the post office and there was a letter from Miranda so I thought I’d bring it over. I notice she wrote on the envelope to share the letter with everyone.”

“So she did,” Bronwen said with a smile, reading her daughter’s scrawl on the back. “I hope that means she has good news to share with us. Can you and Mark come for supper? We could read the letter afterward.” Gwyneth nodded and then Bronwen asked, “Would you mind stopping at the rectory and seeing if Beth, Dafydd and the children can come tonight?”

“No, I’d be happy to stop by,” Gwyneth replied with a smile.

It looks like Miranda and I both have news to share tonight, she thought as she headed down the street. She had shared her wonderful news with Mark that morning and they had decided they would share the news with her family and then with his. She’d already told Mrs. Pentreath that she and Mark would stop by later this evening.

The Cartwrights and Pentreaths were sitting on the verandah as the Joneses came up the street, Huw wearing his little knickerbockers and a shirt. His hair had grown back some in the past two months but was still very short. As soon as they got close enough, Elen and Huw ran toward the house hollering, “G’day, Pa-pa! “G’day, Me-ma! “G’day, Auntie Gwyneth! G’day Uncle A.C. and Uncle Mark!” Lady and Duchess ran toward the gate barking a joyous greeting and Dylan’s excited squeals could be heard in the background. A.C. jumped up and ran down the path to open the gate for the younger children.

After the meal, everyone gathered in the library. A.C. had brought down his Noah’s Ark for Elen and Huw to play with and luckily Dylan, who was teething and a bit fretful, had fallen asleep in the old cradle. Bronwen gave Adam the letter as he got out his bifocals.

July 17, 1899

Dear Family,

William and I have the most wonderful news to share. I’m sure you can guess what it is. Sometime in late December or early January, our child will be born. I had planned such a romantic way of telling William. We were going to drive to the lake and I would tell him there. Instead, I told him in the middle of a thunderstorm on the porch after being sick.

Dafydd laughed aloud as Adam read those words and the other adults all chuckled, causing Elen and Huw to look up from their playing, wondering why the others were laughing.

He is so happy. I think he had been more concerned about the fact that I hadn’t conceived than he let on to me. We are sitting at grandpa’s desk now. He’s writing to his parents as I am writing to all of you. Mama, I will remember what you told me about treating Mrs. Gordon with respect, but she is not going to raise my child. If she sends us a nursemaid, I intend to send her away. I had a wonderful example in you, Mama, and I intend to raise my children myself just as you raised all of us. Lucy Bronson, Lydia Tompkins and Gertrude Templeton are all raising their children without nursemaids. In fact, I am looking forward to returning to Hanover and sharing my news with them.

Grandpa is so pleased and William and I have promised to bring the baby to the Ponderosa next summer.

I’ll write more when we return home.

Love,

Miranda

“That is such wonderful news,” Beth said, her face glowing with happiness for her sister and brother-in-law.

“Mark and I also have some news to share,” Gwyneth said quietly, reaching for Mark’s hand.

“Stone the crows!” A.C. exclaimed, “are you gonna have a baby, too?”

“Yes, our baby will be born in the first half of March,” Gwyneth replied quietly, but her face was radiant and Mark’s habitually somber countenance was also transformed by his proud smile.

“That’s wonderful news,” Bronwen said, going to hug her daughter and then her son-in-law.

Adam was right behind her, enfolding his daughter in a warm embrace. “I am so happy for you, Punkin,” he said softly, and kissed her cheek. Then he turned to Mark, who held out his hand, but Adam pulled him into a quick hug. “Of course I’m happy for you, too, Mark,” he said with a proud grin. “Have you told your parents?”

“No, we’re going there next,” Mark replied and Gwyneth added, “I’m afraid we need to go now.”

“Why don’t you and Mama come to the rectory tomorrow morning so we can talk more,” Beth suggested, and the others readily agreed.

That night as Adam and Bronwen curled together, she said happily, “Two more grandchildren! Our family is certainly growing in leaps and bounds.”

“Indeed it is,” he replied. Neither voiced the hidden grief they felt at the realization that they would never really get to know their American grandchild. Oh, Pa, Adam thought as he held Bronwen close to him, now I’ll really know what it was like for you, only knowing my grandchild through letters and photographs.

Chapter 6

Though it was early December, the air was frigid and Ben’s chair was close to the fire. He felt the cold now more than he had in years past, so in addition to his wool cardigan, he had a thick Indian blanket draped over his legs to keep them warm. He was waiting impatiently for Joe to return from town with the mail. He hadn’t heard from Miranda in a few weeks and it had been over a month since his last letter from Adam so he was hoping to receive a letter from one or both of them.

He had dozed off in the warmth of the fire when he was startled awake by a draft of cold air, although Joe closed the door as quickly as he could before removing his hat and coat. “Nothing from Queensland this time, but I did see a letter from Hanover,” he answered his pa’s unspoken query as he sat on the settee. He’d already placed that envelope at the top of the pile and now he carefully opened it and pulled out the expensive, cream-colored stationary engraved with the logo of the Wheelock Hotel.

November 29, 1899

Dear Grandpa and Uncle Joe,

I am writing you from the Wheelock Hotel because I’ve left William.

Joe dropped the letter and said in astonishment, “Her baby is due in a month or less, and she’s left her husband!”

“Finish the letter, Joseph!” Ben barked, his anxiety making him short-tempered. Joe understood and he was worried about his niece as well so he quickly resumed reading.

A week ago William’s mother arrived for an unannounced visit, bringing a nursemaid with her in spite of the fact I have written her repeatedly that I intend to raise my own child without a nursemaid just as my mother raised her five children. William always led me to believe that he supported me, but last night when we were alone, he told me that he’d been giving it a great deal of thought and had decided that perhaps his mother is right. After all, he informed me, I don’t really have any experience raising children so it would be better for the baby to have someone knowledgeable looking after him or her. I was so angry that I slept in one of the spare bedrooms last night and this morning as soon as I knew he’d gone to teach his first class, I packed a valise and took a cab to the Wheelock. I want to come stay with you on the Ponderosa, but I’ll have to wait until after the baby is born. I’m staying at the hotel so Dr. Newby will still be able to deliver my baby. As soon as he says the baby is old enough to travel, we will come stay with you.

I can’t believe William would take his mother’s side over mine. I thought he loved me!

Love,
Miranda

“I just can’t take it in,” Ben said. “She and William seemed so much in love.”

“It’s that mother of his,” Joe said with a scowl. “I could see she was going to be trouble just like Annabelle’s brother. I don’t think Miranda is thinking too clearly though. It doesn’t seem like her to go off half-cocked like this. Of course, women do seem to be more emotional when they’re with child, but for the baby’s sake, she and William need to try and work things out.”

“If William is the man I think he is,” Ben said, “he’ll make things right. I wish there was something we could do,” he added, and his anxiety was obvious.

“But there isn’t. All we can do is wait,” Joe said soothingly, trying to calm Ben. He shuffled through the remaining envelopes and then said, “Wait, here’s another letter from Hanover and the postmark is more recent.” He tore open the letter, not even noticing that this one was written on Miranda’s own engraved stationary, and began to read.

November 30, 1899

Dear Grandpa and Uncle Joe,

If there was some way that I could take back my earlier letter, I would. William and I have reconciled. He came to the hotel to fetch me home, but I told him that I refused to go with him if he intended to have our baby raised by a stranger. At first, he told me that I was being foolish and emotional and he stormed off. He returned with the key, which the hotel manager had given him, and walked brazenly into my room and began to pack my valise. I was so angry and upset that I began to cry. He told me afterward that made him feel like an ogre. He stopped packing and he tried to hold me but I pushed him away. He told me that if it was going to upset me this much, he would tell Miss Evans that she wasn’t needed and he would send his mother back to Wilmington. He said he was sorry he had taken his mother’s side over mine. Finally, he told me that he loved me and he had been out of his mind with worry when he came home and I was gone. Then, I let him hold me.

After I was able to stop crying, we had a long talk. Since he’d admitted that he had been wrong to take his mother’s side over mine, I admitted I had been wrong to leave him and I told him that I didn’t expect him to tell his mother to go. I just wanted him to make her understand that we did not want a nursemaid and our decision was final. As it happened, Mrs. Gordon did leave in a huff after William made it clear that we would not accept Miss Evans’ services. (William paid Miss Evans a month’s wages for her trouble and she took it and seemed happy to return to Wilmington.)

Everything is back to normal except that now I feel guilty about coming between William and his mother. He tells me not to worry and that it isn’t the first time he and his mother have disagreed and it won’t be the last. Our extended family is so close that it is difficult for me to understand William’s family. He’s told me that he wants to be the same kind of father to our children that Daddy was to all of us and Grandpa was to Daddy, Uncle Hoss and you, Uncle Joe.

I’ve been working hard on the baby’s nursery, getting everything just right. I sew dreadfully, but I can knit so I’ve made some little sweaters, bonnets, and booties for the baby. We made a trip to Boston back in September and bought lots of gowns for the baby and lots of nappies—I suppose I should refer to them as diapers. They are all put away neatly in the chest of drawers in the nursery. We also bought a lovely rocking chair I can sit in and rock the baby to sleep.

I am very sorry for worrying you both. The next letter you receive should be announcing the birth of our baby.

Love,
Miranda

“Oh, there’s another letter enclosed,” Joe said. “I think—yes, this one is from William. Shall I read it?” Ben nodded so Joe began.

November 30, 1899

Dear Mr. Cartwright and Uncle Joe,

I just want to reassure both of you that I will be a better husband to my Miranda than I have been these past few days. I think you can imagine how I felt when I came home from the college yesterday and found her gone and our maid informed me that Miranda had instructed her to pack her trunk and have it delivered to the Wheelock Hotel.. I promise you that I had no idea how upset she’d be at my mentioning that having a nursemaid might be a good idea. She has always been so calm and logical, but ever since she’s been with child, she’s become very emotional. I mentioned that to a friend and he assured me that his wife was the same way when she was with child. He said I just have to be patient and understanding, and I will be. I will be so glad when the baby is born.

With affection,
William

“Poor William,” Joe said with a giggle.

“I remember how emotional your mother was when she was carrying you,” Ben added with a smile, “and Liz was the same when she was carrying Adam. Only Inger remained as serene as ever.”

About a week later, Ben and Joe received a large envelope that was postmarked Cloncurry, Queensland. Joe was gone when one of the hands brought the mail so Ben waited impatiently to open what he was sure must be a Christmas card. Joe let Pa open the large envelope and pull out a piece of paper folded in half so it would open like a book. On the front was a Christmas tree cut out of colored paper and someone had drawn tiny decorations on it. Another, less expert hand, had drawn a mound of gaily wrapped gifts under the tree. A very childish hand had printed in large, uneven letters: Merry Christmas. When they opened the card, they found a letter and inside was written “Merry Christmas to everyone on the Ponderosa from all of us in Cloncurry” in Adam’s neat handwriting. Underneath were the signatures of the three Cartwrights, Gwyneth and Mark, Beth and Dafydd and a wobbly printed Elen that matched the “Merry Christmas” on the front.

“Let’s see what’s in the letter,” Joe said with a smile as he stood the card up on the rough-hewn table in front of the massive fireplace.

November 17, 1899

Dear Pa and Joe,

I hope this letter finds both of you well and Pa recovered from the chest cold you wrote about in your last letter. We are all well, but I am saddened to tell you that our family has suffered a loss.

Joe stopped reading and he and Ben exchanged uneasy glances before Joe continued.

A week ago, Mark’s father collapsed and died at the mine. Just before he collapsed, he complained of terrible pain in his chest and shoulder. His death was almost instantaneous and Dr. Brooke says it was his heart. Dafydd and I helped Mark make the final arrangements. Mrs. Pentreath will receive a pension from Cartwright & Davies. I wish it were larger but she should be able to manage. (Mark refused any offers of financial assistance from me or Rhys. For the time being Mrs. Pentreath will continue to live in the house she and her husband were renting. She refused an offer from the elder of Mark’s two sisters to come live with them but the rent is reasonable, and Bronwen and I can understand her reluctance to give up her own home and live in her daughter’s.) Jory Pentreath was at least ten years my junior and his death has certainly made me more aware of my own mortality. I grieve that he never had a chance to know Mark and Gwyneth’s child. If they have a son, he will be named Jory Allun for his grandfather.

“We should write a letter of sympathy to Mark,” Ben said and Joe nodded, knowing the grief he would be suffering when the time came he lost his beloved pa. At least Mark had Gwyneth and the child she was carrying, and Adam would have Bronwen and his children to share in his grief while he— Joe resolutely forced his thoughts back to the letter.

We are anxiously awaiting news from Miranda and William about their child. By the time you receive this card, Miranda’s due date should only be a couple of weeks away. And speaking of grandchildren, Elen is so proud of being a big girl of five. She adores the doll the two of you sent her and named her Jane. Huw is looking very grownup in his little knickerbockers and his short hair. At eleven months, Dylan’s thick black curls remind us of Gwyneth at the same age. (I suppose he would remind Pa of me at that age.) A.C. continues to grow and he is now five feet, six inches, which makes him taller than his two eldest sisters (and his mother, of course)!

Returning to the subject of expectant mothers, Gwyneth and Emma are both doing well. They are busy sewing little gowns for their babies. (Beth is loaning some of her old baby clothes to Gwyneth and Matilda is happy to be sewing little gowns and bonnets for her future grandchild. Bronwen hates to sew but she is crocheting comforters for the babies.) I find it an amazing coincidence that Miranda, Gwyneth and Emma are all due to give birth between the end of December and the middle of March.

I think that is all my news for now. Merry Christmas from all of us to all of you.

Affectionately yours,

Adam

“It is a pretty amazing coincidence,” Joe said with a grin as he handed the letter to his father, who took it with a smile. Joe picked up the Christmas card and examining it remarked, “I can hardly believe little Elen can already write. You can tell she’s Adam’s granddaughter. I bet she can hardly wait to start attending school.”

{ { { {

Joe would have been astonished to learn just how wrong his prediction was.

The Sunday before school was to start, the Joneses dined with the Cartwrights. Elen was sitting at Adam’s right on one of the little blocks he had made to fit in their dining room chairs so the children could eat at the table. He turned to his little granddaughter and said with a smile, “So, tomorrow is your first day of school. I bet you’re excited.”

Elen’s lower lip came out in a pout and she shook her head vigorously. “No! I don’t wanna go to school!”

Adam’s eyebrow arched and he looked at his firstborn. “She’s only five, Daddy, and she doesn’t want to go so Dafydd and I thought she could wait until next year when she’s six.”

Dafydd added, “I’ve tried to tell her that she’ll have fun at school, but she’ll have none of it.”

“But you already know the alphabet and you can count to twenty,” A.C. interjected. “That’s more than most of the little kids know when they start school.”

“I don’t wanna go!” Elen repeated, her pout becoming more pronounced.

“Why don’t you want to go, Elen?” Bronwen asked quietly. “Your friend Kerra goes to school, and you could play with her at recess.”

“No! I don’t wanna go!” Elen reiterated mulishly.

“I went to school the first time when I was five,” Adam said gently. “Your great-grandma Inger walked to school with me and I had a wonderful time.”

Bronwen remembered that Beth and Miranda had been eleven and ten respectively when Cloncurry’s school was built. They had scorned the idea of their mother accompanying them their first day. Eight-year-old Gwyneth was anxious, but since she was going with her two big sisters, she hadn’t asked for Bronwen either. Five-year-old Penny had been thrilled to be considered old enough to attend school with her older sisters. It had been Bronwen and Adam who had found it difficult to accept that their baby (as she had been then) was grown up enough for school.

A.C. was the only one of their children who had been reluctant to begin school, and that was because of Penny’s death three months earlier, which made him fearful of being separated from his mama. The teacher had understood the circumstances and allowed Bronwen to remain until the frightened little boy felt secure and reassured by Gwyneth’s presence.

Elen had always been a mama’s girl and Bronwen suspected that was the reason why she didn’t want to begin school, and why Beth was happy to wait another year. However, Elen was a very bright little girl and, as A.C. had pointed out, her tada and her pa-pa had already taught her the alphabet and numbers, so she really belonged in school. Besides, being around other children might help her overcome her shyness.

“I could walk you to school, just like great-grandma Inger walked Pa-pa,” Bronwen suggested.

“And I’d come with you and Me-ma,” Adam added, for his reasoning was similar to Bronwen’s.

Beth frowned a little at her parents but Dafydd said encouragingly, “Isn’t it nice of Pa-pa and Me-ma to walk you to school, Elen fach? And Tada will come too. What do you say? Will you go to school with all of us?”

Elen wrinkled her forehead and frowned a little before saying cautiously, “Okay.”

Early the next morning Adam and Bronwen arrived at the rectory. “My, don’t you look pretty, precious,” Adam said when Elen appeared dressed in a smocked frock of pink calico and a white pinafore, her thick caramel-colored hair held back by a wide pink ribbon, holding her tada’s hand. He was rewarded by a happy smile.

Huw and thirteen-month-old Dylan, who was just learning to run if he held his arms out for balance, came dashing down the hallway then, followed by their mother. Dylan, his thick black curls bouncing as he ran, made straight for Bronwen. “Me-ma!” he squealed and she bent down and picked him up so she could hug and kiss him.

“G’day, Pa-pa!” Huw said with an enormous grin and Adam tossed him up and caught him while he chuckled gleefully.

“Me, Pa-pa! Me!” Dylan then squealed so Adam complied with a smile.

“Are we ready to go?” Dafydd asked then, giving his little girl’s hand a gentle squeeze and she nodded, a bit apprehensively.

“Do you have your hankie?” Beth asked anxiously.

“Yes, Mama,” Elen replied, pulling it out of the pocket of her pinafore.

“Here’s your tucker,” Beth said, handing her daughter a shiny, new dinner pail.

Huw now spoke up. “I wanna come. Please, Tada.”

“Is it all right if Huw comes with us?” Dafydd asked Elen and she nodded.

“All right, let’s go,” Adam said, wanting to be on their way before Elen could change her mind.

“Goodbye, sweetie,” Beth said, smiling bravely as she kissed her firstborn’s rosy cheek. “Be a good girl and mind Miss Andrews.”

“Bye, Mama,” Elen said, her lower lip beginning to quiver, and she flung her arms around her mama’s neck. Beth hugged her back and then straightened up, blinking back the tears that threatened to overflow.

Adam quickly handed Dylan back to Beth while Bronwen and Huw headed out the door. He took Elen’s other hand and the three of them exited, Elen looking tearfully over her shoulder at her mama. Beth and Dylan stepped onto the verandah and waved to Elen, who continued to look over her shoulder, while her brother skipped ahead, holding onto his grandma’s hand.

As they were walking by the Hughnans’ house, the front door opened and the three younger children—Tegen, Jowan and Kerra—came running down to the street.

“G’day,” they all called. “Where are you going?”

“We’re walking to school with Elen,” Dafydd replied with a smile. “Would you like to walk with us?”

“Right,” Kerra said but Jowan replied, “Thanks, but I’m gonna walk with my mates,” and then he sprinted ahead.

“A.C.’s not with you?” Tegen said in a disappointed tone and the three adults exchanged tiny grins, for they knew Tegen liked A.C., but so far he had no interest in girls.

“You can sit with me and Molly,” Kerra said to Elen, who nodded, but tightened her grip on her tada’s hand.

When they arrived at the schoolhouse, Melanie was standing by the door to greet the students, and she smiled when she saw the Cartwrights, Dafydd and Huw with Elen. “G’day,” she said, walking up to greet them. “G’day, Elen. I’m happy to see you. Now I will have three pupils in the primer class.”

“G’day, Miss Andrews,” Elen replied, holding her tada’s hand in a death grip.

“G’day,” Huw said with his infectious grin.

“Now, are you coming to school, Huw?” Melanie asked teasingly.

He looked at his tada, who grinned and shook his head before saying, “No, I think we’ll keep him home with us for a couple of years.”

“Who are the others in the primer class?” Bronwen asked curiously, trying to recall the other children Elen’s age.

“John Edgerton and Michael Browne,” Melanie replied.

“Kerra had said Elen could sit with her and Molly,” Adam inserted and Melanie smiled.

“Right. They are the youngest girls in the school so that should do nicely.” She turned to Elen with another warm smile. “It’s time to ring the bell. Would you like to ring it for me?”

Elen nodded and as she gripped the bell in both hands, first Dafydd and then Adam and Bronwen kissed her cheek and hurried back to the rectory with Huw riding on his pa-pa’s shoulders.

Adam had decided to spend the day at home doing some odd jobs around the house and barn so he and Bronwen could meet Elen and walk her home from school. They and Mrs. Browne were there waiting when the schoolhouse doors opened and the children swarmed out. The older children were first; A.C. saw them and waved before hurrying off with his mates. Finally, the youngest children exited and they walked over to greet Elen.

“So, precious, how was your first day of school?” Adam asked with a warm smile.

“It was okay, Pa-pa. I mean, Grandpa,” Elen replied quietly.

“You don’t sound very convinced,” Bronwen said, gently smoothing back Elen’s golden brown hair while she and Adam exchanged a glance of surprise at her new name for him.

Elen was quiet for a moment and then her lower lip began to quiver. “John said only babies call their grandpa and grandma ‘Pa-pa’ and ‘Me-ma’ and I’m not a baby,” she got out in a quavering voice and her grandparents could see the tears pooling in her enormous brown eyes.

Adam picked her up and held her so he could look into her sad eyes. “No, you are not a baby. If you want to call me Pa-pa that’s perfectly all right. If you want to call me Grandpa, that’s all right, too. Either way you are a big girl who’s old enough to go to school and to write your name and count to twenty. It doesn’t matter what John says. Okay?”

“’Kay, Grandpa,” she replied, smiling through her tears and her grandparents exchanged telling glances. Adam wished he could have a necessary talk with Master John.

On the way home, Elen became more animated as she talked about what she’d learned in school and how she and Kerra and Molly had played hopscotch and they were teaching her to play jacks and she was going to ask her mama and tada if she could have some jacks of her own. She was surprised when her grandma whispered something to her grandpa. He nodded and then her grandma said, “I think we may still have the jacks that belonged to your mama and your Aunt Penny. Would you like to have those?” and Elen nodded happily.

As January drew to a close, the Cartwrights, Joneses and Pentreaths waited impatiently for word from Hanover about Miranda’s baby. Finally, the first week in February, the Cobb and Co. mail coach brought a letter from Hanover. It wasn’t in Miranda’s familiar handwriting and the return address said Dr. W. Gordon. When Bronwen held the envelope in her hand, she felt a cold knot of fear in her belly. All day long she tried to push the worry to the back of her mind, but without success. As soon as Adam kissed her hello that evening, she said quietly, “William sent us a letter.”

“William, not Miranda?” he asked, feeling the same dread, and she nodded, handing him the envelope. He tore it open and scanned it quickly, and she saw the relief on his face.

“Miranda’s all right?”

He nodded and handed her the letter.

January 1, 1900

Dear Mama and Dad,

Jonathan Eric Gordon was born at 07:50 a.m. He and Miranda are both doing well. I will confess I was out of my mind with worry earlier. Miranda had a very difficult labor and after eighteen hours she was growing weak from exhaustion so her doctor performed a Cesarean section. He assures me that there were no complications and Miranda will recover fully. (She is still under the influence of the anesthetic, so I haven’t been able to speak with her yet). I’ve held Jonathan. I don’t think I realized just how tiny newborn babies are; however, Dr. Newby assures me Jon is not unusually small. He is bald and his skin is red and blotchy, but the doctor says he won’t look that way for long. I do think he has Miranda’s mouth and her long, black eyelashes and his eyes are huge like Mama’s. That’s really all I can tell at this point.

I am sure Miranda will be writing you soon, but I wanted to get a letter off to you as soon as possible.

With much affection,

William

“Another grandson,” Bronwen said with a smile.

“Yes, although I was rather hoping for another granddaughter,” Adam commented wistfully. “Mostly I am just so relieved to know Miranda and the baby are all right.”

“Now we need to let the rest of the family know about Jonathan Eric’s arrival,” Bronwen added with a smile. Then puckering her forehead in a slight frown she said, “Tomorrow I’m going to talk with Dr. Brooke about Cesarean sections so I understand better.”

“Then you can explain to me,” Adam said, putting his arm about her shoulders.

Within a week, the happy atmosphere at the Cartwright house had become strained and tense. Actually, the tension had been building for several weeks prior to the news of Jonathan Eric’s birth, and the discord centered about A.C. Adam and Bronwen had clashed before over their youngest; this time they disagreed strongly about whether Adam should teach A.C. to shoot a gun since he was turning twelve, the age when Adam and his brothers had received their first rifles.

The morning of his son’s twelfth birthday, Adam woke to find Bronwen sleeping at the edge of the bed, as far as she could be from him and still be sharing the bed. He sighed and sat up, and saw her stir. “Good morning,” he said quietly and leaned over to kiss her cheek. She moved out of reach and got out of bed, putting on her spectacles.

She turned to face him then, and frowning, she asked, “Do you still intend to teach A.C. to use your pistol?”

“Bronwen, we’ve been over this ad nauseam. A.C. is twelve years old today and I think it’s time he learned to use a firearm,” he replied in a tone that clearly displayed his frustration.

“Adam, I don’t want him to learn to use a gun. Don’t my wishes mean anything to you?”

“Of course they do,” he replied impatiently. “But I could say the same. I never interfered when you taught the girls to cook and sew and all the other things a woman needs to know, so I don’t think you should interfere when I teach A.C. things a man needs to know.” He paused and looked at her, his eyebrows drawn together in a fierce expression. “I am adamant about this, Bronwen. A.C. will learn to use a gun.”

She stared at him with flashing eyes—too angry for speech—and then turned on her heel and walked out.

“I can’t believe she is being so stubborn,” he muttered angrily. He yanked a clean shirt from the wardrobe and put it on before heading to A.C.’s room. The youngster was just finishing making his bed and looked up with a grin.

“Happy birthday, Jackeroo,” Adam said and managed a smile. “Let’s hurry and get our chores done. Now that you’re twelve, I think it’s time you learned how to use a gun.”

“You mean I got a gun for my birthday!” A.C. whooped but Adam said firmly, “Whoa, boy. I didn’t say that. I said it was time you learned to use one. I thought I’d show you the basics and then you can have some target practice with my Smith & Wesson Schofield. But it’ll be a few years before you’re old enough to own a gun.” He hesitated, then said quietly, “Don’t talk about your target practice around your mama. She’s not too happy about it.”

“Okay,” A.C. said, too excited at the prospect of finally learning how to shoot to pay any attention to his dad’s behavior.

A.C. had excellent hand-eye coordination and Adam could tell he would be a crack shot. He was so excited that Adam had to remind him not to talk about shooting around his mother as they approached the house.

Bronwen greeted A.C. with a smile. “Happy birthday, A.C. bach,” she said, standing on tiptoe so she could kiss his cheek.

“Thanks, Mama. What are we having for breakfast?”

“Your favorite—flapjacks and sausage,” she replied, still smiling. “But you’ll have to hurry because you’re late.”

“Okay. Let’s sing grace,” he suggested. Excited as he was, he did notice that his mama hesitated to take his dad’s hand and realized they hadn’t spoken to each other. It made him a little uncomfortable but he figured they wouldn’t stay angry and dug into his flapjacks. He finished in record time, causing his mother to shake her head, and bolted out the door calling, “Bye. Don’t forget about the battledore and shuttlecock game, Dad!”

“I won’t!” Adam called after him. He started to say something but saw Bronwen was picking up her own dishes and A.C.’s with a stony face. She can be as stubborn as she likes! I am raising my son to be a man and that’s that! He finished his breakfast and carried his dishes to the kitchen.

“I’ll be home early to help set up the game,” he said and got no response. When he bent to kiss her goodbye, she turned her back on him. “All right, have it your way!” he snarled and slammed the door behind him.

They put up a front while A.C.’s mates were over for his party, but when their family arrived for the birthday supper, they immediately sensed the coldness between them. Beth and Dafydd exchanged worried glances as they helped their children get settled around the little table Adam had made for them while Gwyneth and Emma, who were both in their eighth month, sat gratefully on the dining room chairs.

“So how is the birthday boy?” Rhys asked jovially.

“I’m fine, Uncle Rhys. Guess what! Dad let me do some target shooting this morning!” A.C. announced excitedly. As soon as he saw the expression on his mama’s face he remembered what he’d promised and wished he’d kept him mouth shut.

Llywelyn wasn’t paying attention and said, “I think I was about twelve when my dad showed me.” He continued, oblivious to the rising tension in the room. “I even got your dad to show me his fast draw. What a ripper!”

“Unfortunately, my husband seems to forget he is no longer living in Nevada, and that what was appropriate behavior at that place and time is no longer,” Bronwen said in a tone that was glacial. Adam’s eyes narrowed and his lips thinned, but he made no comment.

“Well, A.C.,” Gwyneth said heartily, trying to lighten the atmosphere, “think you can blow out all twelve candles?”

“Can I help, Unca A.C.?” Huw asked.

“I think Uncle A.C. is capable of blowing out his own candles,” Beth said firmly. “Besides, Huw, in a couple of weeks, you’ll have three candles of your own to blow out.”

“The tucker is ready. Beth, could help me bring it out?” Bronwen asked, and her tone was uncharacteristically sharp. After exchanging quick glances with her sister and aunt, Beth went to help while everyone else sat down at the table. Rhys leaned over and said sotto voce to Matilda, “Looks like my sister doesn’t approve of Adam teaching A.C. to shoot.”

“I’d say that would be an understatement,” Matilda whispered back.

“They’ll work it out,” Rhys said confidently. However, his assurance was shaken as the evening progressed and he noticed that Bronwen and Adam never once spoke directly, and in fact seemed to avoid even looking at each other.

After the supper, they gathered in the library to watch A.C. open his gifts. Elen, Huw and Dylan began nodding off, so it wasn’t a late evening. The Joneses took their children home to their beds, and Gwyneth and Emma waddled home with their spouses, but Matilda helped Bronwen to clean up while Adam, Rhys and A.C. sat on the verandah—out of earshot—and talked about guns and shooting.

After their guests had all gone home, A.C. said with a forced cheerfulness, “I had a wonderful birthday. Thanks, Mama and Dad.” He dropped a quick kiss on Bronwen’s cheek and then hurried upstairs. Bronwen looked in Adam’s general direction, careful not to make eye contact, and said brusquely, “I’ll be sleeping in Beth and Miranda’s old room.” Then she rose and left the room without a backward glance.

I’m not giving her the satisfaction of going after her. If she wants to sleep alone, fine! I think I’ll just do a little reading before I turn in. He selected A Tale of Two Cities, an old favorite, and made himself comfortable. He didn’t get very far since memories of the time he’d read the book aloud to the family kept intruding: Six-year-old Penny curled up in his lap, her eyelids drooping closed, while nine-year-old Gwyneth perched on the arm of the chair, her expression so intense. Eleven-year-old Miranda sat cross-legged at his feet, her face alight with interest, and even the non-bookish Beth, sitting in the leather chair beside his, was clearly absorbed. Then there was Bronwen, heavily pregnant with A.C., sitting across from him with her basket of mending and looking as lovely as a Botticelli madonna—No, I will not think of her! He slammed the book shut and headed up the steps with a heavy tread.

Adam and Bronwen were two stubborn people who each thought the other was in the wrong. The longer the quarrel dragged on, the more self-righteous each felt and the more determined not to back down. As the days turned to weeks, it got so bad that they began speaking to each other through A.C. and he began to dread mealtimes, the only time the three of them were together.

Finally, the third week after his birthday, he just couldn’t stand it any longer. When he got home from school, instead of going home, he went next door.

“G’day, Aunt Tilda,” he said after Daisy answered his knock and escorted him to his aunt’s sewing room—a room that always made the boy feel clumsy and awkward with its frilly lace curtains and doilies and flowered wallpaper.

“G’day, A.C. Now, to what do I owe the pleasure of your company?” Matilda asked with a smile, putting down the little smocked frock she was making for her future grandchild.

“I wondered if maybe I could eat supper with you and Uncle Rhys?”

“And not at home?”

“I don’t want to eat there; please, let me eat with you,” the boy begged.

“It’s that bad?” she asked softly and he nodded, his face clearly reflecting his misery.

Matilda was quiet and A.C. was afraid she’d refuse him; he supposed he could see if maybe Beth would let him eat at her house. Then Matilda spoke in a brisk, no-nonsense tone. “Here’s what we’ll do. I want you to go to Beth and ask her if you can have supper at the rectory. Tell her Uncle Rhys and I intend to have a talk with your parents.”

A.C.’s eyes grew round, but he nodded and headed on his way. It wasn’t too much later that Daisy escorted Dafydd into the sewing room. “G’day, Dafydd,” Matilda said with a warm smile of greeting.

“Good day, Modryb Matilda,” he said returning her smile. “A.C. delivered your message, and I would like to come with you and Ewyrth Rhys. I’ve been remiss in my pastoral duty, but it’s a bit awkward with my own in-laws.”

“I welcome your company,” she said, her expression now serious. “I can’t believe they’ve let it go on so long and that they can’t see they are making A.C. miserable.”

“They’re causing grief to Bethan, and I imagine to Gwyneth as well,” Dafydd said. “It seems incredible that they could have been so happily married for all these years, and now they let their stubbornness and pride separate them. I know they still love each other; we just need to convince them.”

Bronwen, meanwhile, was fuming because A.C. was so late. He knew he was to let her know before going off with his mates. He’s becoming as inconsiderate as his father!

A.C. still hadn’t returned when she saw Adam riding toward the barn. A part of her wanted to go to him, to tell him she was worried and feel his arms around her, comforting her, but she squelched those thoughts.

Adam was surprised to see A.C.’s cob wasn’t in the barn. He knows he’s to be home by suppertime. He’s as irresponsible as his mother!

She stood on the verandah until she could see him heading toward the house, and then she walked into the kitchen. “Mary, please go ahead and serve Mr. Cartwright his supper. I’m going to look for A.C.” She had nearly reached the street when she heard her brother calling her name and turned to see Rhys, Matilda and Dafydd walking toward her.

“Where are you hurrying off to, Bronwen?” Rhys called.

She stopped and waited for them. “I’m going to look for my son. He knows he is supposed to be home for supper.”

“A.C. is having supper at the rectory,” Dafydd said calmly.

“There’s no reason for you and Beth to feed him; I fixed supper for him,” she said sharply.

“I sent him to the rectory,” Matilda said in an unruffled tone. “He asked if he could eat with us since meals at home are so unpleasant.”

“He told you that!” Bronwen replied, her voice rising in anger and embarrassment. Just then Adam approached, his eyebrows drawn together in a scowl.

‘What’s going on? Bucephalas isn’t in the barn and Mary tells me A.C. hasn’t been home since he left for school this morning.”

“A.C. is having supper at the rectory so the three of us could speak with you and Mam in private,” Dafydd replied. “I suggest we go inside.”

The three could see how angry Adam and Bronwen were at this intrusion in their private life, but they didn't want to create a public spectacle so they agreed to go inside. Adam started to stop in the drawing room, but Dafydd said, “No, let’s go to the library.” When everyone was seated—Bronwen and Adam as far apart as they could get—Dafydd said, “I should have been to visit you much sooner but my role as your minister was in conflict with my role as your son-in-law.”

Bronwen and Adam both frowned but Dafydd continued. “I wonder if the two of you realize how miserable you are making the rest of the family.” Adam started to speak but Dafydd held up his hand. “No, I can see you don’t. A.C. came to his aunt today and asked to have supper there because he couldn’t bear to be here with the two of you. No, let me finish. My children no longer want to visit because their grandparents are cross with each other. I found my wife crying last night because she is so upset at the estrangement between her parents.” Dafydd shook his head sadly. “For all the years that I’ve known you both, you’ve been such a good example of what a marriage should be: you remembered your vows to love and to cherish each other. I wanted my marriage with Bethan to be like yours, but now ¼ Now it’s as if the first twenty-five years never existed.” He stopped then, seeing that Adam and Bronwen were refusing to meet anyone’s eyes, but his father-in-law’s tense posture telegraphed his anger.

“I realize that I am stepping into a very private area and so do Modryb Matilda and Ewyrth Rhys, but we all love you too much to stand by and see your marriage destroyed.” He saw some of the tension leave his father-in-law and drawing a deep breath continued.

“Perhaps it would help if you talked about what the problem is. Why don’t you go first, Mam.”

“All right,” she replied, still looking away from Adam. “The problem is that your father-in-law knows that I do not want A.C. to learn to use a gun, yet he totally ignores my wishes,” she said in a voice that shook just a little. “Every morning he encourages A.C. to practice shooting with his gun even though he knows how much I hate it.”

When she stopped, Dafydd looked at Adam. “All right, Tada. Now we’d like to hear your side.”

Adam avoided looking at Bronwen just as scrupulously as she’d avoided him, but when he spoke it was in a calm, reasonable tone. “It’s true that I knew she did not want A.C. to learn to use a gun; it is also true that she knew I did want him to learn. I intend to raise my son—our son—to be a man, not a spineless namby-pamby.”

“He’s not a man! He’s a twelve-year-old boy!” Bronwen spit out, in her anger forgetting and addressing her husband directly.

“I got my first rifle when I was twelve and my father taught me to use it. Each of my brothers received his first rifle when he was twelve,” he replied calmly. “I respected your wishes enough to hold off giving him a gun of his own, but I believe he is responsible enough to learn how to use one.” There was real puzzlement in his voice as he said, “I don’t understand why you are so against him learning to use a gun,” but she looked away.

“I think perhaps I can explain,” Matilda interjected after it was clear Bronwen would not respond. “It’s not the gun, is it, Bronwen? You’re afraid of what it represents: that your baby is growing up and becoming a man and he won’t need you any more.” Slowly, Bronwen nodded, her eyes filling with tears.

“Your relationship with A.C. will change, but he’ll always be your son,” Matilda said softly, taking Bronwen’s hand. “It was hard for me, too, but Llywelyn and I are still close, just in a different way.”

“We’re still close to the girls,” Adam said gently, but he didn’t move closer to Bronwen. “It will be the same with A.C.”

“You’re in such a hurry for him to grow up,” she said sadly.

“I don’t mean to be; it was hard on me when the girls grew up, but I couldn’t stop it and maybe I’ve finally accepted it with A.C. I’m sorry I was too insensitive to realize what was really troubling you,” he said gently.

Dafydd exchanged a quick glance with Matilda and Rhys before saying quietly, “We’ll give you some privacy now.”

There was an awkward stillness in the room after the others left. They still had difficulty meeting each other’s eyes and it was difficult, after so long a time of refusing to speak, to find the words. After several long minutes, when they did decide to speak, it was only to talk over each other. That caused them both to smile and look each other in the eye.

“Ladies first,” he said with a little grin.

“I’m sorry for the way I’ve behaved,” she said sincerely. He got up then and sat on the arm of her chair and tentatively reached for her hand. She tensed for a moment, and then allowed him to enfold her hand in his.

“I’m sorry for my behavior as well,” he said softly. Then he added with a bitter laugh, “I see now that there really is no fool like an old fool.”

She squeezed his hand then and said with a smile, “If you’re going to start calling us old, then I’m going to get cross again,” and he returned the smile.

About a half hour later, A.C. came through the front door calling, “Mama! Dad! I’m home!”

“We’re in the library,” he heard his dad answer.

When he walked in the room, he immediately saw them sitting side-by-side and Dad was holding Mama’s hand.

“Have a seat, Jackeroo,” his dad said, nodding at the chairs across from theirs and A.C. sat down gingerly. “We’ve apologized to each other, and we know we need to apologize to you as well.”

“We’re sorry that we made you so unhappy,” Bronwen said softly. “I suppose it just demonstrates that adults can sometimes act like children.”

“And you’re not angry with each other any more?”

“No, we’re not,” Adam replied while Bronwen added, “And I understand about your target shooting.” A.C. grinned at them until Adam asked, “Now, do you have any lessons?”

“Oh. Uh, yeah, I guess I do.”

“It’s getting late so you need to get started. Mama and I are going upstairs so you can have the library all to yourself,” and he smiled tenderly at Bronwen before they stood and headed out the door, hand-in-hand.

When they reached the privacy of their room, he sat in the rocking chair and pulled her on his lap. Then he bent his head to kiss her—a long, tender kiss. “Forgive me, sweetheart, for forgetting how much I love you and how important you are to me,” he said softly when the kiss ended.

“If you’ll forgive me,” she replied, and they kissed again.

“I’ve missed you so. More than I’d even admit to myself,” he said as she rested her head against his shoulder. He smiled just a little and she asked what he was thinking. “Oh, I just remembered some lines by Donne:

Our two souls therefore, which are one,

Though I must go, endure not yet

A breach, but an expansion

Like gold to airy thinness beat.

If they be two, they are two so

As stiff twin compasses are two,

Thy soul the fixed foot, makes no show

To move, but doth, if th’ other do.

And though it in the center sit,

Yet when the other far doth roam,

It leans, and hearkens after it,

And grows erect, as that comes home.

Such wilt thou be to me, who must

Like th’ other foot, obliquely run;

Thy firmness makes my circle just,

And makes me end, where I begun.

She smiled. “I’m not surprised that metaphor appeals to you since it’s constructed like a geometric proof. I prefer these lines:

Yet I would not have all yet.

He that hath all can have no more;

And since my love doth every day admit

New growth, thou shouldst have new rewards in store;

Thou canst not every day give me thy heart,

If thou canst give it, then thou never gavest it:

Loves riddles are, that though thy heart depart,

It stays at home, and thou with losing savest it:

But we will have a way more liberal,

Than changing hearts, to join them; so we shall

Be one, and one another’s all.

“You are my all,” he whispered before capturing her mouth in a long, sweet kiss.

{ { { {

It was a sunny morning in mid-April and Miranda was working in the library. The desk was covered with Euclid’s Elements, Descartes’ Géométrie and Newton’s Principia plus sheets of paper containing mathematical formulae and equations. On the floor, right next to the desk so she could keep an eye on him, was the cradle where three-month-old Jon was sleeping. The only noise in the room was the scratching of Miranda’s pen and the baby’s little sighs. Suddenly the room was filled with the blaring ring of the telephone that sat on the corner of the desk. The noise startled Jon, who woke and began screaming his displeasure.

Knowing she couldn’t hold the baby and pick up the phone, Miranda used her foot to rock the cradle (and hopefully soothe her screaming child) while she picked up the phone’s receiver. “Hello,” she said, covering her other ear with her hand to try and shut out Jon’s screams as she spoke into the mouthpiece. “This is Mrs. Gordon.”

“Miranda, this is Lydia. Since it’s such a lovely day, I was wondering if you’d like to take the babies for a walk. Lucy and Gertrude are planning on taking Emily and Dora. We thought we’d all meet at the Green.”

Miranda was torn; she really wanted to work on her essay, but she knew she needed the exercise and Jon could use the fresh air. “Yes, that would be lovely,” she replied, relieved that Jon had stopped screaming.

“I’ll stop by your house in about half an hour. Will that give you enough time to get ready?”

“Right. I mean, certainly,” Miranda said. Hanging up the phone, she leaned over and lifted her little son from his cradle. “Well, Jon, let’s take you upstairs and see if you need to be changed,” she said, smiling at him. As she headed up the stairs, she called, “Nancy, please bring the baby carriage into the front hall. I’m going to take Jon for a walk.”

She had a pleasant time visiting with her friends. Lucy’s Emily was almost a year and a half, so she wanted to walk part of the time, but was happy riding in her carriage when she was tired, and the same was true of Gertrude’s three-year-old daughter, Dora. Lydia’s little boy, Freddy, at nine months was the closest to Jon in age; he was not walking yet but he liked to sit up in the carriage so he could watch where he was going. When they reached the green, the four mothers watched the two little girls run on the grass and roll a ball back and forth while Miranda and Lydia spread blankets on the grass and sat their boys on them. The young mothers chatted as they watched their children play, discussing teething, diaper rash and dealing with temper tantrums and the dinner party President and Mrs. Tucker were giving for the faculty and spouses that Friday evening.

When Miranda returned, she saw the mail on the table in the entry. Nancy had placed the letter from Queensland on top and Miranda’s face lit up when she saw it. She snatched the letter and wheeled the baby carriage to the library.

“Jon, we have a letter from your grandpa and I bet he’s going to tell us if your Auntie Gwyneth and your cousin Emma had their babies,” she said, lifting him carefully from the carriage and placing him in his cradle. He began to fuss a little and she knew he was probably hungry, so she opened the letter and began to read rapidly.

March 19, 1900

Dear Miranda,

Today has certainly been an eventful one for our family. Gwyneth and Emma both went into labor—Gwyneth first and then Emma, although Emma gave birth first. But I am getting ahead of myself. Mark came to get your mama shortly after I left for the mine. Then about three hours later, Emma went into labor so Mama sent Mark for Matilda. On the way, he stopped off at the school and took A.C. out and sent him to the mine for Llywelyn, Rhys and me.

Poor Dr. Brooke was going back and forth between the two houses. Ifor Rhys Davies arrived at approximately 4:30 in the afternoon, and Jory Allun Pentreath was born at about 5:15. The mothers and the babies are doing well. Jory is the image of his father, while I think Ifor actually favors Matilda. (I must confess no one else thinks that he resembles anyone in particular.) Jory is a little larger but since Gwyneth and Mark are taller than Emma and Llywelyn that’s not surprising.

Elen and Huw are excited at the prospect of having two new cousins, although Elen is disappointed that they are both boys. Your brother, on the other hand, is absolutely delighted. After all these years of it being just him and Llywelyn, now there are five males in this new generation. We are all looking forward to seeing a photograph of Jon. (And yes, that is a very broad hint.)

Mama and I send our love to you and Jon and William. Please tell William that we are both impressed with his thesis on America’s western expansion.

Love,
Daddy

Jon’s whimpers had become screams of hunger, so Miranda quickly laid the letter on the desk, picked Jon up, and hurried up the backstairs to the nursery. Sitting in the rocking chair and nursing him, she said quietly, “Daddy and I sent your photograph to Grandma and Grandpa at the first of the month so they should receive it in a couple of weeks. Your Grandfather and Grandmother Gordon could come see you whenever they wish, but they’ve only been here for your christening. However, I think that is probably just as well. Your Grandmother Gordon would spend all her time telling me everything I’m doing wrong and why I should hire a nursemaid.”

{ { { {

Ben Cartwright was sitting on his front porch enjoying the warm July sunshine, waiting impatiently for Joe and Sarah to return from Carson City with Miranda, William and little Jon.

“They’ll be here soon, Grandpa,” Benj said. “It’s your move.”

“In other words, the time will pass more quickly if I attend to our game,” Ben replied and returned his grandson’s rather sheepish grin. “I know you’re right, but I’m just so anxious to see my great-grandson. They won’t get here any faster for my fretting though,” and he turned his attention to the board.

It was about twenty minutes later when Benj spotted an approaching dust cloud that signaled the Gordons’ arrival. As soon as the surrey pulled into the yard, Ben slowly rose to his feet, with Benj standing by ready to assist. Joe, Sarah and William hung back slightly as Miranda, carrying the seven-month-old Jon, hurried to greet her grandpa.

Oh, Liz, my love, Ben thought as tears filled his eyes, seeing our granddaughter with her baby, I feel I’ve been given an opportunity to see the mother you would have been to our precious Adam.

“Grandpa, here is Jonathan Eric,” Miranda said, holding the baby so Ben could see him clearly. Ben noted the incipient aquiline shape of his nose, which he’d inherited from his father as well as his fine brown hair. The baby had his mother’s (and his maternal grandfather’s) cupid’s bow mouth and dimpled chin. “He has his grandma’s eyes,” Ben said with a warm smile as he gazed into the enormous, violet eyes so like his daughter-in-law’s and his lost little granddaughter’s.

“Yes. I wrote Mama and Daddy. I knew Daddy would be so pleased.”

William approached then and Ben held out his hand to him. “You have a fine son, William,” he said as they shook hands.

“We both think so, sir,” William replied with a broad grin. “He’s just about figured out how to crawl.”

“Would you like to hold him, Grandpa?” Miranda asked, and felt her eyes begin to fill with tears at the joy she could see on her grandpa’s countenance.

“Just let me sit down first,” he replied in a voice that trembled with emotion. Once he was seated, Miranda carefully placed her baby boy in his arms. The child’s violet eyes looked curiously up at him and then he grinned, an engaging toothless grin that made his eyes sparkle and showed he’d inherited his mama’s (and grandpa’s) dimples. Ben tore his eyes away from his great-grandson long enough to take a better look at his granddaughter and her husband. William looked the same except his hair had thinned noticeably; Miranda was not as slim as she had been, but Ben thought she looked pleasingly plump, and from the way William stood with his arm around her shoulders, holding her close, it would appear he felt the same.

Just then Sarah came running over. “Isn’t Jon darling?” she gushed. “Miranda let me hold him part of the way here.”

“Would you like to hold him while William and I change?” Miranda asked Ben, who nodded happily.

“May I help watch him?” Sarah asked and Miranda replied, “That’s a fine idea. We’ll hurry back down. I packed what we’d be wearing in our carpet bag so we wouldn’t have to wait for someone to bring our trunk up.”

The young parents returned shortly—Miranda wearing knickerbockers and William in waist overalls—and found Ben trying to soothe a fretful Jon with Sarah, Benj and Joe looking on. “I’m afraid he needs his diaper changed,” Ben said to Miranda, “and I need to change my trousers.”

“I’m sorry, Grandpa,” Miranda said in a flustered tone, but Ben only smiled.

“Dear, I’ve had plenty of experience with babies and dirty diapers; the two just naturally go together.”

William chuckled and asked, “His diapers and clothes are in the carpet bag, right?” Miranda nodded so he said, “I’ll bring them downstairs and you can change him here.”

“Can I watch?” Sarah asked and Miranda replied, “If you like. He won’t sit still anymore when I change him so I think I’d better lay his blanket down on the porch and change him there.”

“When will he learn to use the outhouse?” Benj asked curiously as they waited for William to return with the necessary paraphernalia and Ben gently jiggled the baby on his knee.

“Not until he’s two; that’s what Mama, Beth and my friends with children all say,” Miranda replied, and Ben added, “Yes, two is about the time to begin training little ones.”

“Here we are,” William said, striding over, diapers, clean gown and blanket in hand.

He quickly laid the blanket on the porch and Miranda took the baby from Ben and laid him down on it. Sarah and Benj saw immediately what their cousin meant about Jon not lying still as he wriggled around and tried to turn over. They both watched openmouthed as Miranda barely missed Jon wetting the front of her blouse when she removed the wet diaper.

“Little boys are trickier to change than little girls,” she said after she fastened the clean diaper. “The first time I changed A.C. when he was a baby, I wasn’t expecting it and he got the front of my blouse.” She looked at William then and said, “I need to do some laundry. Could you watch Jon?”

“I’ll watch him,’ Sarah said eagerly.

Miranda didn’t want to hurt her cousin’s feelings, but she didn’t think Sarah had had any experience caring for babies; however, William understood her dilemma and said quickly, “Why don’t we both look after him? All right?” and Sarah nodded. “And when your grandpa gets back from changing his trousers, then he can help, too.”

Benj was not as enamored with babies so he asked his dad if he could go fishing, and Joe smilingly offered to come with him.

“Yeah, okay,” Benj replied unenthusiastically, and Joe sighed mentally. This summer his relationship with his son was strained. He didn’t know if it was because of the estrangement between him and Annabelle or if it was because Benj was nearly sixteen, or for some other cause entirely. Even Sarah had been rather withdrawn and complained of missing her friends in Boston (although never in her grandpa’s hearing). Joe hoped having Miranda and Jon here would cure her ennui.

Indeed, Sarah was fascinated by Jon and Miranda was willing to allow her to help dress, change, and bathe him. She even let Sarah watch her nurse him. She showed Sarah all the little finger games that Jon loved and Sarah was perfectly content spending time playing with him. With Sarah and Ben watching Jon, Miranda and William were able to spend some time alone. A few days after they arrived, they had gone for a ride and Joe and Benj had gone to check the fence in the south pasture, leaving Ben and Sarah home with Jon.

When the young couple returned, as soon as they walked through the door, Sarah announced, “Jon is crawling!” And to prove it, the little boy began crawling as fast as he could toward his parents.

“Jon, you clever little fellow!” William said, scooping up his son and holding him high over his head while Jon chortled delightedly. “Isn’t it wonderful, dearest? The next thing we know, he’ll be walking!”

“Yes, it’s wonderful,” she replied but he saw the sadness in her hazel eyes. “Here, let me have him so I can take him upstairs and feed him.” He handed her the baby and then followed her upstairs.

“What’s wrong, dearest?” he asked, leaning on the old crib, which had been put in the room across the hall from theirs for Jon.

“There’s nothing wrong,” she replied, unbuttoning her blouse and offering Jon her breast.

“Yes, there is,” he said quietly.

She sighed before replying softly, “I wasn’t there to see when he crawled for the first time.”

“I would have liked to have seen it as well,” he replied gently, “but since I have to be separated from Jon for so many hours of the day, I’ve resigned myself to the fact I will miss some things he does. Hopefully, we’ll both be there when he takes his first step or says his first word.”

She smiled at him then. “I am being foolish. And I used to pride myself on being logical and dispassionate.”

He reached out and cupped her cheek in his palm then saying, “And I admire those qualities in you, but I’m glad you are passionate when it comes to me and our son.”

A few mornings later, Miranda and William’s early morning lovemaking was interrupted by a frantic knocking on their door and Sarah’s nearly hysterical voice saying, “Miranda. Miranda, can I talk with you?”

“Uh, just a minute, Sarah,” Miranda called and William said in disgust, “Timing is everything.”

“I’ll make it up to you, dear, I promise,” Miranda said as she retrieved her nightgown from the floor where William had tossed it, “but she sounds desperate.”

She hurriedly slipped on her negligee and opened the door to reveal an obviously terror-stricken Sarah. “Sarah, what’s wrong?” she asked anxiously, wondering if she should wake Uncle Joe.

“Come,” Sarah said, clutching her hand in one as cold as ice. She pulled Miranda into her bedroom and pointed at her bed, where Miranda saw a large splotch of blood.

“Oh, didn’t you bring any rags?” Miranda asked. “You can use some of mine.”

“R-rags?” Sarah stuttered, staring at her cousin with terrified eyes.

“To use when you have your monthly cycle,” Miranda replied. Seeing the total lack of comprehension in her cousin’s terrified eyes, Miranda said cautiously, “Hasn’t Aunt Annabelle told you about a woman’s monthly cycle?” Sarah shook her head. With a sigh of disbelief (and a silent thank you to her own mother for her wisdom in ensuring her daughters were prepared for this momentous change in their lives), Miranda said, “Let me get you what you’ll need and then I will explain what’s happening to you.”

The last week of the Gordons’ visit to the Ponderosa, Jacob returned from Carson City with a parcel wrapped in brown paper and a small wooden crate.

“The parcel’s for Dr. and Mrs. W. Gordon and the package is from Queensland,” Jacob said in his rich baritone. Ben was holding Jon and playing “This Little Piggy” but Miranda and William halted their chess game to accept the two packages from Jacob.

“Sarah should be back from visiting Melissa Lightly soon and Uncle Joe and Benj should be back in about an hour so we should wait for them to open the package from Queensland,” Miranda suggested and Ben nodded. “I told our maid, Nancy, to send our mail here if it arrived before the middle of August. Do you mind if William and I go ahead and read it?”

“Not at all,” Ben replied. “Jon and I won’t even notice.”

William and Miranda exchanged smiles as they began opening their mail. The yard was quiet except for distant birdsong, Jon’s happy chuckles and the soft rumbles of Ben’s bass as he recited little rhymes to his great-grandson. Suddenly the quiet was broken by Miranda’s audible gasp.

“Dearest?” William asked quizzically, while Ben raised one eyebrow in the familiar gesture.

“My essay is being published,” she replied excitedly. “I sent my essay on a new theory I developed to a mathematical journal and they are going to publish it.” Seeing her grandpa’s eyebrow was still raised, Miranda added quickly, “I submitted it under the name M. I. Cartwright.” Now both men looked at her with raised eyebrows and she said defensively, “I knew there was a much better chance of it being taken seriously if they didn’t know I was a woman.”

“You’re right,” William replied. “It’s not just, but there is still a prejudice against female scholars, particularly in the fields of science and mathematics.” He winked at his wife then adding, “I do wish you had submitted it under the name M. I. Gordon though.”

As soon as Joe and Benj returned, they all gathered on the front porch (except for Jon, who was sleeping) while Joe opened the crate, disclosing a photograph album and two letters.

“Let’s look at the album first,” Sarah suggested eagerly and everyone else readily agreed. The first page showed a large photograph of the extended Cartwright family gathered under the palm tree in the Cartwrights’ front yard.

“Gosh, A.C. is almost as tall as Gwyneth. I bet he is as tall as you, Benj,” Sarah announced and her brother frowned.

“It looks like Gwyneth got her figure back already,” Miranda said enviously, while silently vowing to go for more walks with Jon and rides on her mare.

“Your figure is fine, dearest,” William said, leaning over to kiss her, while Benj squirmed in discomfort. The sight of his cousin and her husband kissing and hugging caused his body to react in embarrassing ways. William looked at the photograph with interest remarking, “Dad is quite the paterfamilias.”

“Actually, Grandpa is the paterfamilias,” Benj said smugly.

“I stand corrected,” William replied with a smile.

“Okay, will someone tell me what a paterfamilias is?” Joe said with a slight frown.

“It means head of the family in Latin,” Benj answered with just a trace of condescension, which made his father’s frown deepen.

“If we want to be technical, Daddy is the paterfamilias of the Australian branch of the Cartwright family,” Miranda replied, noting the tension between her uncle and cousin and wanting to defuse it.

“What I would like is to see the next page in the album,” Ben inserted and, with a smile, Miranda complied with his request. This page had a photograph of a proud Mark and Gwyneth, who was holding four-month-old Jory.

“My, he certainly is the image of Mark,” Joe said and William added, “Yes, he’s all Pentreath.”

The album also contained individual pictures of Elen, Huw and Dylan, as well as one of them with their parents.

“Huw certainly looks adorable in that little suit we gave him for Christmas,” Miranda commented with a grin.

“Dylan does remind me of Adam with those curls,” Ben remarked with a fond smile. Then he said firmly, “Now let’s read the letters.”

“All right,” Miranda said. “There’s one from Daddy and one from A.C., and Elen,” she added, surprised to see the five-year-old’s wobbly printing.

“Oh, let’s read that one first,” Sarah begged.

July 10, 1900

Dear Family,

Our July holiday starts in a couple of days, and this year Dad and Mama are letting me spend the two weeks on the Dawson’s station. Mr. Dawson knows I love horses and he offered to let me work as a stable boy at the stud farm he and Dad own. Dad told me to remember Mr. Dawson will be my employer and not to expect any special treatment. I told him I wouldn’t. I’ll stay on the station while I’m working there. Mama didn’t like that but Dad and I finally talked her into agreeing. Sometimes Mama wants to treat me like a baby. Dad is not so bad, but even though he lets me practice target shooting with his pistol, he says he and Mama have agreed I can’t have a gun of my own until I’m at least fifteen. I don’t think that’s fair because I know he and Uncle Joe and Uncle Hoss got their first rifle when they were twelve. Dad says if I pester him about it, then I’ll be sixteen. Maybe if Grandpa or Uncle Joe wrote to Dad and Mama and suggested I get a gun this year for Christmas, they’ll change their mind.

Ben and Joe exchanged glances and shook their heads as Miranda read this.

Elen just came by and saw me writing this letter and she wants to write one to you, so I told her she could write hers at the end of mine. She’s doing very well in school. She does better than the two little boys in the primer class and they don’t like that. One of them kept calling her names so Robby and I let him know he’d better stop, or else. (Course, I wouldn’t ever really hit a little kid; I just wanted to scare him so he’d leave Elen alone and it worked. Dad told me once that bullies are cowards and he’s right.)

Little girls like Elen are okay, but the girls my age are drongos. Lots of them stare at me and always want me to talk with them. Beth says they like me. I wish they didn’t! I am going to let Elen write her letter now.

Love,
A.C.

“Gosh, I think it must be awfully strange to go to school with boys,” Sarah pronounced.

“Oh, when I first began attending the Girls Latin School, it seemed strange to me not to have any boys in the classes,” Miranda replied.

“If you’d been in my classes, I’d have been too distracted from my schoolwork,” William said, picking up his wife’s hand and dropping a kiss on the palm.

“I’d like to hear Elen’s letter,” Ben said firmly so everyone quieted and Miranda continued.

helo i go to skol i can read i mis yu

Elen

“May I see it?” Ben asked, holding out his hand. “Very good for a little girl of five,” he remarked, and Joe, who’d been looking over his shoulder, added, “It sure is!”

William looked at it next and said, “I hope Jon can do as well when he’s five.”

“Now for Daddy’s letter,” Miranda said and began to read.

July 9, 1900

Dear Family,

I hope this letter finds all of you in good heath. We are having a very dry winter. The last time it rained was back in the middle of May. It’s been chilly as well and some days it barely reached 70 degrees and actually fell below 50 degrees once or twice. I know that from your point of view that sounds like a very warm winter, but after living here for twenty-five years, it seems chilly to me. I don’t think I could take a winter in Hanover where Miranda says the temperature is often below 10 degrees.

We received the photograph of Jon and the one of Jon and his parents. I am so pleased to see one of my grandchildren has inherited his grandma’s eyes. Bronwen and I don’t like to brag (she just read over my shoulder and said, yes, we do!) but we have beautiful grandchildren. And our grandnephew is also an amazing child. He and Jory are smiling and each boy can turn over from his back onto his stomach. It looks like Dylan is going to be a bit small for his age but he is also very active. Beth says she can’t take her eyes off him for a second. If you remember what Joe was like at about a year and a half, Pa, then you know what Dylan is like.

Miranda stopped reading for a minute at her grandpa’s chuckle. “Poor Beth,” he said grinning at his youngest. “At least Adam was old enough to help look after you, but Beth has two other small children.”

“Lucky for Beth that at least Elen is in school most of the day,” Miranda commented with a grin before returning to her reading.

Huw seems to have passed through that difficult stage children grow through when the only word in their vocabulary seems to be, ‘No!’ He and Dylan play very well together. Huw got a cloth ball of his own for his birthday and the two boys like to play catch with it. Uncle A.C. gave Huw his old pop gun and his pennywhistle. (Dafydd says he wished A.C. hadn’t been quite so generous with the whistle, and I know what he means.) Going to school has helped Elen with her shyness. There are two other girls a year older and the three of them play together at recess. Since Kerra lives next door, she and Elen play with their dolls at each other’s homes the same way Penny and her friend Kate used to do. Poor Beth doesn’t have time to go riding with Elen and now Auntie Gwyneth is too busy with Jory, so I try to get home from the mine early enough in the evening that I can go for a ride with her. (Bronwen used to join us but her Olwen died and she’s decided to give up riding.)

I imagine A.C. wrote you about asking me to get him a gun for Christmas or his next birthday. Actually, I think he is responsible enough but Bronwen wants him to wait until he’s fifteen, and I intend to respect her wishes. (She is having just as difficult a time with our son growing up and becoming a man as I did with our daughters becoming women. It won’t hurt A.C. to wait a few years, and it makes it easier for Bronwen to accept the fact that I will give him a gun of his own.) He and I do some target practice almost every morning. He begged me to teach him my fast draw and I finally gave in. We haven’t mentioned that to Bronwen; she doesn’t want to know about our target practice so the subject has never come up. I suspect she knows about it though and has just decided to say nothing.

I think that is all my news for now.

Affectionately yours,

Adam

P.S. I sent another album to Hanover and it should be there for Miranda and William when they return.

“Poor Mama,” Miranda said, carefully folding the letter. “I’m glad it will be years before I have to worry about Jon growing up.”

“Listen to you,” William said playfully. “The little fellow isn’t even walking yet and you’re worrying about him growing up,” and she stuck out her tongue at him, making Sarah giggle.

“Uncle Adam can do a fast draw like you, Dad?” Benj asked skeptically.

“Who do you think taught me?” his dad replied with a wink. “I expect he’s slowed down some, but he was as fast as I was.”

{ { { {

“Hurry please, Mama,” Elen begged. “I want to see what Grandma and Grandpa got me for Christmas.”

“Me, too,” piped up three-year-old Dylan.

“And me,’ shouted four-and-a-half-year-old Huw.

“All right, children,” Dafydd said, “I think we’re ready.”

“Can you carry the mince pies?” Beth asked her husband, and he nodded.

“I wanna carry Grandma’s and Grandpa’s gifts,” Huw said.

“No, I want to,” Elen said, glaring at her brother.

“Elen, you may carry Grandma’s gift and, Huw, you may carry Grandpa’s,” Dafydd said firmly.

“I wanna carry a present,” Dylan said, sticking his lip out in a pout.

“You may carry Jory’s and Ifor’s,” Beth said, handing her youngest two toy animals—a rabbit and a dog—made of calico, “and I’ll carry Auntie Gwyneth’s, Uncle Mark’s and Uncle A.C.’s.”

It didn’t take the five of them long to walk from the rectory to the Cartwright house, but they discovered the three Pentreaths had gotten there first and everyone was sitting on the verandah waiting for them.

“Merry Christmas,” Dylan shouted, running ahead of the others. “I have Jory’s present!”

“I have Grandpa’s!” Huw yelled, catching up with his younger bother while their big sister, with her longer legs, sprinted past both of them.

“Merry Christmas, Grandma! Here’s your present,” and she handed her beribboned box to Bronwen. “I helped Mama make them,” she added, and Bronwen smiled at her as she took the box.

“Here’s your present, Grandpa,” Huw said with a grin, holding out another box decorated with a big bow.

“Here, Jory,” Dylan said, thrusting the calico dog into the outstretched hands of his little cousin, and the nine-month-old little boy with his father’s thick black hair and black eyes immediately began to chew on one of the dog’s paws.

“Don’t eat it!” Dylan said, starting to grab it away, but his tada stopped him.

“It’s Jory’s toy, Dylan bach, and he can chew on it if that’s what he wants to do,” Dafydd said firmly. Then he said with a smile, “Merry Christmas all. Where should I put the pies, Mam?”

“Just set them on the buffet,” Bronwen said with a smile.

“Where’s my present?” Dylan asked hopefully and Adam said, “Now that we’re all here, let’s go in and open our gifts.”

The three children ran inside, but Elen stopped in the doorway, causing her brothers to run around her. Adam and Bronwen had been watching her face and saw the enraptured expression, and shared a tender smile. Elen saw the most beautiful dollhouse in the whole world—a miniature version of Grandma and Grandpa’s house with even a little swing on the verandah and tiny furniture and little curtains at the windows. “Oh, is it mine?” she asked, hardly daring to believe it.

Adam hunkered down by his little granddaughter, feeling his eyes burn with unshed tears as he tenderly cupped her cheek in his palm. “That’s right, precious, it’s yours,” he said softly.

“You’re giving her Penny’s dollhouse?” Beth said, her eyes swimming with tears and her voice ending in a sob.

“Yes, we want her to have it,” Bronwen said gently.

“It was Aunt Penny’s dollhouse?” Elen asked, looking up at her grandpa in wonder.

“That’s right,” he replied. “Uncle Rhys and I made it for her when she was just a bit older than you are. Grandma and I knew that Aunt Penny would want you to have her dollhouse now.”

“I’ll take good care of it, I promise,” the six-year-old said solemnly. She looked over on the credenza at the photograph of the dark-haired little girl with enormous eyes, like hers, smiling at her. “Aunt Penny can look down from heaven and watch me play with it, can’t she?”

“I’m sure she can,” Adam replied, barely managing to hold back his tears.

“Where’s my present?” Dylan demanded then, and his grandma smiled at him.

“Let’s see if Grandpa can help you find it,” she said, standing behind Adam and giving his shoulder a comforting squeeze. He reached up and patted her hand, seeing her eyes were bright with tears just like his. It had been a difficult decision, giving away one of their last tangible links to their precious little girl, but it had just seemed right to give it to Elen, whom they knew would love it as much as Penny had.

“Now, Grandma, did we remember to get a gift for Dylan?” he asked teasingly, but seeing the little boy’s chin begin to wobble he added hastily, “Grandpa was only teasing, Dylan. Here is your gift from me and Grandma, and here’s one from Uncle A.C., one from Auntie Gwyneth and Uncle Mark and one from your Auntie Miranda, Uncle William and cousin, Jon, that came all the way from New Hampshire.”

Soon the Cartwrights’ drawing room resounded to the sound of happy children’s squeals of delight just as it had in years past.

It was a chilly July morning so Bronwen decided the three of them might as well eat breakfast in the kitchen where it was warm. She and Mary were setting the platters of scones, bacon and scrambled eggs on the kitchen table when Adam and A.C. walked in the room. She saw with a mixture of pride and regret that A.C. must have had another growth spurt because he was only about three inches shorter than his father. That wasn’t the only difference she suddenly became aware of. His shoulders seemed broader. Surely her little boy couldn’t be growing up yet; he’d only turned thirteen five months earlier.

As they ate, Bronwen said conversationally, “Mrs. Broome told me that she’s sold the store and she’s going to live with her daughter in Charters Towers. The new owner, a Mr. Paulson, and his family should arrive within the week. Mrs. Broome says they have four children: the oldest is a boy a couple of years older than A.C. and the youngest is a boy Elen’s age. In between they have two girls and the older is A.C.’s age. I know you’ll be friendly to her when she starts school,” she added to A.C.

“Right, Mama,” he replied automatically. He’d be polite but he certainly wasn’t going to befriend a girl. Adam grinned just slightly, well aware of his son’s thought. Still, that was going to be changing soon. He’d walked in A.C.’s bedroom this morning while he was putting on his shirt and noticed the first scraggly black hairs growing under his arms. He grimaced a little, as he realized it was time for another father-son talk. No point in putting it off, so he’d get it over with after supper tonight.

A.C. was surprised when his dad asked if he’d like to go for a ride after supper. “Robby and Bertie and I were going to take a ball and bat and practice.” He saw the slight frustration in his dad’s eyes and said reluctantly, “I guess they can practice without me. Just let me run over and let Robby know.”

“All right,” Adam said, “I’ll meet you at the barn.”

A.C. discovered his dad had gone ahead and saddled Bucephalas for him and they both mounted and rode in silence for a few minutes before Adam turned to look at his son.

“You know, A.C., I can see that you’re changing from a boy to man and so I think we need to have a talk about just what that means. Besides growing taller, I imagine that you’re noticing that your body is changing in some other ways.”

“Yeah,” A.C. replied, not meeting his dad’s eyes.

“I want you to know exactly what changes you can expect,” Adam stated in a matter-of-fact tone. He talked and A.C. listened thoughtfully, until the point where Adam had to bite his cheek to keep from smiling at the look of utter amazement and incredulity on his son’s face.

“You and Mama did that?” he exclaimed, unable to contain his disbelief.

“We wouldn’t be here having this conversation otherwise,” Adam replied dryly. “Marital relations are perfectly natural and the way God designed men and women to express their love for one another.”

A.C. still looked skeptical and then added, “Well, do you still ¼” his voice trailed off.

“That is something private and personal between your mama and me,” Adam replied in a quiet, intense voice, “and it’s not something you should be speculating about. That goes for your sisters and their husbands as well. Do I make myself clear?”

“Yes, sir.” A.C. hesitated. “So it’s only something husbands and wives do?”

Adam sighed. This was going to be tougher than he’d thought. “That’s the way it should be, but no, people who aren’t married also have sexual intercourse. It’s wrong and may result in a baby being born to parents who aren’t married or people catching a horrible, fatal disease, but it happens.” He stopped and then plunged ahead. “Son, I may as well be honest. As you grow older and become a man, you are going to think about having sexual intercourse a lot. You will meet many girls and women that you would like to have sexual relations with, but you shouldn’t. Your mama and I have tried to teach you to respect females, and view them as human beings, not merely as objects for you to use for your own pleasure. The reason I was always so careful about the young men I let your sisters spend time with was that I wanted to make sure they were young men who would respect them.”

A.C. nodded his understanding and they rode in silence for a few minutes until he asked, “So did you ever—you know—with someone besides Mama?”

“That,” Adam said evenly, “is none of your business, just as when you reach the age of twenty-one and are legally an adult, it won’t be my business to know about that part of your life. But until you turn twenty-one, it is very much my business.” He sighed. “Maybe I’ve said more than I should have right now. You’ll probably have more questions as you grow older and I want you to ask me, and not your friends, because chances are they don’t know any more than you do. If you ever feel you can’t come to me, then go to Llywelyn, Dafydd or Mark. Do you promise?”

“I promise.” A.C. looked very serious and then he asked curiously, “Do you think I’ll need to start shaving soon?”

Adam allowed himself to smile as he answered, “I wouldn’t worry about that for a while yet. You’ll see hair growing other places first.”

A.C. said enthusiastically, “You mean I’ll have hair on my chest like you do?”

Adam grinned and replied, “I wouldn’t be at all surprised.” He looked at the sky and said, “The sun will be setting soon so we better head home or your mama will wonder what’s become of us.”

Exactly a week later, when A.C. and the other students entered the schoolhouse, they found four children standing at the front with Miss Andrews. One boy looked older, but no taller, than A.C. and the other was about the same size as Elen. The little girl A.C. dismissed but the older girl he found his eyes lingering on. She wasn’t very tall and her brown hair hung in sausage curls down her back, except for the two that hung in the front. He noticed those curls swelled out because her chest wasn’t flat. His eyes fastened on her bosom and it was only with difficulty that he raised them to her face and saw she had very pretty brown eyes and a soft, smiling mouth. As he stared at her, he was embarrassed to feel his body react and suddenly the talk he’d had with his dad a few days earlier made sense. He quickly looked at the little girl and hoped no one noticed what had happened.

“Boys and girls,” Miss Andrews said, “let me introduce the Paulsons. They just moved to Cloncurry and will be attending our school. This is Christopher,” she said, indicating the older boy, “and this is Victoria,” she said, nodding at the older girl. “They will both be in the grammar class. Priscilla will be in class with David, Simon, Enid, Nellie and Marged.” She put her hand on the little boy’s shoulder and said, “Leonard will be in the primer class with Michael, John and Elen.”

At recess, the boys and girls separated into two groups, except for the very oldest students. Those boys and girls stood around and talked. A.C. found it hard to keep his mind on the ball as he and his mates played catch, for his eyes kept shooting over to Victoria. “What’s the matter, A.C.? You fall asleep?” Robby yelled and the new boy, Christopher, laughed as he missed an easy catch. A.C.’s face turned red and he picked up the ball and threw it to Christopher as hard as he could. He caught it, but A.C. was glad to see it had stung his hand.

When they left the schoolhouse that afternoon, A.C. was walking behind Victoria and saw her drop one of her books. He bent over to pick it up and they just missed knocking heads together, which made them both smile in embarrassment. “Here,” he said, handing her the book with reddened cheeks. He hesitated for a moment and then said in a rush, “That’s a lot of books. If you like, I could carry them home for you.”

“Thank you,” she replied with downcast eyes and pink cheeks. The two of them walked off together, oblivious of the angry and envious looks all the other twelve and thirteen-year-old girls, most of whom had been setting their caps for A.C., were directing their way.

A.C. began carrying Victoria’s books home every day, although he never said a word to his parents about it.

One day about a week later, Adam came home and found Bronwen waiting for him at the backdoor as usual. “How was your day?” he asked after a brief hello kiss.

“Fine. I met the new owners of the general store today. A.C. came along to help me carry the packages. He offered to help the older girl with their geography assignment and Mrs. Paulson gave her daughter permission to come here and study with A.C. They’re in the library,” she added as they walked through the backdoor. They stood in the library’s doorway and saw A.C. and Victoria sitting on opposite sides of the partner’s desk, their heads bent over their work. As they watched, A.C. reached over hesitantly and wrapped his left hand around Victoria’s. She looked up and smiled at him, and neither of them noticed the adults in the doorway looking on.

Adam guided Bronwen up the hall until they were out of earshot before saying quietly, “Well, sweetheart, I’d say our little boy is definitely becoming a man.” He saw the wistful expression on her face and hugged her gently.

“I’m sorry I ever teased you about the girls,” she said, managing a rather woebegone smile.

He gave her another squeeze and added, “It’s all part of being a parent, and I’m looking forward to the day when it will be the two of us, just as it was when we were first married.

“Yes, I’m looking forward to that day,” she replied with a more convincing smile. “We are so blest that we have a marriage of true minds, and our love has not altered with the passage of time.”

“Amen to that,” he replied with feeling, bending down as she stood on her tiptoes, so they could kiss.

References:

For information on the Oregon Trail, I used http://www.isu.edu/%7Etrinmich/Allabout.html and

http://www.oregontrailcenter.org/t_calif.shtml Now, I must confess that even though I moved Adam’s date of birth up to 1836 so when he was six years old there would be wagon trains heading west, his description of his journey actually comes from the 1850s rather than 1842 when he and his family traveled. And even though I think the series mentioned them leaving from St. Joseph, Missouri, I chose Independence, partly because it was the most popular jumping off point, and partly because it’s my hometown. Years after I moved away, Independence built a nice pioneer museum. They have a hands on exhibit where you’re given a list of the supplies you’ll need to take and then you get to try and figure out how you can pack all the supplies in the replica wagon without the buzzer going off saying it’s too heavy.

Finally, Lt. John C. Fremont and his expedition were the first Americans to see Lake Tahoe and that wasn’t until 1844 about a year after I have the Cartwrights settling there. I’m afraid it’s impossible to make all historical facts jibe with events presented on the show. I just do the best I can like everyone else.

For information on Radcliffe College I used A Century to Celebrate: Radcliffe College, 1879-1979

I found information on 19^th century American toilets at http://www.theplumber.com/closet.html and http://www.geocities.com/victorianlace11/tour_kitchenwc.html

Since Adam has lived in Australia for so long now, I decided he would switch from a Stetson to an Akubra Slouch hat, except I learned at the time this story takes place they were known as Dunkerley hats. I learned about them at http://www.akubra.com.au/history.html

For information on Cesarean sections I used http://www.nlm.nih.gov/exhibition/cesarean/cesarean_4.html

Glossary of Welsh and Australian Words and Phrases:

Welsh

Anwyld – beloved

Bach and fach – adding bach after a man’s name or fach after a woman’s is a form of endearment.

Cariad – dear or darling

Dw i’n dy garu di – I love you

Hendaid – great-grandfather

Hennain – great-grandmother

Hwyl - goodbye

Mam – mother

Mam-gu – grandmother

Tad – father

Tada - daddy

Tad-cu – grandfather

Australian

Beauty or Beaut - Translation: That’s great! or Fantastic!

Crook is a synonym for sick

Drongo – a stupid person

Fair dinkum – used as a substitute for “Oh really?” or “true”

He’ll be right – He’ll be all right or He’ll be okay.

I feel stuffed – I’m tired

Jackeroo – cowboy

Jillaroo - cowgirl

Right – Okay

Ripper – great (A.C.’s expression “What a ripper” indicates how impressed he is)

She’ll be apples – It’ll be all right

Stone the crows! - I asked Joan Sattler for an Australian version of “My gosh!” or “My goodness!”(an expression that Adam’s children could use without having their mouths washed out with soap)

Too right – definitely

Tucker - food

You're up yourself – Translation: “You have a high opinion of yourself”

RETURN TO LIBRARY